Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E

MAZATROL
MATRIX
CLASS ROOM
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Mazak
Digital MJTUf@PMtOg Solutions
IN
ONE
MATRIX Sale points

'0?
lifiM
...
f*
$ . t4
..4
n*j|*c*
/:
display
mctions.
|e
7
'
jySgQyyj~T- vC 11
M
-
&2AWOX
s==
muJ1 lg0'3Spic5Sgv';; .;S313i

J
-'-
4;
"
-:=
. -vV>
V-
I.-'-'1'
a
olwj *. It Iflj1
>'1
- 1 1*. IT
jTBil I j
[-TTT
mi
G3i f 1 :''<
TTI j
f v;1:1:1;1:1:1:1;1.!
! * I < f * I * I * J *fll3 I-I-~I112*
a -l~f
*
|g||
-.1
:~
{ ;/l
<?
1&
mMm
NC type
:.S
machine
display
PC
CPU
m
V.'-v.
MATRIX
INTE-M-INTE-eHU
_ _
INTE-DI INTE-e
Variaxis II -INTE-eVll
15" TFT
12. 1 "TFT
(XGA)
(SVGA)
Pentium in
NC
6 4 bit RISC
CPU
PLC
capability
Dual CPU
No. of steps: 128k
process time: 16.6ns
Geode
300MHz
6 4 bit RISC
Single CPU
No. of steps :64k
process time: 160ns
Servo
AMP
MDS-DH series
cycle time :11 M S
MDS-CH series
cycle time: 55 MS
servo
motor
3000/ 4000 r.p.m

(depend on motor)
2000/3000 r.p.m
encoder
capability
16,000,000 ppr
1,000,000 ppr
PC
OS type
Windows XP
Windows 2000
(Windows 95)
1,26GHz
>1
Ergonomically Designed Control Pane

1. Large display
(15inch)
Hi1$
'1
LvJ
>
\i
2. "QWERTY" key 1
e. i
h
,*
3, Acrylic key top
for easy click
II
4. Rotary override
switches
-L
..
5. Operation
switches in
operator side
"
-~
- .1 i
1 -VI I -
dm A
CM
i1
ril
:r
function
7. Same design for all

machines
*
Y;
:f
<
6. Key layout by
8. Tactile feel switches K

- allow an operator
to detect by feel
The equipment of a USB interface as standard has facilitated data upload/download and connection to peripheral equipments
that support IJSB.
In addition, large volumes of data can be transferred at high speed between networks with the 100BASE-TX compliant
LAN and that realizes seamless communications between an office and a machine in a factory.
Interface
USB
Ethernet
|
iPC card
Connected to
Standard
USB 1.1
1 00BASE-TX/1OBASE-T
iBack / lch
!
jPC Card Standard 95/97 compliant (CardBus)
iBack / 2 slots -PC Card Standard compliant (PCMCIA_V2. 1, JEIDA_4.2 compliant)
j 2 slots Type I/U ma x 2, Type IE: 1
'Front / 3ch
EC card
Front / 1 slot
jPC Card Standard ATA compliant memory card only

: 1 slot Type I/E (Type IE cannot be used.)
'#15/#
MATRIX
i"\
RSS
r3
U.I-2S6
*33
5 j T > lij
!
-;T:
mMml
fIS
POO
;: i;
TS,
.:/
m mm
l
m m '#
MmK 4m
i-
ifir
(Back Side)
9MR:
i mm i
..r
100BASE-T 1/F
PC Card x 2
& ;B;
$&&
II
ttrr
wmr
in
***
use x 1
IC Card x 1
lf jg|
I iM|||f#i|
.** *;; :.
|J
USB x 2
Rear side of part surrounded

with the yellow frame
is??
PC Card
T
safe&
I
Si
v-;3
J*
: !;
iHH
IS
iT: r
I [pgw,h
!M
pii
C;
m-V'.1
T:
ill.
MT
01
..
s'
..
:;
*11111
ai
JR" M9ll!R|p?4
Yi
ML
1Hfl
Hr
r
mm
m
IF
IT
*,
UN
mpr*
imp
f*
- -
Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit

Reliability up because decreasing interfeces between each boards
WP
as
mm
..
M640MP r o 1 3 boards
.a';
yp!sfJ
;
&
MP
"
; ;
i-
sSIg
i
m
1
111
.
V-
MATRIX 5 boards
Decrease start-up time in cold climates because of equipment hard disk which
is used as car navigation
item
Operation temperature
0C NC start-up time
M640
5-55 C
About 22 min utes
MATRTIX
0-55 C
About 2 minutes
In addition to the existing work simulation for checking programs, the machine simulation has been added to check the
processing programs including a machine interference using fine 3D models of such as the machine, a workpiece and a tool.
1) Tins function will prevent a machine interference or collision before actual processing.
2) Both of Mazatrol and EIA/ISO programs can perform a simulation.
* The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the 5-axis (4-axis) simultaneous machining.
:t:
The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the mold machining using the micro segment program
3) This function simulates the machine real with 3D models of the machine and equipped tools. (The machine will be
delivered with the 3D models set.)
4) A simulation can be run in the background.
Machine simulation
Work simulation
I SB
f
x''
fwifcfc
-fi
*.*:* r*.s*
a.l
I
1 i :-Wj l mu.
-I*#*.. MW
-iK.Jt
*tl
1.*,
ii
34.1.
Wmm
HMVtXXXK JM1
*-.
<C*M
* 3.
.
"
;
i 7
tr
**>.
; SV.AT .
<K#9 i mm
II
!
I
if;
If
II
SiktlSPI
is*
&3<w*aga<iicsBSi
II
W&
"'t
WBJJEfcJAJ,arrcir
S'
flip
;;
MW MMP WWBB I
**i##,*lli*
ii
r
NHM
PM1
; *K.
1W
MKSW
mmm
AO
.......
mi i
it'
n__
*
?> **/)
I'
f
wAir
tilm#wi
Bras*;:;
WMTSias;
aw#
feiffAfSii*
iwwrt1
i Base
** \
The intelligent safety shield function prevents an interference or a collision due to an operational error during the manual
operation.
1) During the manual operation, the ganged operation of the actural machine and the 3D model simulation can check the
processing status and stop the machine before an interference or a collision ocurs.
2) Checking with 3D models will prevent an interference on a part where an operator cannot see directly.
3) The integration of the actual machine and 3D models simulates the machine movement exactly.
4) The machine can be set up quickly because there is no need to worry about an interference or a collision.
Actual Machine
3D Models
mm
m
1
"X,
**-
M
.1
- Hfen
>
!i
IS
LX
'A1,
:1
&
4
I
li.;
tl fil
h
i
'i
i-,
* m
mm
M
,..il
m m
'
>
**
I;,:-'.
IU
I
I Iflll
flllllg
"
Sts
-i
111
rp
r1
fcjMJ
? <r
Tr
4-
li
r* i
[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]
Outline
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation considering that the thermal
deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using this method, the thermal displacement could be
compensated with the high accuracy in the steady state. However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not
be compensated properly because the constants did not match between the times when the thermal displacement and the
measured temperature changed.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the thermal deformation of the
machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. And it monitors the spindle speed and compensates the thermal
displacement according to the speed; therefore, it can compensate it properly even in the transient state.
10
The MAZAK voice adviser is the audio messages by MATRIX itself with the speaker embedded in CNC of MATRIX,
notifying the safety confirmation, the contents of the operation during the set up of the machine and others. It is greatly
effective in preventing a mistake due to the lack of attention during every working process.
1)14 languages (As for some old Eastern European countries, please use English or a neighboring country's language.)
The MAZAK voice adviser has 52 messages such as greetings and notifications at the machine set-up, when starting the
automatic operation, during the automatic operation or during the maintenance work.
&
Good morning. Today is <dayofweek> <rnonth> <day>"

."Tins is manual operation at 10 times the feedrate."
'"The B-axis is selected. Pay attention for any turret interference."
|"Tool length measurement for a tool has not been completed."
|"Machine has stopped because optional stop is effective."
|"Add spindle lubricant." and other messages.
M
..
Internal speaker
<****? vg*T-
1 11
ili
r?
-j
ii
iii
'w''
'MM
-i-nri *.
HI
i~~
MI
V.
k.
mmm
fBiiipimm
mm mm
fifed*mmmmmmmmmmmmm mmm
mmm
&&&****
&
I r~m mmmmmmmmmmm mmmm

\m mmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmma
8
m
MR
The Mazatrol program has made it possible to control the upper turret with the 1st spindle and the lower turret with the 2nd
spindle simultaneously.
1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting

1
1
rlFs
y[i
Hi*]
31
31
rill
31
31
SfijHS
fjl
31
31
1B5B31
31
31
j]
t][r]
Processing which used two programs (HEAD -1,HEAD -2) like Multiplex cannot be performed in INTE MATRIX senes.
...
Simultaneous cutting at unrelated work pieces
mm
Work No.1
Work No. 10
11
12
1,
Alarm history
1) A history of 10,000 alarms can be saved. (48 alarms in case ofM640)
2) Tire data is saved in the text format. Therefore, it is useful for gathering the alarm information.
[ C:\MC_s dgWarm\Alarm. bet]
3) It is possible to register 48 alarms that are not saved in the history file, such as Alarm No. 128 "OUTSIDE
INTERLOCK AXIS," which occurs frequently.
4) The alarm number has been increased 4 digits due to the addition of new functions.
3*8
**
ms i
fXAftm
**
# It
1*W It**!.
re*- *.#t
3*8 4M MM fc*f Mrs- IfSJStvM MMJ
IKrf (M|
** * X KWiMMKin< 1*01 ISM

US* S'MMW'IK* ISMS.
a OKMKMWf
jHtoNMr:
I
,-.
i* mm
318
**
8OTW
mt* in
a** HAS KM
ass
>
***>:
<88 ttfjunftMfc *<*
**
so
I#
Am",
S3 **
*V M
If
if
&< *.
sssssS
TOW
t-SIM
IOTWI
ai
* ka
erwtase
>*.
iJM*
s* ,n
t
saw.
m'MWM'
.
it
3* i?
S t*
*
ItWMB ***. .#***

MH SU*i 1#*0* KW-* .
tAa*
"m&Ktxt
?;*
V*
'*.**
3* if rra.bi.f
mm
s*
*,
o. ss* s*
me
a*s *f<x MM
:
m **
VK
******
** SUI&U, tH&ttl,* ttmwr
2*
a m.tf ISB
*'
s*
if 1 S3 ** %tx*m
if *.' 3 t* vm*w
SUSIMS. wsmtt;* CJM*ur
W
SO
Vr U
i* la
I* sa
S* *:
i. *
JO:
fctttlS'tw
S 24
1A..W
*##* Bttf
2SS *5 tOM.
zttt
i *
w I
i'X*i
K* itw J*N
*.*
wW'Sentb.
>
SS di'lr'
| **'
sat**;-#:*!
mmOs
*+
II
ww:
tllte II
?*'
-I
i,
. Running Management Display

1) The running management data for 12 months can be displayed.
2) The use status of spindles and the alarm information can be checked each day.
Use status of spindles (speed and load)

n iw
sn **
* rmi
8 :
<>*.
wt
*wwtw
*T W
Alarm information
9kn.rtm
tx
Li *>T **
H Bsm? *#?*||tssum'
<S '
>< t>S
*3H
jsiitxa
xt
**
S;*
feJfS
BeiSa&ai
&*** s s'M? ammwm f***

m\ VMMK *emt *K***SM: .{;*
mm
'uta
3SrtSM*.*fi
T. * ><0
B9-: M
iW*
ws.nt
*: H#
*.:#*
*?
**%*
jtWKJUss*
'
Sfrft
HMtf-J X
<<)
AW*
*i in; is
{.-V
*>*
K':i Sti
*ME
H fcS
*'I- *
I*
36:
**
*/ S
H ?<t 3
MEM I
vrt*> >
AM.
* #.
S UM*
wa-
t
S >
**;
:'l
i
1 <*
KW4
kwaiK
<<:*
.V;x5scsssssxd
***
>**.
ssssKSsxJssissxsx;
* mm.
%
u<m
;si! iSSSKSSSSXK
: **<* xwrnm?
* **> 1
JL
JXXSXSSS KSSXKSSXSX:
13
14
3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display
The data of TO MONITOR DISP" are always displayed in both "SHORT" and "LONG." Also, one block of
data for "MEMORY MONITOR DISP" and two blocks of data for "I/O MONITOR DISP" have been
increased.
4. FLC SIGNAL Display
The addresses of a device corresponding to each "TITLE" are displayed.
5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display

The contents of the display will be altered due to the hardware change.
6. VERSION Display
The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.

UNIT
ITEM
MAIN-21
MAIN-B
LG-ENG
LADDER-F
VERSION
1001W000-A*W0
1001W001-A*W0
1001W011-AXW0
100 1W5 6 8 - AO 016
LADDER- B 10 0 1W568-A0 0 IB:

LGP
7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays

Tire servo data is displayed on the "SPINDLE MONITOR" display, as the spindle has become servo type.
8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu

Application softwares can be started from the Mazatrol menu by editing a text file for a menu, (e.g.:
C:\MC__s dg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu. txt)
9,
Standard Installation of Print Screen Software on NC
A file can be saved in either of the TNG" and BMP" formats.
IS Print Screen 3
:
& SAVE
Active Print Screen & SAVE
10, Operation Log & Operation Player Softwares (M740Eye.exe
& M740Player.exe)
15
In case that a low reproducible trouble occurs during a complicated operation, it can be replicated by repeating
the operation using the operation log and operation player softwares, winch have been installed on NC as a
standard specification.
16
17
18
Control Overview
Control unit
MI-P12-M2 board
FCU7-MA513-22
HN011 card
HN102 card
HN123 card
HN163 card
HN482 card
HN531card
.*
[%,
IK
MI-P12-M2 : Board PC unit

HN011
HN102
HN123
HN163
HN482
: Relay card
:PLC engine card

: Sub-CPU card
: NC base card
: Memory card
(FLROM/SRAIVI)
19
HN531
-.Axis extension I/F

and CardBus slot
20
Back Side of Matrix

(jBWi
;VT**':C
Mi
ail
ix-#
Wwmm
M
i
PUK
:
v.t?
M$M
2 Backlights
IU.MIIHW
ill
I
im
wm
jwWMNggg*-.
IS85
SB
pl*l*
M.-mm
'MM!
:-'
Efc
it
US
I
S
|#S
L..._iaaiiiSjH mm
ir
y,
'
-V
-.l
(EffiiSiK
m
1RS?
m
'4*
~w-
ms
I;;'.
-M
wimmm w
$3#
(S
T;
r'-;:
mn
-I
%..
:-i
i'i
&
rS
kjtCi'i:.-:
.g
iiMMHI
'*:r.OT
e-
Right Side of Back
K? \
mf
':5
1:
Rotary 2 settings
1 = Pic Stop
= Initialize
Battery Plug
- S
4J1S1
m.
r<;ii
c:
lw
i la
m:wsl
"TJ
!V
MBm
5 -
L:
i,
m
;
in
iS
s?
iv.
ri1
y
-
Pf
Two Leds Display

Right side is like Fusion
Left will be always 1 .
Rotary Switch 1
Always = 0.
Rotary Switch 2
Like M640.
-k
si.
V3
I PI
21
Hi
|P
2 Usb 1.1 Plugs
id
100 Megabyte
Ethernet
22
Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup

the hard-drive
important
files
WBSBSSBSBSSBSSSmm
Top of Unit
Top of Matrix
- 2 Backlights,
top and bottom
Vt
%
r-,
'
jpampi I
i
;
fe .
2 large fans
2 Slot Pcmcia-32 bit
;.*?
ff
si?'
n ,n
XiierlR-'
'
Mw ,V:;
Pisi
Jr-
...
'vr'
....... .
r1
II I III I
iw
ruSSS
HSPii
.
iv'v;
tail
IBBHHH JH 5*
-dm
:-.
:& * u * -
. vr
v >'
V:j
sm
.-'
SI
RYJ
1111
ImAl
KHKEM
5wr- -; v>
gPiiS'pBpI 1
i
is
j,fc(V1),.lt,il.I.i
. f* f
X?
m. SaH
y.u
-V.'-
Mfil
"vr . .
IKS:
>a
m
T+m
-:
Bottom of unit
-
...
if
IssSslli
|:
j -;:C;
"'i
raw
(.. :
H
c,
.:;
;:-
"
mtmmw
fi:;V;
,-,- ..-i'*
'.'.'r-*-''*'"'* -v'
'vj
T
/
~ 11
:/! : . j
J
.wjjtj
fasm
M'S
W7
.-W..irm.P
iiaii
r-r'
?!;
k$
iSMMKT
%i
m f? t
sr
i
l
BPP!SWs
JM*
>4
;: -
Sira
Wits
i
ilflpf
f-P
iTf
hv:
V,
$'
Tu umnTXi.i.
3 IS:
" w*
j;
~irjk
ft
vJL'
".T.- 'C !_. '
IS
JSfiSS
IS! faPl
ill
i
Fl
'
lv:-
23
Bottom Backlight
Opt 2, To
MDS-DH Drives
fj
,1:
Mbw
Opt 1 , To
MDS-DH Drives, 1st Set of 8.
II
11
11
Sis
24
MIP12M2
PC Card.
1 .2 giga-hertz
256mb memory
XP Embedded
HN260
USB Connector Card
Considered connection point for the 2 back USB 1.1 devices.
Plugs into the Pc Board MIP12M2
HN260 card
M1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB

'G 'j
<2
-191.5 H
- V
i&.wiiiiiiiiiMm iriii:i Ti 1 1':
fSoUol
[2*00-1
f]
m
% LP
jit
in
/
.* 'i f3*pri
i
hi
1
m
G
S:
v&sjgmm
G-_.
:i
s,
M
-/
'
I
I
1m
;u
1#
iff
......
Gijg.
=mnsi
-
[Ml
v* VsyM
25
PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB
26
HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus

Also called Relay card as relays signals between the PC to NC.
I SIS
caa|Fi. f 1
*118111 8S1mIII1
.iJSlSmmr mm
I ftisiSfi Sif ssl
J8P9 ifPIliy
m f>i
-I
MdP
:
r
..
IBH
m HR*
$838
KS
HN163 or HN154: NC main PCB

. .' v->
' Jfeg1':
A'
MS
SSESI
tjv
Si
'
i;l
li
ns ifl
;!
<
ES
Jj
MS
Sill;
6'
o *;?
1;
'r *
ESC
as.
<HBS(91
wmfm
,;
m
<~1
.-lfiS
:.:P*-
tl
st-tx1 I
?<
gS
.<
''KKK
8#
!}'
aWfe,
a SS
At V
SSI 55S II
4*
'
CS*30
mavnH
i.
a,
iff!
sS!
27
28
HN163-HN203-HN123
m
aR
nm
i&
wii'1]
to
Hr-
Si
Kli
.i
wm
77Pr
|U
*n
ma
Ms
EKMP
mm
MB
MnmmSSinmWm: -
MS m
Hi
Li
S38
mV
i ? M
ii
SB
MB
K .
&
rs
'
'i
i!
tear*"
Pic car
sa
pftissfcas
&T
n:!i
,'v.
mm
,
E5
UTM
'AT EMEI
TIT
mm
JB
Jill ||M
es
fS;
'aes
~i
ii
in
'
:-;
Vr)'(Sy-
Ss
ffS
IfE
IS
'.II >';>:!
Ij ife
I tm,
mm
isss
S2
E
Vv<
a ss:- ;l
!!'tllilily
: J jk H s
9
|i
?!
r
*
i
fWffiW
fr
LAL-nrsr
HW
Sli#Mi
IK
ir'-'j
nyav
MsflJSl
U ii
HN 1 02 Bf'SWs__
Sale
An
m
H
hm
aN
'r
3
23
HR
a*
fi:
L2Q
Ml
'i'-
ii
7T
iU
B& 1
BBKE
V\l
Mi
'f:
Ti
rUmm
IE
ssHa
I II
mm
mm
m
mm
fej
[. V
HS
r,,
im
m
- m
ns
im
HN123
i
Sub-CPU
HN102
m
ivVI
L-
Pic Engine Card. Where the plc(s)
resides.
Stores the pic ladder and 11register information
Also, Latching parameter registers.
Capacitor backed up for 30
minutes
Si
;wA Jflr
>
Tglifs
i
I$
Jfr&k:-,iOl
K&%i'Tm
iiMaSs
Sri
*x
!j ,4$? iSSEs
JF,
n*
jH
9B
IBIf88
l<
ftpe
Pfgl
Hi
In
;*S-.
mmmm
BBSPPKM
ii
c?
tm
... ..
; ,j
ByJ
,TrlE
mwm
32tjT
*1
'W:
/irrai'
jfc
1 1>- nT7vr
29
);
Mai
>A
fcEWK?!
hV
-ii
HS
jU*
fc
apgte.i!p
p;
Pl-
5l
32
wsswa
y>.,
"
>
a*
*11
as
ir
31mn
'JUr
3
b\*p
Wi
'-'J*
S3
'SI i5- f
fc
...-
*
1
.LI
St
--*--
jO
*r
.iss
~J.'T~
CN
c/o
i-H
a
O
o3
T3
03
co
?-i
o
CN
30
u>
*T
**".**
O
4h
T3
CD
CO
bS)
G
,-G
o
G
G
5-h
>
1
m.
m i!
TOttj, 'i
IfijBS
r-rec
*>XI MvnrtffHtani
!<*#*
-~/5 S
U*'
'-
=-,'-
-Wr
>t_ >>:
T3
:<
rV
IS!%
3 -usgsyrsignaw vaftsakasteri
IB
GH
\aM
:
V?v
-.
L-
1
r
Bf
<.~i
9
_
'
fl
sV.
a
<ajAi.-zei2
-r-
pifftiWl!
&
il
m
..
jLiCli
im
li
y ma'1
R
iflfci
k-
fcMM
il
I [c:Vjj
as
**
k.j
!<
l-|
'3
n
!-
[-1
i-i ti
iin
..
W*
HN482
Main Memory Card
This is where the Sram data is stored,

Machine parameters, Tool data, etc.
Contains Main A, control s.n, and the Option
information
Capacitor backup for 30 minutes
31
32
HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM
k
j
73
R3-N0.40 I
iiljBi
3
PftfftfPnMn ifiteaiiffl I
m
SUBf;
as--
This contains Main-A, Control Serial Number,

Options, and SRAM data(parameters,tool data, etc.
Changing this requires control s.n. and options.
Like Hrl 13
HN531 : PCMCIA slots (2) and 2nd servo interface (OPT2)

CardBus l/F
2 Slots CardBus, 32 bit.
-r
f"
Si
ml
&JJL2
'i j aSfey
*w iS
'
[T1
i:
s c
tempi
55
pfyl
jOK
-N
ess
MM1
ss
H
0
i3
~t
I
I
V
|.a
*sm *5
d + lL
5US
P
3IT
itJlV:
(j
Tf:
IT: .n
gpc'l!
SEIa
Mil
SH
?
.Wi-'
33
0pt2
34
HN251
Similar to HR25 1 on the M640
Includes the Compact Flash card input as well
as USB
connection.
USB connection is 1 .1 version, not 2.0.
G291 cable connects to Pc Card for USB
G160 cable connects to HN163 for compact flash.
HN251 : Front slot PC card and USB interfaces
/V K
'r-
:>
'wm,
rv&m>if
>'
V-,
'.
r*
m5 Ml
ms
w-iiM %
m
p
m1
'l
rnirnm
irar
sa
ii
r1
'
TV
a-'*-
r**\
35
36
HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB

Sw
;/ -y
*35
'
V--""
S%-
A' ;ji'
':.
254
.?r
f/'r
s.'
S:
5'W'
\: -NS
58
r it i *,
Si
mm
T'i
ani :
:iu
Si
mmm
xm
mmm
*2*2 n
iv-y-n;
HH
sdllillh
,- j
TSSE
S>7:S;;.,a
rA
' '
MSSBSSm
&8fc
LA
fc>
:-
BRMtal0|l M
jpagps
I,
.'*>
MB
\:ig
s!
H
L'i
APFi
bfe3$>3s?#paH
L*flG_SJ
*jmmL
Lli5
I-Si
iVrijuvuiiK-u'iuliit
"
Kissif
Si
'.
S-;s''
.* -.
;i;mm
(
y-f'l
mmmm,
.
.
iS !!**
?lisl
1
*
./>/'*
\
a mJ
I |gjgggj|
'Vi/..
S3
it
_,1 A
LW
mmRs
;'SS
pm
;v
.r- .P:i
.....
._
m
?P4;
v"
HHSM0
m.
la
'
e-i;
7'
SBS
HN353
Similar to HR353 card
Except the servos now go directly to the NC by fiber
optic cable.
Supports 14 Mr-J2 drives
Supports the Remote I/O. Communicates to HR371
remote I/O cards.
37
WMm
36
: .V '
Wi
'-
j ravt..
'
IIIIB
IPB
pSg
wSfJa i
E3U*:
#
!
to:
T3
I
W-J3
pq
*-H
ft 5.
3p
wis
Mi
I'M
iin
JUi =-SB.
l-i-.v
"S
IK1
If
s
1
Iil1
HE
sssi
-a
1!
m
&
-ri
;"X
SiS
WMJ
iv
IPW
if.
33
i'
i'-A-
iJt*
[rj
1
1
"
m.
EJ
Uotl
=*
p
-J
HOi
$sS33i
111
Iglll
p;
&!
ip
BgI
3
i
,j
5*1-
iEy
HIIISEJM! S<
rail
H
it:
tmn
II
mm
u
as:
ILK
!5*
Si
@n
n-
ffl.?!
n-I?
..Sliill
tit
&2&:|
-M-
f: -f
JIM
*-
Saa
tessh
s )
'lb
ft!
11/iP;*A i
r;E
Vrffi
i
i
MI
Itf
ST
.rv
!gH r
*
> -s 4
*9
7,
ssa
'il
ct,
is
a-P;
Ift
*,
*ri 5fs, <-;#

p
=HW!|
.*
..1
iTf*
>'V/1
igSBffj
|c< j
-M
1
p*
'-i
.x-
:! w
*1
fOCESt
6l
its 8-1I -. A&H
U j
m
m
38
rjj
liVjF M;
[
L-i
-*#
HMiSS
#V*Tf
ij,.;
yp-
c3
&
Kg
"rr.
Js
ie
HSC:
;. 't
SI
:r:|
[-
St-;:-5
'
3Si[Wi
'v
Ill;
i
fel
...
....
NC covers: Top and middle
.....
... ..
r.&tm:
&&aQL
:
:*iSb
mmmm
&
Ml
H'- V
?
'
' i>
ill
SSm
!.;,l
,v
?kI
ii
'
y-j;
'iv/'FTiy
$ - M ? .
BmgMm
;*mrn
iiai
;
mmmrn
MS
SB
..
IIMI
FCA750PY-N01
mm, K
pS
-7n
i:
.j
fcy >'-.
[.v ''u--..-:-
v.
5"i 3
1
MP0e0O70360D0 l
"iii
TTTjTTTJ T;J
v.'V;
la
pifp
Blit
.//
?..vV
P
WMj
tiamsL
i?
'
39
- -
/.-
40
CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15 LCD
\-y
if
i inn
Jr'
mm
i i .:
?V,
"SfflS'
t':
,"y
x
<
IS
'Q
NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire for overheat detection

1
****: V
ii
"
'V
14
TO
\
(*
ml
l-v?
fMk
<
i'
MMF -06D240S
24VPC- 0 . 0 3 A
D 4201 G 1 RP3
Mt'LCG irCHN0P(k'C0-,LTD.
MADE I/< CHINA
mm
Bill
llss
lA
JB
(HlOa?
|Rf|j
Vi
p'r- ;
i*
xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ
<v ,v
jiSii
41
42
PD27 Power Supply

Similar to PD25 Power Supply for Fusion and Mpro.
Outputs 24v after power off to maintain voltage to
hard drive for controlled shutdown.
!
::
K*.
ii
:
Machine Keyboard
Has 2 fuses
If fail, recommend to replace complete assembly.
aH
i
'
<|
mpi
Us
;4
!.4
*.'
Mi
*
-k
/3
<;S5fc
tft
1:
Tfjg
~
*
1.
.!
7 :
Ifi
If
iv
ijipi
s;
:A
St
r:
s:
85
:<-..
i;Vcyj''
r.Hf
m
I
WM&3
!!
"j
[g
43
-vr
< .
.v
: Ml.;.:: r* * . *4_
'
i/.VFwifc
SHii
......
-h>
I.W
"M?!
StASlS;
i1
I 1
T.V-'-
J-
.if*,:
yia
.1 .-;
t-W
. :
S ,LI
J
SBaiilP
mi
NpjjK
?'!
&
11;
Ml
UkNiH[i!t:yiJOT9T
F Ju_.;L b
?Si
FS
-
SIS
IsS
:
i
>
!.
<1
'
gv2
vasar
.......
-p; g
H. jj
':':
tfii9cr is
i
:
JLi
UJw> i ir-A u
I
a
'
SPf-
fl||p
A-
5= MSS*
rS ,OTV
!;K1
t-1
'.
..*
'
Wmtm
PR,.Jy tT*V~ F!.
'
,r
S''
A.
A.
sp-raacKa
;i
P#A?
:.;
JIVM
fep
'5,,
iy,-
PC-'i
si
3E
tan
:rm
rr
CJ
f'sl
SAMPLE.
m
ii
I
EE
a 13,
&
m
m
m
K ii
44
Hard Drive
Embedded Windows XP software
20 Gigabyte hard drive
No need for heater as guarantee to operate at 0 degree weather. Similar to
hard drive used in car GPS systems.
gpfc
fiwll
r*
55
,
fTmf
p irim
lsr. i
1 *
l?gl ;.
mmMm
.a
e-2J* S
::
'"'a
V-
BlKwriSSj;
IX
.i
MB
f
m
"p
[}
mu
s;
']
MBWII
Ss* sul Bw
I. jBpR|pilir
ll
ft
..waa.
ir
&*.%*>
r"
;<Si
k3 I'l
"i. i
P !8!
l*
'
FT.
An embedded system is a special-purpose system in

which the computer is completely encapsulated by the
device it controls. Unlike a general-purpose computer,
such as a personal computer, an embedded system
performs one or a few pre- defined tasks, usually with ver
specific requirements. Since the system is dedicated to
specific tasks, design engineers can optimize it,
reducing the size and cost of the product. Embedded
systems are often mass-produced, so the cost savings
may be multiplied by millions of items.
Handheld computers or PDAs are generally considered
embedded devices because of the nature of their
hardware design, even though they are more expandable
in software terms. This line of definition continues to blur
as devices expand,
Physically, embedded systems range from portable

devices such as MP3 players, to large stationary
installations like traffic lights or factory controllers.
45
46
..A
Connector layout drawing

NC back
FAN 1
S3i
"TO NT
FAN2
in
fTT3T
t
zL
ON/ OFF
CardBus
BAT
UJUV
UUUp-
USB!
USB2
I
.
uasassrs
CONNECTION
DESCRIPTION
Fan 1 & 2
Fan connections
CardBus
PCMCIA I/F x 2
ON/OFF
ON/OFF SW connection
BAT
3.3V battery
USB1 & 2
USB I/F x 2
CRT
External CRT I/F (not used)
LCD
Internal LCD I/F
LAN
Ethernet I/F
CF25
External +24V (not used)
HDD
Hard drive I/F
FDD
Floppy drive I/F
EMG
Emergency stop
CF24
Remote ON/OFF to PD27
CF01
Power off detection
DC IN
+24V from DCOIJT on KB
CRT
(MvrVT)
LCD
Z3
LAN
c
ZTT
:NV
INV
FRONT OUT
31
cog
i/i
DCiN
CFO I
cF*>
, . :
CF24
EMG
so
<y
Ena
FDD
ro
cm
1C
HDD
OF25
Backlight inverter I/F
Front slot l/F
47
48

NC bottom
CGI 2
OPT2
CF10
CF50
\
R
71
04
EE
*5*
alii
7/f
|M*J
LJ
| = ri
ZJ.
im i-1
TO
ftT
fei
{Jq
kf
p
Mill
|o|l
EPbr
Mil
CONNECTION
0PT1
CF55
DESCRIPTION
CGI 2
Keyboard l/F Bus connection
CF 10
Base I/O main I/F
OPTI & 2
Optical servo I/F
CF50
2'"1 servo I/O I/F
CF55
Additional I/O, servo I/F

Keyboard unit
<PD27 t<D\m)
CR22
MOUSE \
CR21
J2
CR31
ON/OFF
INV
CGI 2
<j
-7Y2
t: !
CR32
0
littfr
mm
TL
77
MPKEY
Soft menu key I/F
m
/
J4
J3
DC
MPG
SIOPC
PCON/OFF
KB I/F
+12V for backlight I/F
DCIN
+24 V from PD27

+24 V to DCIN on Main PCB
CFOI
Power off detection
RI03
Terminator connection
.13 & 4
NCKEY
RS232C I/F x 4 (2 CH ea)

Internal s/w ON/OFF
HPG I/F
+24V from I/O PS
Sub op I/O J3IN, J4+OIJT

NC KB I/F
MPKEY
ON/OFF SW connection
INV
DC
SIONC
SPEAKER
NC KB I/F for MPX machine

only
NCKEY /
.12
MPG
IMT
Additional I/O I/F
PCON/OFF
CR3 1
SIONC & PC
Additional I/O I/F
DCOUT
*
0:::v-
CR21 & 22
CG12
M3
DESCRIPTION
ON/OFF
o
A
CONNECTION
E H
CFOI
jn
DCOUT
DCIN
R[03
49
50
Rotary Switch & Segment LED

T\fT
T--
4-
'~:Z
'.npirrja
ii
:
l!
T=lir:
ZJ!i
is
f
I
I 4irnTit;
I! Ii! !l ija
;JI II?
i!
.
::
!
!
. -r::::
!i:
I*3
'M hi
M
'
viw..
(-)
LED1
LED2
i
i
SW1
;p
J6
0
!
.-SSZZCiSSiSSSXiWSSX
s'.
i;
:
J
srtssssstss-
!|
i?::
i:
3
. FT;.
;;F6o
J
[V;
-ii
7
r
Hi
Vi
.-.V.
j.-;
SW2
Rotary Switch 1
Boot
CPU
Flush ROM Boot
CF/ATA-Flush Boot
Operation begins
simultaneously with
power supply ON.
Network Boot
Position
For development of OS
(reserved for network)
51
2 port Boot
(reserved for 2 port)
spare
spare
Dont use
Dont use
Dont use
Dont use
(reserved for Flush ROM)
Dont use
Note
It starts while reset, and

operation of the reset
release begins.
Operation begins
simultaneously with
power supply ON.
For maintenance tool
For maintenance tool
Reserved for equipment
52
Rotary Switch 2
Position
FROM 2PORT
Serial
Bus
Console
Console
Operation
Note
, ,
, in product
c . value
Set
p
Normal
PLc STOP Operate
Start up script /from/0/1dsys
Start up script /cf/ldsys/
Start up script Nullification
Normal
7
Bus
Console
Serial
Serial
Console
Bus
Console
Console
9
A
B
07
SRAM clear
Normal
E2PR0M FROM
Not start 2nd CPU
'
For handy terminal
6
8
'
P. M
os
iA
,}
7 segment status
M640 only 1 status LED
MX has 2 status LED
LED 2 is CPU number: 0 = CPU #1,1= CPU #2.
LED 1 is CPU status: Starts at 8.-> 0 ->count up-> 9 for CPU #1 then O.X count up->9. for CPU #2. So during normal
operation you should either see 09. for 1 CPU or 19. for 2 CPU.
For 2 CPU system:
For 1 CPU system:

0
Start
8.
->
Start
End
System start up counting
8.
9.
M640
9.
End
Good
MX
Bad
LED 2
NONE
0 or 1
2 CPU system
9.
-v
LED 1
0-9
8.-9.
1 CPU system
9.
-V
Anything
except 9.
53
54
55
56
TENTATIVE!
CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration
This system are usually confabulated of following components:
: This unit has the computation processing function for numerical control.
(1) Control unit
: Characters and figures are displayed on this unit.
(2) Display unit
: This unit has the setting function.
(3) Keyboard unit
: Input and output of machine signals are done through this unit.
(4) I/O interface unit
(5) Servo/Spindle drive unit : This is a servo/spindle amplifier composed of a conductor for obtaining DC
from AC and an inverter for obtaining AC from DC.
: This drive motor moves the machine.
(6) Servo/Spindle motor
(7) Other peripheral device : Peripheral device such as external memory and programming support.
Installed by machine loot manufacturer
f Ethernet!
PC
Card/K I
USB Devises
Printer
[CardBus]
NC control unrl
FlopDy Disk Drive
[FDD IF]
PC Keyboard
QJ
fuse]
Display Unit
! M _j,
|_Prep/amina Tool
cy"
PS'? Mouse
[Optical communication]
PRS232C]
Servo Amp-Spindlo drive urol
ezno Bocal!
Man nil Pulse Generator
s sas s m
[delicate IF]
Keyboard unit
O LJUL-LJ ooo
oooo
[0101
rio IF]
70s
1'jt-noiatS'
E1E
ZJ?
I/O mtciface box usoinr, by Card-
sized 3/0
C 1*"0 interface boxes arc installed
by machine tool moruifacturc :
300
Servo motor
Machine operation panel
10 interface
/ Spindle
motor
Servo drive unit
* E
iu
7S
Servo motor
<Note>
The noise resistance of most of PCperipheral devices are lower than the CNC system.
If such a low noise resistance devices are used in the CNC system, the noise resistance of the entire NC
system decreases, and noise trouble is caused occasionally. Please follows notes in Chaper 7 when you
use PC peripheral devises.
57
TENTATIVE
4.4.8 Connection of Power Supply
The PD27 power supply is used to protect the hard disk.
By outputting +24V tor 300msec after the 200VAC is turned off, turning off of the power during writing to the
hard disk can be prevented.
(1) Power Supply System Drawing
R S1
-LANCNC
Unit
ONAD-F
Ocuil breaker
NU
fan
Off
oul
EXTXBUS D
CflO D
: AT;
CRT
MOO
Cf?5
CMC Board
FDD
nn
ON
lC0
fCU? -MAS 13
PC Board
erso D
EMG
CF55
OPT?
cm
ONJOFF
IB DC IN
US8!
CGI?
-Q CFO!
DCOUT
OPT! D
CardBus
jI .?ch
Cf?*
PO?7
ACIN
p
P
USB?
f 110
Crrcuil
breaker
rno
CG12
Let DCOUT
T-iDClN
Keyboard Uni!
FCU7-YZ08?
tnm
L-C3CF01
[DC
KPG
SK3NC
SIOPC
( VIM
|J3
(2) Unit specification

Item
Input
i7
iNV
RI03
Specification
200VAC - 480VAC (-15%. +10%)

24VDC 8A
1 70mmx 65 mm x 230mm
300ms
Back up time
(Note) The power cannot be turned ON immediately after the PD25 power has been turned OFF.
Wait approx, two seconds before turnning the power ON.
Output
Size
__
(3) Connector layout and pin assignment
...
ACIN : 200VAC input

1
2
3
ACIN
ON ore
sw
/
0
ON.-OFF
powf-n
OCOUT
_n
58
<Cable side connector type>

: 2-1 781 28-3
Connetor
: 1-1 752 1 8-5
Contact
Recommended maker : AMP
ACIN N
ACIN H
FG~
ON/OFF SW : Swich ON (
Swich OFF
24VDC output
upword)
( i downword) 24VDC output OFF
ON/OFF : Connect to the escutcheon ONOFF switch

1
2
3
4
NC
P-OFF
< Cable side connector type>

: 1-1 78288-5
Connetor
1-175218-5
Contact
0V
0V
POWER : Green lamp lights during-*-24V output
DCOUT :
n_
A(X)
ACFAiL
2
3
OV
FG
B.(V) j < Cable side connector type>

j Connetor
: 3-1 78128-6
OV
: 1 -1 7521 85
Contact
FG
+24V
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 7 NOTIFICATION OF USING PC PERIPHERAL DEVICE
This chapter describes the notification of using PC peripheral devices.
7.1 Noise measures of USB and Ethernet
jr-B.
USB and Ethernet have been equipped normally.

Connection of the USB equipment
Please refer to
Connection of Ethernet" for connection
execution example.
Because use under the noise environment is not assumed as for a personal computer on the market such as
Mouse and Keyboard, operation is not guaranteed under the machine operation environment.
Please use the cable with the shield
for the noise inclination.
Additionally, the noise measures by the ferrite core like the figure below are recommended.
Ethernet cable
USB cable
USB cable
NC unit
I
i
!
i
ifcT IU
il
am
["]
Mouse
3p
Jj
Panel
Keyboard
Printer
S3Q
iih)
Ethernet cable
Wraps cable around the

ferrite core.
7.2 Recommended Devices List

Introduce the recommended devices that are met the Mitsubishi quality standard and the connectable
devices that are confirmed operation (although not met the Mitsubishi quality standard).
7.2.1 Front Access IC Cards

Supplier
Type
SCANDISK
SDP3B-48-1 01
SDP3B-96-1 01
10- DATA
SDP3B-128-101
SDP3B-192-101
SDP3B-256-1 01
SDP3B-440-101
PCFCA-16M
PCFCA-32M
PCFCA-48M
PCFCA-96M
PCFCA-1 28M
PCFCA-192M
PCFCA-256M
Specification
48MB
96MB
128MB
192MB
256MB
440MB
16MR
32MB
48MB
96MB
128MB
192MB
256MB
Class
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Remarks
SDP3B-"*-ono ***: Memory
size (MB) nnn: Manufacturers
control number "101" is
standard
PCFCA-M
Memory size
(MB)
59
TENTATIVE
7.2.2 CardBus PC Cards
Device
Supplier
FLASH
SANDISK
Type Name
SDP3B series
Specification
Bus Type
PCMCIA
Class
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
CardBus
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
Recommended
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Recommended
Card
LAN
Card
IO-DATA
3Com
corega
BUFFALO
PCFCA series
Etherlll
Etherll PCC-T
Fether PCC-TXF
Fether CB-TXL
LPC2-T
LPC4-TX
10 BASE-T Ether
10 BASE-T Ether
10/100 BASE-T Ether
10/100 BASE-T Ether
10 BASE-T Ether
10/100 BASE-T Ether
Notices in use of CardBus type PC card

(1) Install a driver software under the condition that only the target CardBus type PC card is inserted. Some
trouble may occurs if a driver software is installed under the condition that other PC card is inserted
together.
(2) For using a CardBus type PC card, turn on the power under the condition that the target PC card is
inserted. When the PC card is inserted under the condition that the power is turned on, the PC card is
not sometimes recognized by the combination with other PC cards.
60
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 8 DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE
8.1 Maintenance Tools
8.1.1 Measuring Instruments
The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly to the
NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry out simple troubleshooting._
Tool
Application
Condition
Tester
To check that the wiring to the NC unit is correct before
turning the power ON. _
AC voltmeter
Measure the AC Power
To measures the AC power voltage being supplied to
voltage.
the external 24VDC power supply unit.
The tolerable error is +2%
or less.
DC voltmeter
Max. scale 30V The
To measures the DC power voltage.
External power supply 24V (control section, machine
tolerable error is 2% or
less.
input/output interface)
Battery voltage
DC output
Phase rotation
To check the connection order of the AC 3-phase input
meter
power supply.
Synchroscope
General measurement and simple troubleshooting.
_
_
(Note t)Currently, a high precision digital multi-meter is commonly used as a tester. This digital multi-meter
can be used as both an AC voltmeter and an DC voltmeter.
(Note 2)A logic analyser (200MHz or more) is required for complicated troubleshooting.
8.1.2 Tools
Screwdriver (Large, Medium, Small)
Radio pliers
8.2 Maintenance Items

Maintenance is categorized into daily maintenance items (items to be carried at set intervals) and periodic
maintenance (replacement of parts when life is reached). Some parts (HDD, FDD, etc.) will not function in a
hardware manner when the life is reached, so these should be replaced before the life is reached.
Name
Life
fnspection/Replacemeni
Escutcheon
Once/lwo months
(Accordingly when dirty)
Cleaning of floppy disk drive

(type built in operation box)
Once/two months
Replacement of floppy disk sheet

(type built in operation box)
3x106 passes/track
Replacement of floppy disk drive
12,000 access hours or 5 years of FDD motor rotation,

whichever is sooner
(lype built in operation box)
Refer to left
Replacement of hard disk drive

Replacement of LCD backlight
5 years or 20,000 hours power ON
5 years or 20,000 power ON hours (specified with power ON

lime where brightness drops lo less than 50% at 25 cC)
Replace when display dims
Replacement of batter
Cumulative data hold time 5 years
When battery drop caution

alarm occurs
Cooling Ian (control section)
50.000 hours (specified with rotation time when rotation speed

drops to less than 20% of initial speed)
Refer to left
Keyboard
IQ6 punches
Refer to left
Refer lo left
61
TENTATIVE
8.3 Maintenance of Escutcheon and keyboard
8.3.1 Cleaning of Escutcheon and keyboard
Wipe the escutcheon (display unit and plastic frame of keyboard unit) and keyboard surface with a soft dry
clean cloth. If the escutcheon is heavily dirtied, soak the cloth in a neutral detergent, and wipe the display.
Do not use an alcohol or a paint thinner, etc.
The escutcheon and the keyboard are not for waterproofing. Be careful that a liquid doesn't go into inside
of it.
8-3.2 Replacement of NC Data Key

The NC data key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into the
keyboard unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove all the cables connected at the back of the NC data key.
(3) Remove the tablet pointer flexible cable and keyboard cable from the PCB (HN20x card).
(4) Remove six screws, and remove the sheet metal adapter and the H R201 card from the keyboard unit.
(5) Remove fourteen screws, and remove the NC data key from the escutcheon
(6) Install a new NC keyboard with the process which is contrary to .
Remove Keyboard cable
Remove Glide Pointer cable
HN20X card
\
I:
IzsC'A
"rH*
\ <r
:i
&
*\
ssss??**** A,
O
Remove 8 screws
(:
NC data key
<o
$
r.
!"
-o
Remove 18 screws
62
TENTATIVE
8.3.3 Replacement of Menu Key
The menu key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into the
display unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
tf'X
(1 ) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the menu key cable from the keyboard unit. Because the menu key cable is soldered on the
menu key PCB, remove it at the keyboard unit side.
(3) Remove 8 screws, and remove the escutcheon
(4) Remove 8 screws, and remove the menu key
(5) Install a new menu key with the process which is contrary to (D (3).
<o
Remove 8 screws
I r7
fit
Remove ON/OFF switch connector
'O
m
LIH
and, remove escutcheon
vrf
Si/
ri.s
'O
Remove Keyboard card
i ft.
iPv
it
Menu key
;
ill
r
T.V n-'
/J
4
\
iB
5s.
Remove 8 screws
and, remove menu key
63
TENTATIVE
8.4 Maintenance of Floppy Disk Drive
8.4.1 Cleaning of Floppy Disk Drive (Head Cleaning )
When the floppy disk drive is used for a long time, magnetic particles or dust from the disk may adhere onto
the head surface. This can cause the reading and writing processes to be inhibited. Clean the head
periodically ( once every two months ) with the following procedure.
(1) Recommended cleaning disk
: Japan Morex
Maker
Type
: Morex cleaning floppy for double-sided 3.5-inch

: Dry
Method
(2) Cleaning method

Insert the cleaning disk into the floppy disk drive to be clearned.
(2) Start the cleaning program, and follow the instructions given on the screen.
(3) When the program is completed, eject the cleaning disk.
Handling of Floppy Disks

Observe the following items to ensure that the floppy disk can be used for a long time.
8.4.2
(1) Precautions for use

Never tough the magnetic surface with hands. Finger prints on the magnetic surface
will inhibit the reading process.
(2) Do
not touch the floppy disk with hands dirtied with oil or iron chips.
(D Do not place the floppy disk near cigarette smoke. Do not apply solvents on the
magnetic surface.
@ Always attach the index label to the correct position so that it will not come off. Do
not layer the index labels.
label before attaching it to the floppy disk. When writing on a label

already attached to the floppy disk, use a felttip pen ,etc.
(5) Fill in the index
(6) Carefully insert the floppy disk into the drive with it facing the
correct direction.
Rough handling during insertion and ejection could damage the floppy disk.
When bringing the floppy disk inside from outdoors where the temperature and
humidity difference are great from indoors, wait at least 30 minutes before starting
use.
(2) Precautions for storage
Store floppy disks that are not in use and the backup floppy disks in
(2)
Do not place the floppy disk where it will be subject to direct sunlight or near heating
appliances.
Do not place the floppy disk near magnets or items that generate strong magnetic
fields. Magnetic rings and necklaces could also damage the data on the floppy disk,
so avoid wearing these items when handling floppy disks.
@ Do not place heavy items on the floppy disk.
64
plastic cases.
TENTATIVE
8.4.3 Other Precautions for Use
(1) Floppy disk drive life
The durability of the floppy disk drive is guaranteed for five years of the FDD motor rotation or 12,000 access
hours, whichever is sooner.
However, if used in a heavily contaminated environment, the reading and writing processes could be
inhibited due to the adherence of dust or foreign matter.
Periodically clean the head to prevent this type of trouble.
<T5
(2) Recommendation for making backups

Make copies of the floppy disks containing important data to be used in case of an accident such as
damaging of the floppy disk or destruction of the data.
(3) Operating conditions
The floppy disk drive and floppy disks are extremely sensitive to changes in the temperature and humidity
and to dust, so always observe the precautions that have been described.
In respect to the temperature, if the working conditions are not satisfied (such as if the system is started at
below freezing), the data track and head positions may deviate and prevent the data from being read
properly.
In this case, wait for the internal temperature to rise.
(4) Writing to floppy disks
The temperature must be 10 to 40 C when writing to the floppy disk.
Always observe the temperature conditions when writing data.
8.4.4 Replacement of Floppy Disk Drive

Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F1 30 cable from the floppy disk unit.
Unit" for connection and removal of the F130 cable.
Connection of Floppy Disk
(D The floppy disk drive is covered with three sheet metals. And three sheet metals are fixed with eight
screws. Remove those sheet metals referring to the figure 8.5.
@ Install a new floppy disk drive with the process which is contrary to
(3).
NB
T
.*
f'*
A
65
TENTATIVE
8.5 Maintenance of Hard Disk
8.5.1 Handling of Hard Disk
(1) Precaution for Use
- Correct connection the cable
- Do not touch the connector section with hands or metal.
- Do not apply excessive force on the connector section.
- Do not drop or apply strong impacts on the drive.
- Do not disassemble the drive.
(2) Precaution for Storage
- Avoid strong the drive in high temperature, high humidity places.
- Do not place the drive near magnets or items the generate strong magnetic fields.
8.5.2 Other Precaution for Use

(1) Recommendation for making backup
The hard disk is a durable device, so make a backup of the hard disk to save important data.
8.5.3 Replacement of Hard Disk

Do not handle the hard disk without metal case because the hard disk has not much endurance against the
vibration and shock in comparison with other electric devises. Replace the hard disk as the Hard Disk Unit
(with the metal case and the stabilizing rubber).
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F140 cable which is connected between the hard disk unit and the control unit.
the HEATER cable and the THM cable from the keyboard unit.
Remove
(3) Remove two screws, and remove the hard disk unit from the keyboard unit.
(4) Install a new hard disk unit with the process which is contrary to ~@.
fgfeTTo
f|iIE!:'
ara?-
T)
HI
O'
| /j\ CAUTION /j\
Hard Disk Drive is built in this product Do not drop and do not give a strong impact to the product
because the hard disk drive is a precise device
/\ The hard disk drive has a useful life Please exchange the hard disk drive before end ot the life
/t\
66
Please make a backup of the customers files which is saved in the hard disk driveAt the
breakdown of the hard disk drive although Mitsubishi provides exchange service of the hard disk
drive, Mitsubishi does not guarantee a customets files which is saved in the hard disk drive And
Mitsubishi does not assume the responsibility concerning the damage caused by having damaged
the hard disk drive
T<
TENTATIVE
8.6 Maintenance of LCD
8.6.1 Life of LCD Backlight
CCFL (Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp) is used for the light source (backlight) of the LCD panel.
The estimated life of the backlight is 40,000 hours/25C. (Time for the brightness to drop to 50% of the initial
value).
Life time depends on temperature. When the LCD panel is used under low temperature or high temperature
continuously, the life time has a tendency to become short.
8.6.2 LCD Characteristics

(1) Luminance
Luminance decreases at a low temperature by the CCFL characteristic. And, the time until luminance
meets rated value after power-on is about 10-15 minutes.
(2) Uniformity, Luminous Dot, Dark Dot
It is not defect or malfunction though uniformity, a small luminous dot and a small dark dot may appear on
the LCD panel.
8.6.3 Replacing LCD backlights

Before replacing LCD backlight, remove the LCD panel from the escutcheon. In addition, make sure that
the machines power is OFF to replace LCD backlights.
LCD backlight type for replacement: L502174G01
Remove the cable from the backlight connector connected to the LCD backlight power supply card.
Remove the cable for menu keyboard from the keyboard unit.
(D
(D
()
(D
Remove the cable for ON/OFF switch from the keyboard unit.
Unscrew the M4 screws (8 screws) to remove the escutcheon.
Press the nail during pulling the LCD backlight out. (Figure 8.8)
Attach the LCD backlight for replacement in the reverse order of 1 ) -4).
ill
fpBft
n r\,
:jprr=mi
mi H
8I
!l
ho
'tT
s
(2)
0"
67
TENTATIVE
8.7 Maintenance of Battery
All data, such as Ihe parameter and machining program that need to be backup when the power is turned
OFF, are saved by a battery installed in the control unit. It is easy to get a battery because a familiar mmType lithium battery is being used.
Replace the battery as a standard within one week if the Battery Voltage Drop Caution Alarm is appeared.
If the battery isnt replaced, the Battery Voltage Drop Warning Alarm is appeared. Then, internal backup data
could be damaged.
Battery type name: CR17335SE-R-CH2
8.7.1 Handling of Battery

Double oxidation manganese - Lithium battery contains inflammable material such as lithium, organic
solvent.
Erroneous handling of lithium battery may result in such an accident of heat generation, explosion or fire,
possibly leading to personnel injuries or machine malfunction.
CD Do not recharge, disassemble, apply pressure, heat, directly solder or dispose in fire the battery.
Insert the battery (+)(-) correctly.
Do not create short circuit between (+) and (-}. And do not carry or store the battery with the metal
goods such as a necklace.
(3) When the battery is stored or disposed, do not stack or jumble up the batteries with other metal goods.
Then, put a insulating tape to the terminals of the batteries to prevent a short circuit.
Do not use the batteries by mixing different types or old batteries together with new ones.
8.7.2 Replacement of Battery
Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
Remove the battery cable from the control unit.
Replace the battery from the holder.
@ Install the battery with the process which is contrary to ~@.
!
H'
Remove the battery cable
IT'D
7
A
i
i
\
Ur'
c
| ACAUTION]
68
Remove Ihe ballery
'IT'
"
:-D
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs , tool data and
parameters in the input /output device, and then replace the battery .
/K
Do not short circuit, charge overheat , incinerate or disassemble the battery .
/t\
Dispose of spent batteries according to local laws .
TENTATIVE
8.8 Maintenance of Cooling Fan
Two cooling fans are mounted in the control unit. One cools down the NCCPU, and the other cools down the
PC CPU.
These two fans are same part.
Type Name of Cooling Fan : MMF-06E24DS-RP3
8.8.1 Life of Cooling Fan

r
The life of the cooling fan depends on the grease life of the bearing. The rotation time when 20% of the
rotation speeds decrease more than an initial rotation speed is defined as the life, and the life is 50,000
hours.
8.8.2 Replacement of Cooling Fan

Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Remove the fan cable from the "FAN1" connector located around the left top of the NC unit.
(D Remove the cover with opening the lock latch.
@ Remove the cooling fan
Install a new cooling fan with the process which is contrary to ~ d).
Remove the fan cable
Remove the cover
lit
frs.
)/
VA
r
>*.
...
sk.-'i
i
-sf
M
i
@Remove the cooling fan
IV
:
i.::
5
i'
j...
r*
i
69
70
71
72
Basic Operations for Maintenance

The minimum operations required for system maintenance are described in this chapter.
1-1
Unlocking the Password Key Lock

The functions and screens that cannot be operated by the user
and normally cannot be used.
1-1-1
are locked
with
a password key,
Releasing the Key-lock

The key-lock can be released with the following procedures. Once the key-lock is released, the
key is remained unlocked until the power is turned OFF but is automatically re-locked when the
power is turned ON again.
(1) Select the [DIAGNOS]
[VERSION] screen.
TPS 0
?w
50*
Orp*
POSITION
SET UP
PROGRAM
TOOL
INFO.
'\/\j 50Y
' SJ.JJI
VERSION
'\A; 50*
DlivCHOS
ALARM
UQ>
VERSION
C-COND.
PARAM
DIAGHOS
DATA
Orpn
2005/10/20
Id: 31: 47
Vv\A 0 . OOiii/nin
MS0*
V'vV> 0 . OOin/miii
DATA
TOOL
DISPLAY
I/O
LAYOUT
MAP
ITPS 0
2005/10/20
Id: 33: 23
ALARM
PLC
MAIHIEN
RUNNING
GRAPHIC
DATA
ACCTJMD.
HISTORY
SIGNAL
CHECK
CONTROL
MAI NT B.
ERASE
TIME
EH!!
Orp
DIAGNOS
VV\A o
OPTION
MONITOR
(2) Press the menu selection
TPS 0
2005/10/20 14:34:33
ooiii/nii*
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
and input the keys in the following order:
3000[ INPUT
Following the operation above, the "Hidden" screen menu will appear when the
key is pressed
Screen selection key
Menu key
menu selection
Menu selection key
73
1-1-2
Normally (locked with password key) Prohibited Operations

1.
Setting of forced output

[Normal]: Menu on DIAGNOS screen.
?
so*
DIAGHOS
iLUJJ
VERSION
Orpj
DIAGHOS
200S/10/20 ;i4:34:38
0
[TPS
:
vW*. O . OOin/jairt
OPTION
MONITOR
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MON DIOR
MOH1TOR
MONITOR
[Hidden]: Select DIAGNOS MONITOR menu.
HH&i
3*3
so*
DIAGNOS
TTTO
VERSION
Otpa
DIAGHOS
V V\A 0 . 00 in/ in
OPT IOH
2.
!!
SPENDLE
SERVO
i
MONITOR
TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:38:20
MONITOR | HOW ITOK
HARDWARE
LADDER
I/O
WRITE
MONITOR
MONITOR
WRITE
CANCEL
Setting of servo parameters and spindle parameters
Parameter setting menu

Servo Parameter window
Spindle Parameter window
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.

"'-A.-
50*
DIAGHOS
im
Orpa
VERSION
DIAGNOS
Ell!aa
VVY- 0 . OOiu/min
OPTION
MONITOR
SERVO
MONITOR
TPS 0
! SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDEP.
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
2005/10/20 14:34:30 i
[Hidden]: Select SERVO MONITOR or SPINDLE MONITOR menu.
ESIloa.
393
Vv
SO*
iLjJJi
Oz'pn
VERSION
DIAGHOS
VV\A O . OOin /min
JTPS
r,
! DIAGHOS
MONITOR
i.
2005/10/20 14:38:51
OPTION
SERVO
MONITOR
SPINDLE
! MONITOR
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
P ARAM.
When the PARAM. setting menu is pressed, the respective parameter window will appear.
74
3.
Setting of system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), pitch error compensation (PITCH

ERROR) and display of key history (KEY HISTORY), memory scope (MEMORY SCOPE)
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.
'w
DIAGHOS
XEH?
Orpn
VERSION
DIAGHOS
wm&\
VWV 0.00 in/miii

OPTION
MONITOR
TPS 0
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
2005/10/20 -14:34:38
[Hidden]: "VERSION menu appears on the right end.

a*j3
TPS 0
*\f\j SOY
DIAGHOS
:5TQ
orp
VERSION
DIAGHOS
OPTION
MONITOR
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
I TPS
3!>3
"VX*
DIAGHOS
4.
Orpn
VERSIOH
2005/10/20 14:39:38
TPS 0
2005/10/20 14:48:22
SO1.
2005/10/20 14:39:17
]VW 0 . 00in/.in
VWo.OOin/min
SYSTEM
PITCH
HEY
MEMORY
PARAM
ERROR
HISTORY
SCOPE
Setting of cutting parameter (CUTTING PARAM)
[Normal]: Menu on CUTTING CONDITION screen

rV\-
50 i
WORK -MAT
mji
0 lpn
C-SP
FR
VW 0. 00 in /rain
WORKMAT
PERCENT
TOOL-MAT
.
.
cur
C-COND.
TURNING
C-OND
LEARN
=Ll
[Hidden]: "CUTTING PARAM" menu appears on the right end
mm*-
3*>3
'\A/
50 Y
JZD
Orpn
VV'A 0
TPS 0
2005/10/20 14:40:13
OOiu/mlti
*3!
WORK HAT
i
FR
C-SD
I DO L- MAT
WORKMAT .
C COND.
TURNING
PERCENT
CUT CC'ND|CUTTIIJC
LEARN
PARAM
I:
J
303
r\;\.' 50*.
HD>
Is
CUTTING
CUTT TNG
CUTTING
PARAM l
PARAM
PARAM 3
Or p
V-.V 0
TPS 0
200S/1O/20 14.41:07
OOin/min
i
1
cmiD
*
!
75
1-1-3
Exiting the MAZATROL Screen

The MAZATROL screen can be exited with the following operation.
mu
'XAJ
TES 0 : 2
50 V
POSITION
Orpa
SET UP
PROGRAM
1HFO.
TOOL
C-COND*
DcM Ax.~*re(
DI
PARAM
WXm
1
T>%
PARAH
TOOL
DISPLAY
LAYOUT
MAP
-i-liir.'i r<:9iy
DATA
JD .
505/10/20 14:42:2a
;VVV- O . t)0in/tti.tt
IPS 0 : 2
Debug Functions
Arrange windows neatly
>
When the password key is unlocked, bring the cursor to

this space and click on the right mouse button button to
display the window above.
The MAZATROL screen is exited when "Exit" is selected.
1-1 -4
Returning the Password Key Lock Releasing State

When the NC is powered on, it is always in the state of "key-loced.
Select "Debug Functions"
11 31 Mode" from the window avobe to return to the normal state
from the password key lock releasing state if you don't want to turn NC power supply on again.
uI-
DebugWindow
TPS 0
2005/JE
I UcndchkFree
Debug Menu Button
GL Functions
PLC Menu
Arrange windows neatly
JT
Exit
76
m\
!r
>
uisyiiKi
MAP
1-2
Completely Erasing the Memory

The entire syslem memory (SRAM) area is cleared when the card, provided with memory, is
replaced or added.
1-2-1
Card with Memory Mounted

HN482 (NC memory module board)
1-2-2
y 0 7
Clearing the Memory
The procedure for erasing the SRAM is described below.

(1 ) Set "C" to NC rotary switch 2 [RotSw2].
Rotary switch 1 [RotSwl] is "0.
RotSw 1
<5

(Refer to the right images.)
1,
F 0 1
E
h
(2) Turn the NC power ON.
r.
n
The 7-segment LED will change as shown below.

The procedure is completed when "Y" appears.
XX'?
RotSw2
Changes at a high speed between these sections.
ID!
O
SRAM clear
Power ON
(3) The PC side of NC is started while clearing the memory. So when the alarm
messages are displayed while starting NC screen, click the "OK" to all messages.
(Note: The operation in MATRIX. The PC side is not started in M640.)
i
(4) After all alarm messages are cleared, shutdown the PC from the Windows start
menu.
77
(5) After the shutdown is completed, NC power is turn to OFF

(6) Return the NC rotary switch 2 to "0" (Refer to the right image
v
cP
CP
8 1
s?
<j>
"SRAM clear" by RotSw2 "C" executes the following operation:
1. Memory test and zero clear to all SRAM area
2. Zero clear to PLC bit RAM and word RAM
78
9)
6 8
Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM Data
1-4
Of the various data used with the MAZATROL MATRIX, some data is backed up by a battery and
saved in SRAM even if the power has been turned OFF.
Flowever, this saved data will be erased when the memory is cleared. Also, the SRAM data might
be destroyed when the card is replaced, etc.
/j\ Always backup the SRAM data before carrying out work that could cause the SRAM data to be
destroyed.
The some data (parameter etc.) in SRAM are registered in FLROM, and can be read when
required. The default parameters are always registered in the FLROM when shipped from the
Yamazaki factory.
1-4-1
Operation Method of SRAM Backing Up
FLROM
SRAM
Common, local
Common, local
variables
variables
Too! related tables
SRAM
.Some data
Parameters
Parameters
Jaw shape data
Cutting conditions.
new cutting conditions
Cutting conditions.
new cutting conditions
Maintenance
tool
Periodic inspection
|~ Extended coordinate
lllfe'
Periodic inspection
-r:'
Gantry control data
Gantry control data

\
h.
SRAM
All data
'-t
HD
C : \m a inte\s ra m bkf . dat
79
1-4-2
Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM

SRAM data is backed up and restored using the maintenance tool.
An outline is shown below.
Start the maintenance tools, and select the BACKUP screen.
ipZ',
BACKUP FLASK ROM
SSAX
!
EJCT-I'ATA UO
C: '-x-ai n
UPDATEJ MAIHTraAMCsl
BACKUP
OPTfOK
. tfat
EKIT
With the backup function, the SRAM data in the NC can be saved in another medium
Execute the following operations using the button (T) to @.
SRAIVH>FLROM
A part of SRAM data in the NC unit (Note) is backed up in FLROM in the NC unit.
SRAM<-FLROM
A part of SRAM data backed up in FLROM (Note) is read to SRAM.
SRAMHDD
The whole SRAM data in the NC unit (2MB), as well as the PLC's BIT-RAM and
WORD-RAM area are backed up in HDD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as follows.
Content
Whole SRAM
PLCs
BIT-RAM/WORD-RAM
@
File name
C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
C:\rn ainte\plcbkff 1 . dat_
C:\mainte\plcbkfOf ,dat
Size
2MB
1MB
44KB
Remarks
F o r MATRIX Standard
For MATRIX NEXUS
SRAM<-HDD
The above files, which have been backed up in HDD, are read to the original area in the NC
unit.
(Note) A part the SRAM data items read/written between SRAMoFLROM are listed below
User parameters
Machine parameters
- R registers (R21 00 to R2527)
Cutting conditions
Cutting conditions learn
- Maintenance check
GL (gantry) parameters
80
1-5
Backing Up the Saved Data

Of all the data stored in SRAM and HD, the data indicating the customer's machine conditions can
be backed up by data input/output on NC screen.
It is recommended to backup these data before various maintenance operations are worked.
Save these data as the customer's current machine condition data if any troubles or fault occurs.
1-5-1
Types of the Saved Data

Item
Device saved data

SRAM
HD
Machining
programs
Tool data
Tool offsets
Tool files
Jaw shape
User parameters
O
O
O
O
Machine
parameters
Cutting conditions
Workpiece offsets
Extended
coordinate
Macro variables
Periodic inspection
o
O
O
O
O
R registers of R2100 to R2527 and R10500 to R11999 are included in the machine
parameters.
Note:
Note: The tool data has the main data in HD and the index table in SRAM.
1-5-2
Media for Backing Up the Saved Data

(1)
HD
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up to an arbitrary HDs folder of
NC.
(2) IC memory card (Using the NC front slot)
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the IC memory card
from NC front slot.
(3)
USB memory
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the USB memory from
NC front USB slot or USB slot on pendant box side (extended from USB slot on the back
of NC).
81
1-5-3
Backing Up the Saved Data

For example, the method of backing up the saved data by the USB memory is as follows.
(1) Press the screen selection key until the menu in the figure below appears, and select
"DATA I/O" from the menu

posmou
TOOL
PROGRAM
LAYOUT
TOOL
P ARAM
C-COHD.
OIACHOS
DATA
DATA
30
DISPLAY
x/o
3Xiur
WAT
(2) Input/output the data on the screen below.
MCCRW
V=J
|V:
I =F
;
il
T.:.:
tmUm
ITIIZZIZZZp:
!
i;
%
on
lAtl
JCUO
"
\*i.
.L
rrr r
two
TOT**
CCD
CAM DMA
n*
*w
menu key "USB.

USB I/O menu is displayed.
(4) The DEVICE SELECT screen is displayed when "DEVICE SELECT" of the USB I/O
menu is pressed. The D drive is selected (highlighted) with the [ T ] key, and click [OK]
(3) Select the
(or press the [INPUT]).

MC<-OSD
NC->USD
USD
LOAD
SAVE
CONTENT
i'i
DATA
SELECT
I/O
PAKAH.
DIR.
DIR.
DELETE
SELECT
nr
IA: \)
I O : \1
(Effl
M AZAT KOI.
(Note) When two or more USB memories
assigned.
82
are
inserted, the E drive or
more might be
(5) When the menu "DIR. SELECT" is pressed, the selected drive's folder is displayed in
SELECT DIRECTORY window. Select the folder to output data.
When a folder is newly created, input a folder name with the keys directly.
mr
tn RECTORY:
OTB TT
n*>CMM
&
4 r
i.
I'r
PRtOOBAH
un
IT
b~
[
OTUC*
[irV
DATA
c*
ZZTJ
RV
vn
UAD
AV
p. Q6 i n/min
MC >oins
llBB
LtniT*
tiltt
CSMCTtW*
rcixcs
OJ.T*
I/O
YiUtW.
DtiATfc
The selected folder name is displayed in DIRECTORY on the right side when "OK"
/
is clicked or <INPUT> is pressed.
usn <-r
RC
PROGRAM
nrr.rcroPT: ntcxti*
PROGRAM
~:r
.1.
j-
OTnER DATA
:p:
OTHER DATA
ESeSS'Ti
UUl
A/v? so>
Hf '.-USA
1.0AD
K|
Orpa
VAS O
TPE 0
20CS/10/1V 19:43:22
00 in /min
MC- >USB
usn
narvr.
SAVE
COWTEHT
SELECT
nma
x/o
'
VARAN.
nip
DELETE
DTA .
SELECT
(6) Select "NC>USB SAVE", and select the data to output.
83
(7) Selecting the program file
Press the menu "SELECT ALL". When <INPUT> is pressed, all program files are
displayed in the program area on the upper left. If not all programs are displayed in the
program area at a time, the programs can be confirmed by moving the scrollbar up and
down.
*'
pytfarJ
;<>
*y, jirntc-roGr:
sfM
PBOCJIJ#*
-s
EEEt
--
T
WtA
TOOL,
[
[
riix
_;
ASM W
Ctroor
__
Twissso;""'?"'""'"
'y,
:;>
JP
.TMT
her.::::
...
CTPS|tal
>V'v*' #*S0 in/min
,>i> JOWlo/ll
I!' H I*
iKtonirtKcu MCOCOAM WIMBI.'X
Tttt
nv.um
roaiAt
ki,f-
ST WIT
rm
(8) Selecting other data
Move the selected area from "PROGRAM" to "OTHER DATA" by using TAB key.
(When TAB key is pressed once again, the area is moved from "OTHER DATA" to
"PROGRAM.)
Select and highlight all items by inputting "INPUT.
JUKtt-JtHCf;
*h:
'rPOGB-W
\
!
>>
!i
.
ttwfc rJL*
cun iit.
r
...
...
.......
CUJIP
rums
MAJX 3
:
!*'
t'HJ A
,n.T-;
i -SSiS?MIL"
O
UUifl
r;;.:
-;;Tssri1*3 ft
HAJ'SHV
PDr*on4
ViSi
EfliS
0,3m
TBAVGWIT -.IHVerS'..-
S
At J.
r>!3
CX*
> rc-Ti/tO/ll
tl:45.ni
'
r n
(9) When "START" menu is pressed, the copy is started.

The output situation is displayed sequentially in the selected directory column on the right
side. The copy is completed when the directory column is the same as [NC] on the left
side.
84
<r*
1-5-4
Restoring the Saved Data

For example, the method of restoring the saved data backed up by the USB memory is as
follows.
(1) to (5) Set the USB memory's folder
name in the same way as
previous section.
::
(6) Selecting the backup data
When "USB CONTENT" -* "START" is pressed from the menu, all contents of selected
folder is displayed on the right side column.
IH
I
msKTiisr
w>
253
A*A-
HM57
'***
II
MUD
Jt
rtT
(7) Loading the selected data
When "NC< USB LOAD" -> "START" is pressed from the menu, the selected data is
loaded to NC. The output situation is displayed sequentially in the [NC] column on the left
side. The loading is completed when the directory column is the same as [FID] on the right
side.
.....
Ppr
P*
oun-
PtRtlftXBJU HftT.-'VIIF >i
;i
C potto
ft.'B
n,t
pi
|.
ti-.M. VJiWy
imv:, .Mian
. *;>
mz<*
I
IJZJ
!:
85
1-5-5
Saving to the various media

The USB memory was selected as a medium for saving in the above example. Hard disk and IC
card (front) can be used as a medium for saving.
Select the device from "DATA I/O" menu in the previous section (2).
cnuo
lINUl)
usa
CAM DATA
DJ2K
$AVIC
>
Select USB
->
Select hard disk
>
Select IC card (front)
(D When a hard disk is selected
As for the drive and the folder, C:\MC_backup\Other is selected as default.

Select the target folder from under the above-mentioned folder by the menu "DIR SELECT".
(2) When a IC card is selected

The drive is fixed on front IC card.
Select the target folder from under the ROOT of IC card by the menu "DIR SELECT".
Other operations when the hard disk and IC card are selected apply correspondingly the USB
memory in the previous section.
86
1-6
1-6-1
File System Configuration

File System Format
Each size of the MAZATROL MATRIX file system is decided by the number of programs and
number of tool system parameters. Up to 960 programs can be set as a multiple of 16, and up
to 4000 tools can be set
Parameter
0100
Setting value
No. of programs
32 programs
256 programs
16
512 programs
32
960 programs
60
For 0100, set the No. of programs/16 value.

Note 1: The No. of tools is set according to the machine specifications.
Note 2: Refer to section "1-8 Initializing the Data" for the actual formatting operations.
87
1-7
Setting Data with Special Operations

The following data cannot be set easily by the user. Special operations are required.
1-7-1
Setting the Date and Time

Date and time of MAZATROL MATRIX is automatically set when the power is ON using the
Windows internal clock as the reference. Thus, the date and time are set with the Windows clock.
(1 ) Double-click on the date above the menu or time area.
r
I TPS 1 j JOOS/1O/10
)l 50,
POSITION
TOOL
PROGRAM
LAYOUT
[l7:4J:J6
[vW' 50s
TOOL
PARAH
C-COND
DATA
DIAGHOS
DATA
3D
DISPLAY
I/O
SETUP
MAP
(2) "Date and Time Properties of Windows is displayed, set the current date and time.
The set data is validated immediately.
[Yf
Dale a.jd qhnB Properties

Date & Time j Tine Zone ii Internet Tune j
Dt
mm
.... ..... .it .;
-------- f zoos
...
,,
.*
10
!1 12
13 H 15 16 17
13 19 20 2i 22 23 21
25 26 27 28 29
|
I
3:04:56PM
Current tine rone: Gf'lT Dayl*gi>t Time
88
CX
Cancel
1*
1-7-2
Setting the Accumulated Time

Five types of accumulated times are displayed. The total time
procedure.
can be changed with the following
(1) Release the password key lock.
Refer to the section "1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock".

(2) Select the OPTION PARAM screen, and turn 0106 bitO ON.
Note:
The total time cannot be rewritten unless 030 bit 6 is turned ON.
(The other data will be rewritten.)
"ACCUMU.
"DIAGNOSIS" ->
ACCUMULATED TIME window.
(3) Select
TIME"
(highlight),
and
50*
jS T []?
VERSIOK
V\AA O. 001n/aia
Orpa
ALARM
the
14:51:44
~*s 3
'VV
open
ALARM
PLC
MAINTEH
ROHNIKG
GRAPHIC
DATA
HISTORY
S 1GHAL
CHECK
COffTROL
MAIHTE.
ERASE
TIME
(4) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to "TOTAL TIME
ACCUMULATED TIME
jfe
-ifitfSl
pa
JTXI
cl
aiiiSl
j
200o.dd.od:
(5) Input the time data to be set, and then press the INPUT key to complete the setting.
Ex.
To set 2000 hours:

2
(6)
INPUT
When you input data in above procedures, the 0106 bitO is automatically turned OFF.
Please select the SYSTEM PARAM screen, and confirm that 0106 bitO is OFF.
89
1-8
1-8-1
Initializing the Data

Initializing the Data
....
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [DIAGNOS]
- [DATA ERASE] from this menu.
!Trs 0 too5/10/10
'W
POSiriOH
4,
PROGRAM;
TOOL f
LAYOUT
;;; ~ ;
Vl;
. C-COHD.
TOOI.
PRRflM
- I piRGHOS|. DATA
DATA
'
4%
YERSIO.H
[VVA
50*
ALARM
ALARM
HISTORY
Fvv
T |=
in
DISPLAY
SETUP
MAP
ires o :2ocs/io/i8 jveiSTS
so*
. PLC
PLC
MA32TTEH
SIGHAL
CHECK
RUHHXMG
GRAPHIC
CONTROL :
MALHTE ,
ACCUMU.
;
| ERASE
(3) Using the arrow keys and INPUT key, validate the initialization of all data on the
displayed window (highlight in blue).
ZOOt DATA
ADD WPC
TOOL P1S-E
TkxsL Qivv::f,T
(TTTT1HC
OOMtL
WORK oppytr
ALAJtH HISTORY
HACRO VAR.
MADHtHWCE
COHPtfrriOPt <-999 lNPnY>
j-.v-.WM
START TWIT
(4) Follow the message under the data selection field, input "-9999" and press the INPUT
key. The initialization is completed when the DATA ERASE window display
disappears.
90
1-8-2
Initializing the Programs

The initialization procedure of the area where the machining program is stored is shown below.
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [PROGRAM]
- [PROGRAM FILE] from this menu.
ifv'j?
PI 50.
POSITION
TOOL
TOOL
PitOG RAM
LAYOUT
fvv
C-COND.:
DIAGHOS
PARAM
DATA
DISPLAY
I/O
SETUP
MAI?
(1,1)
INSERT
so%
PROGRAM
TOOL
DISPLAY
CHANGE
DIR.
PROGRAM
EDIT
PATH
2PROGRAM
PROGRAM
CHANGE
FILE
KA,
DATA
>S 0
IP
SEARCH
WORK NO.
5o%
.j .| !
IrPS 0 i 2005/10/18
jl? :48:24
PROGRAM
REHUIIBER]
PROCEAM
NAME
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PART
DIP..
PROGRAM
BRA9E
INPUT
COPY
EDIT
SHAPE
CHANGE
TRANSFER
-L
PROGRAM
i
(3) Select (highlight) [ALL ERASE] from this menu. Using the operation board keys, input
-9999" and then press the INPUT key. Initialization of the programs is completed
when the highlighted display of "ALL ERASE" returns to the normal display.
TPS 0
pvU
ywv
4*
DELETE
SELECT i.
1 PROG.
DELETE
V:'r;T;;; ;
ERASE
7005/10/ia |l7;42:47
i:
A3.L ERASE <-9999 INPD7> 7
so%
y
-9999
PROGRAM
r~
i
(4) When "DIR CHANGE" is pressed, the following dialog is displayed. The program
stored area can be changed by the buttons. For the following three areas, all erase of
(3) is operated.
f
>**
DIRFCTORv|C:
WORK No
jj-$
Proqraa
SIZE PKOT.P.AM KAHF.
JiTANDAKI)
PROGRAM
HACK UP PROGRAM
HOI)
OlEKAT
I(KO<;KAM-
----
---OK
J3
(Selected area)
(Directory display)
-STANDARD PROGRAM C:\MC_MachineProgurams
-E>(2)BACKUP PROGRAM
C:\MC_Backup\Programs
>HDD OPERATION PROGRAM

C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs
91
92
93
94
95
List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)
Data details
1 Machining programs
2 Machining programs for HD
operation
3 Gantry programs
4 Machining programs for backup
5 Sampling data tool data related
Operation control screen data
7 Display data for NIC screen
8 Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation
9 Custom display related module
10 3D interference check*Real
simulator* 3D data for setup
11 Real simulator IN I FILE
12 NC system software
13 J2-CT parameters
14 Maintenance data
15 Option data
16 I SRAM backup
17 I PLC internal memory backup
96
Folder (file) name

C:\MC_Machine Programs
C:\MC GL Data
G:\MC_Backup
C:\MC sdg
C:\RUMMNG
C:\nm64mdata
C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
C:\Custom Display
C:\MC_Machine Database
C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\ReleaseVealsimjni
C:\ncbackup
CAI2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV***. prm
C:\mainte\mnt_j3kup.dat
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
C:\mainte\(IMC serial No.).opt.old
C:\mainteVpfcbkf1 1 ,dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01 .dat (NEXUS)
Matrix Data To Save

Added note in step 1 for backup-inch folder(R3)
The data for the Matrix control can now be saved to an USB Jump drive which will allows to save
complete folders easily . So, the data to save is somewhat revised from that of the M640.
Data To Save on Installation Checklist

1) Through Data I/O save the machine parameters, user parameters, cutting conditions.
Save to hard drive under Backup-inch folder if in inch mode, and Backup-mm for
metric.(R3)
2) Using either Printkey or Printscreen3(c:\mainte\printscreen3.exe) save the
following 4 pages:
A) Go to privilege mode.
(To access: Diagnos, Version, Right menu key , 1131 and Input.)
B) Option page.
C) Version page- (Note: In privilege mode, the Model number will be
displayed)
D) O-Parameter page.
E) Hardware Monitor page.
3) Copy the c:\m6y_ymw\Mplc or Tplc folder.
4) Copy the C:MC_SDG\ Alarm folder.
5) Copy the Nm64mdata\eng folder.
6) Copy *.prm and axisinfu.dat file from the c:\Program Files\j2ctbus folder.
7) Save a new mntbkup.dat file using c:\mainte\mainte.exe maintenance tool to hard
drive. Then copy the resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file from the c:\mainte.exe
folder to USB drive.
8) Save any 9000 series programs either by Data I/O or Explorer.
9) Save the Pic ladder. See Appendix B
If have a Gantry
10) Save parameter and programs of robot using Data I/O on robot side.
ll)Copy all of these into a folder with S.N. Machine Type and Customer Name.
Then compress to a zipped file with serial number and date(YYYYMMDD).
Example 184305_20060512.zip. For s.n 184305 and May 5th,2006.
12) Place this on the shared on locutus(S:) folder of
Address |Z] S:\MazdtroHMachineDataFromField\184305_QTN300_IPH
x j !
Folders
Bshared on tortus' (S:)

:
lu
GCM
.t
D (2004-02-03) Mahle Update
J O.ClassSyllabus
3! ft
U f
LJ
feme
fl843O5_2OO6O504.zip
Sa| Type:
154 KB WinZip File
iHddfed
05/04/06 12:15PM
184305_QTN300_IPNI
jO.dassWorkbooks
I This folder is Online.
* J OO MEAU consignment parts
Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField
by logging in using VPN or having someone in the office placing it there.
*
97
It is up to the regions how they wish to handle the data as they probably wish to
have their own backup. See Appendix 1 for more detail.
Data To Save on Service Calls if updated software.

1) Version page.
2) Alarm folder
3) Pic ladder.
4) *.LPC file if upgraded.
5) Machine and user parameters.
Appendix A
nafA'
.
-M&1MTENAHCE!
Saving the Mntbkup.dat file

y
2nd
..
NC worn
FC&6551HY-NV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
IACKUP
HC HODEI
:_il 1
FOJC-MAG51-34
NC 5EE1A1#
DEI .
M6S6993033-9
>j
51873-DEM-0OQ7OO7-OOGOO
Li
HC SERIAL# INPUT
'1$*- INPUT
-4
OPTION
BACKUP
1
Fib Folder
m62yticcd dl
a | fjMGSysHDNC M.exe
80 KB
.....
--i j
<-<-
p] W6YSV5.DLL
24 KB
gW62VbY3.DLL
Z4 KB
20 KR
fPrintSrreenJ.eve
lgm62ytd.ag.cil
ha
28 KB
gj m62vtaDi.nl!
143 KB
pMAIWrE.KE
368 KB
pj mante.ni
~fWj mrf._bkup.dot
; 3-mainte :
L_J Vnc_t; :
;
i
M- P 1 Mcbeckjp?
48 KB Applccticn Ex
1KB
2b KB
32 KB
ID* BACKUP i j
IE# CHANGE
s-
Vnc_tool
CONTROL UNIT TYPE IHFUT
BU5DRV32.DLL
setup, txt
Dload32.exe
NC MODEL IHFUT
PRODUCT ID# r
3-DEM- 0007007-00000
'
wne
M656 9930339
yjozl:
g|||g||
'
.
1;
OPTION DATA
s/w UPDATE I HAIHTENANCE
lsti
1b
HC SERIAL*
k px'pdv<6.s: a <r-u .-nanhrr ;
FCA655LHY-HV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
FCU6~NA651~34
OPTION DATA
si
- NC
PC
BACKUP
"
Text Docurrer
Applcation
Applcatien x
Applccficn
Applcsfcicn Ex
Applcaicn X
ApplcsBinn
Appkctlen Ex
Applcation Ex
ApplCctiOn
3 KB
1 KB DAT Fib <M
\r. \
\i
*) -Cj
nm64triat
i 1 Program I
!i
Results new mntjokup jg
Copy the new resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file to USB jump drive.
Appendix B- Saving of the ladder.

1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and
press Input.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select
98
NC
FILE
enter 1131 and
'
-'.it
<7
5) Press OPEN.
6) Select OPEN again.
A)Display will say Reading from Pic

B) Display will say "Pic Onboard Complete"
7) Press OK.
8) Press CLEFT MENUC key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values.
10) If
still not showing status, select
START/
STOP
MONITOR
comments then may be that the comments aren't

selected to be shown.
A) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the VIEW, select it.
11) If No
B) Select COMMENT
TOOLS
-
DISPLAY
C)Make
sure there is checkmark beside | | COMMENT .
D) Press SET when finished.
Still No comment?
This is probably because the comment file (*. wed) wasn't
Loaded in with ladder in steps 5 and 6.

Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
main Mitsubishi Pic Programming Tools Copyright
screen .
A)
B)
Select ENVIRON .
SETTING
C) Select NC FILE
D)
SETTING
Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted

or just press arrow down key to highlight it.
F) The pathway should be C: \m6y_ymw\MPLC
G) Press SETTING menu key.
H) Press the Left menu key an select
NC
E)
FILE
Repeat steps 5 through 10 to see the ladder with comments.
ladder and comments are shown, go to next step to

save ladder and comment file.
12) If
13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the Copyright screen,
the
LADDER must be shown as solid black.

14)
Press
NC
FILE
99
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
Press OPEN
Press OPEN again.
Select OK.
Press CLEFT MENUC key till see Copyright screen again.
Select I EXTERNAL
FILE
20)
Press
21)
Press EXTERNAL
F)
SAVE
PROJECT
SAVE
22)
If a USB jumpdrive is inserted, then make sure that

the Drive/Path is set correctly to the drive.
23)
Select PROJECT
NAME
24)
Enter in an appropriate filename, normally ladder

version .
25)
Press SAVE.
26)
Select OK.
The ladder is now saved to the USB Jumpdrive.
Note: When the project ladder is saved, it will be a folder that includes sub-folders
containing the ladder and comments. The lathe, e-machine, and mills file structure are
different.
100
Appendix 1
Connect to shared drive, Shared on Locutus by entering the Mazak

network either from a regional office or through VPN. It is best to map that
drive so you dont have to do a search via Network Neighborhood.
r->9 shared on 'locutus' (5:)
B D !GCM
a C (2004-02-03) Mahle Update
$0] 0_ClassSyllabus
E-iCl 0_ClassWorkbooks
B-Q
shared on
'locutus' (S:)
This folder is Online.
00_MEAU consignment parts
Ifl Cl 10.0 CAPRMS Documentation

i
iJ
Q Mazatrol
Q MC parts order
ClMCAM_POSTS
Cl MEAU WARRANTY STOCK

Cl MERGE FILES
Cl MexicoTransf erPrice
Cl Midwest
Select an item to view its description. fj
aCl 100 Series APC
pjnn
Once there, simply go to the Mazatrol drive and copy the customer
information by using s.n. , machine type, customer name in folder. Create a
folder using this as your format.
Address |Cl S:\Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField
L=
I Folders
B Cl Mazatrol
: E C MachineDataFromField
| B Cl MATRIX_PRM VIEWER
!j
Name J
Cl 184305_QTN300JPM
MachineDataFromFieli
j Utilities
The zipped file with data should be named by serial number and date.
Address |Q S: \lzatrol\MachineDa!:aFromFfeld\184305JN300JF1
Folders
3$
Name l
Sj184305_20060504.zip
$ Cj Mazatrol
: E'CI MachineDataFromField
! | B -S) 184305JQTN300JPM
184305_QTN300_IPM
Once this is placed here, it will be copied over to the standard service drive
for safe-keeping and will be available by either intranet or through the
service web-site, http://main.mazakcorp.com/service/.
101
102
System Maintenance Work
2
2-1
2-1-1

Folder/File Configuration and Device Information
AT Side Module and File List
The AT side modules and files required for this system.
These contents are planned to be described in the next edition.
2-1-2
HDD Folder Configuration

The configuration of this system's HD folders.
2-1-3
Device Information
The default setting information for the Windows system device manager.
103
2-2
Version Upgrading S/W
2-2-1
Preparing the Media Upgraded
NC system software (MAIN-A) and NC application software (MAIN-B) are provided in the media such as
CD-ROM. In order to execute an upgrade, prepare for IC card, USB memory, etc. according to the
following folder configuration.
(1) When IC card (Front) is used:
Folder configuration
Create a Verup folder directly below the device (root), and put a version-name folder under the
Verup folder.
(D Only one version-name folder is allowed under the Verup folder.
(D The configuration of the folders/files under the version-name folder is as shown below.
@ Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.
The Verup folder directly below the device is the only object to be
upgraded. (The other folders and files are ignored.)
(root)
Q Hi
Verup
D !l A1
CjJ LH Atsys
Create only one version-name folder in the Verup folder.
0 Diski
\-{h Setup.exe
{ e t c. )
> Application (MAIN-B) upgrade file
P Ncsys
i~Q
Bootsys.ncs
r-O NcentJ.ncs
> NC system (MAI N-A) upgraded file
Ncsystem.ncs
(2) When a medium, such as IC card (Back), USB memory, etc., that can be accessed as an external
drive of the NC is used:
Folder configuration
The file configuration under the version-name folder is as shown below.
(2) The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.
(D Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.
Ck)
Cn AO
in AI
CjD CH Atsys
The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.
Diski
f-Q
>
Application (MAIN-B) upgraded file
>
NC system (MAIN-A) upgraded file
Setup.exe
dp Ncsys( e.t.c. )
j-o
Bootsys ncs
NcentJ.ncs
Ncsystem.ncs
104
1]
(3) When the version backed up in the HD is used:

When the application and NC system are upgraded by using the maintenance tool, the contents under
the version-name folder are automatically copied under the HD's C:\ncbackup.
(Note that the contents are copied in the Atsys folder when upgrading the application, and in the Ncsys
folder when upgrading the NC system.)
Since the versions previously upgraded with this NC are backed up in the HD, it is possible to retrieve
one of those versions by selecting an arbitrary version No. as required.
(Example) When upgrading
the application of version A1

C:
Device
Ncbackup
O CH AO
(root)
O D A1
DAI
Cj3 D Atsys
Atsys
P Diski
r-o
Lp Diski
j~LI Setup.exe
Setup.exe
( e t c. )
(e.t.c. )
Ncsys
All the contents under the version-name folder, including the file
to be upgraded, are copied in the HD's C:\ncbackup before
upgrading.
105
2-2-2
Upgrading Procedure
By the flow chart, the upgrading procedure is explained.
This chart explains a standard prodecre, so please confirm the details by Version upgrade
manual" which will be offerd when every new NC S/W version is released.
START
Back up the customers current data for attention.

Back up all data according to "1-5-3 Backing Up the
Saved Data".
Back up the saved data
ik
Farther, backup SRAM data in the NC unit.

Backup all the SRAM data and PLCs data area
according to SRAM->HDD of "1-4-2 Backing Up
and Restoring the SRAM"
Backup of the SRAM data
Version upgrade
the PC side system (MAIN-B)
Install the NC PC side system (MAIN-B). Refer to

section "2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
(MAIN-B)" for details.
Install the NC system (MAIN-A).

Refer to section "2-2-3 Upgrading NC system
(MAIN-A)" for details.
Version upgrade
the NC system (MAIN-A)
The saved data backed up is restored.

Refer to section "1-5-4 Restoring the Saved Data"
for details.
Restore the back up data
No
Parameter
Change?
(1) Add/Change the parameters according to
(1) Add/Change the parameters
(2) Back up the parameters after
changing
"Version upgrade manual".

(2) Back up the parameters according to (T)SRAM
->FLROM of "1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring
the SRAM" after adding/changing.
(1) Confirm the version display after the operations
by the version display screen from the menu
Confirm after upgrading
"DIAGNOS" -> "VERSION".

(2) Request the confirmation of the machine
operation to the customer after upgrading.
END
106
(Notice) Data backed up first will be used only when it

should be necessary to get back to former state by any
chance because of unexpected phenomenon occurs after
upgrading the NC system.
2-2-3
Upgrading NC system (MAIN-A)
Procedures for upgrading the NC system (MAIN-A) is given below.

Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained
urns ;
mwm mm
as follows.
j-:
wrnrn
r
Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading
file is included.
START
in>
HCJWSTCH
ic
URUTS
wmm cw
START
& 1X50.1 SWUX'
* ic WUMB cm
Execution of NC system upgrade

Click the [START] button.
STAR?
r.w
'
] MHHWKij
BI,BF
]
DT
Confirmation of execution
The following message appears.
IS IT OK
i
R.
m START- 0PDATXS&
_
_
_
---
K-C SYSTEH S? :
.-Always push the emergency stop button when

upgrading with the actual machine.
eaBferjHscjp st&p buttgn $
Mt&r
9 OVERWRITE BOOT S'K
CANCEL
OK
Leave the checkmark for "OVERWRITE BOOT SA/V"

ON.
[OK] Upgrading process is continued. > Go to @.

[CANCEL] Upgrading process is discontinued.
(4)
Exiting the application

When executing the maintenance tool without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.
Designation of installation file

When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to .
When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed. Select a
version-name folder and click "OK".
(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the ncsys\Bootsys.ncs file beneath it is
automatically selected.)
|? ]fx]
Browse For Folder

Select the Ver. Folder
c-: D nc backup
A-
Selecting a version-name folder
Ss L_j AJJ3
B D B_A8
W
C_J
B_A8B
8 LJ B_A8T
m LJ B_A8TE
CJ B_AC
&
:+;
L_J Atsys
nesys
v
OK
Cancel
107
Copying of installation file

File to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be
copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is
overwritten and copied.
INSTALLER FILES BACK UP,
(Message during copying)
Now . Setup Files Back Up..
Execution of installation with the specified file

Stop NC operation to execute upgrading with the file in which system software in the NC unit
(MAIN-A) is specified. Then, restart the NC.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
S3S*
DURING NC SYSTEM RENEWAL ENVIRONMENT

MAKING.
fH
OVERWRITING NC SYSTEM
(Upgrading process is displayed.)
S/U
SOFTWARE UPDATE
DURING NC SYSTEM RE-ACTIVATION .
NC SYSTEM S/W UPDATE IS DONE Vv'ITH SUCCESS.

PLEASE TURN ON THE POWER SUPPLY AGAIN.
OK
When the above message appears, press "OK" to complete the NC system upgrading process.
108
2-2-4
Upgrading PC Side System (MAIN-B)

Procedures for upgrading the NC application (MAIN-B) is given below.
(1)
Release the password key lock. ( Refer to the section "1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock")
(2)
Check the Windows task bar in the bottom of the screen, and if there exist any applicatons in running,
close all of them.
(3)
Upgrading procedure with using the maintenance tool

Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained as follows.
Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading
file is included.
(2)
j sijiftirf Y
ipitU?
mwm mm-
-T,-
rjmaemaat sorrtttSE mtmt

& ic mam cm?
r is>
Execution of application upgrade

"
Click the [START] button.
$rm
*S
.
i* ic am*? a
gp
START
idUttCT srrup TOOL VP&ATS:
(3) Confirmation of execution

The following message appears.
f C-lt
mam
ic
cu
START
up
|KIISTXKiKCEj
irmTC
OACKVP
OPTICK
J
EOT
15 IT OK TO START INSTALLATION ?
Yes
[Yes] Version upgrading is continued. -* Goto @.

[No] Version upgrading is discontinued.
No
Exiting the application

When the maintenance tool is executed without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.
(D Designation of installation file

When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to .
When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed.
Select a version-name folder and click "OK".
(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the Atsys\Disk1\Setup.exe file beneath it is
automatically selected.)
Browse For Folder

Select the Ver. Folder
ri
j nc backup
+ LJ AJJ3
Selecting a version-name folder.
+ :_] B_AS
+' _J 6_A8B
+ _J B_A8T
to
U B _A8TE
B.AC
* _J
'
j Atsys
:_j
ricsys
OK"
]|
Cancel
"]
109
Copying of installation file

A file to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is overwritten
and copied.
warn
(Message when starting to copy)
Now Installer Fites Back Up . . .
Copying
(Message during copying)
data2.cab
From 'Diskl' to Diskl'
|N*
to-
; <'
25 Seconds Remaining
-[
Cancel
(7) Uninstallation of existing system

Uninstallation of an existing system is executed.
Go to when initially writing an application or when uninstallation has already been executed.
a
So# Sstfut
(Executing uninstallation)
r caa i
[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon

canceling the uninstallation.
(Completed uninstallation)
:v J j
[Finish] -> Goto
110
<D
Execution of installation with the specified file

The installer automatically starts and installation is carried out with the specified file.
sssaaBr****to*&**aS$**& VteMl
utsm
iifck ffe*4.
Sr'.y*S>w fcOMCMto
'
...
jH&fcSDtb'MMMM
3 1 <w~3
[Next] Upgrading process is continued.

[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon
canceling the installation.
(Message during installation)

CV.\M74flNwV5igeftNL0IJL
|p|T
C; VVV i n dows\system 3 2\d ri vt; rs \V irtiidldiivai.exe
immediately before the completion of

installation, click "OK".
YMANAGER not exist !!
jx) Note: When the alarm shown left appears
(Completed installation)
tniUHVhwW Wl.'trf LTwptHn
tbviniifdtiMfi WumK-ii ieRtA
FAT tikf
FrusSj m&.
f
,
[Finish] Upgrading process is completed upon

exiting the installer.
111
2-3
2-3-1
Adding/Setting Software Options
Preparing S/W Option

The S/W option of MATRIX is officially sold and provided in the Windows file form.
The file is named "(NC serial No.).opt".
For example, if this NC's serial No. is M7123456789, the option file is provided under the file
name of M71 23456789.opt.
Copy the option file officially provided onto the USB memory or IC card (front) for the
preparation.
(1) When USB memory is used (Recommended)
The option file installed is selected with the maintenance tool. So, the option file can be
stored on an arbitrary folder.
(2) When IC card (front) is used
Store only one option file (The extension ".opt") to "root" of IC memory card. (It is not
possible to select the file by the maintenance tool.)
Difference from conventional option

The option was provided by ROM cassette until M640 series. When purchasing an option for
the second time or later, only difference information between the previous time and this time is
written in ROM cassette. Therefore, two or more ROM cassettes exist when the S/W option is
purchased additionally. For example, when NC unit is exchanged, all the stored ROM
cassettes must be installed in order.
In MATRIX, the option is supplied by file (fixed file name is given for each NC serial No.). So,
even if the options are purchased two or more times, all option data reflected for past
purchase history is written to the latest option file. The differences of option handling between
the conventional model and MATRIX are described below.
M640 series
MATRIX series
Type
Option ROM cassette
Option file (Windwos file)
Media
Dedicated ROM cassette
USB memory, IC card, etc.
Option data
Data of difference from last The always latest option data

time
Keeping after
option is installed
All option ROM cassettes are The latest option file is saved in the
following of NC's FID. (automatic
attached to the machine.
saving with maintenance tool)
C:\mainte\(NC serial No ).opt
112
2-3-2
Adding/Setting Software Options

The S/W option addition and setup methods are explained as an example of using the USB
memory use.
(1) Set the USB memory stored option file to NC unit.
(2) Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to
open the maintenance tool.
(3) (Only when S/W option is added)

Select "MAINTENANCE" mepu,
and click [>] button.
51
ickns
SJ'*i.niMANa
xutnteuHcc
.
? :
BACKUP
JK
W mriFT
O5KTK0I, WIT
rm
FCW-WSlSKW
The current NC's option contents

are written to
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
by this operation.
Normally, the file is automatically
created when the option is set
last time as described later.
wi-
BC SttUU
xniuttTH
OFTIOK PATA
Sail.
IT
itc aemur
5j
123S?85
OFTIO!* BATA
.
a mtvim
ptat%
m mm ism I
wit ww' iitrer j
eoifraji
NC SSSIS.U MSOT
j
:
sm KFOATE
OFTIOK
When the option is set for the first time, this operation is not required because there is no
option data in NC.
(4) Select the "OPTION" menu, and
display the "Select a Option
Files-
TpOtS
err i os
; SOTUiC
& .t.o
_ li
nmm w
soresto
screen.
(5) Select the [HD] of "SETTING"
menu.
Select [1C MEMORY CARD]
when option file is prepared
in front 1C card.
(6)
UPDATE
[ AliifENAKOE|
DACRt#
OFT IOK
EXIT
Click the "SETTING" button.
113
A dialog prompting an option file selection is displayed. Specify drive/path/option file name.
(When the 1C memory card is selected, this dialog is not displayed.)
Sitfcil .1 Optkw Hlrs |
fee}; US*
Cjtxea
SfyBixxs*
i3
:
13ft
'
-U
M? &$<*#**&
3B
FfcgiSSa?
fmSem
r_w~"
Ftes
Specify a file and click the "Open" button. The specified file is copied to C:\mainte\, and the
contents of option file is ready to be set in the NC unit.
When the option file having the same file name as that of the specified file already exists in
C:\mainte\, confirmation message for overwriting appears.
MAY I OVERWRITE ?
HIIIE:::)]
No
[Yes] The file is overwritten and option setting is started.

Note that the extension of the original option file must be
changed from "opt" to "opt.old" when saving.
[No] The file is not overwritten and option setting is
discontinued.
Note that when specifying the option file in C:\mainte\, option is set to the NC unit by the file
specified without copying.
Option setting is completed when the display of the "SETTING" button in the option setting
screen turns to normal from the grayed state.

Alarm message appears in the following cases, and the option setting is discontinued.
When C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt is a file with a different serial No.
from that of NC.
2 or more option files exist in C:\mainteV
2 or more option files are created by copying the specified file
in to C:\mainteV
(*) In other word, the number of option files (file having the extension
name of ".opt") in C:\mainte\ has to be only one and its file name has
to have the same serial No. as that of NC unit.
B-. y -Q
OPTION ERROR
(7) The maintenance tool is ended.

(8) Confirm the option effective setting has been updated on the option screen after
turning NC power supply ON again.
114
2-3-3
Attention for adding S/W option

The state of option setting is changed from A to B by adding an option. The following
indicates the transition of the option setting.
Before setting the option addition

NC
Option A
HD
C:\mainte
L (NC serial No.).opt
- -Option A
After setting the option addition

NC
Option B
HD
Renamed
and seved
USB memory
(NC serial No.) .opt

Option B
C:\mainte
t;
(NC serial No.). opt

NC serial No.). opt.old
Option B
Option A
The latest option file is saved on HD as " (NC serial No.).opt", and the second last option file is
saved as "(NC serial No ). opt old".
When the option setting is different from the customer intended state by a wrong
purchase/order etc. of the option, return to the state of option A according to the following
procedures, and confirm the option arrangement again.
Method of return to the previous option state
Rename the option file under "C:\mainte" on Explorer:

(NC serial No ).opt
>(NC serial No.). new
(NC serial No.).opt.old->(NC serial No ).opt

Install the option file C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt from maintenance tool again.
115
2-4
Servicing with the Maintenance Tool

(1) Start up "Explorer" from "Start" menu (right click), and then start the maintenance tool
(C:\mainte\mainte.exe). Select "MAINTENANCE" menu to open the MAINTENANCE
screen. The NC model, serial No. and control unit type can be input on the screen.
Refer to the "Maintenance Tools Instruction Manual" (BNP-B3934-902) for details.
3MAINTENANCE TOOLS
MAINTENANCE
'
NC
NC MODEL
(C)
_il
FCA750PY-N02
CONTROL UNIT TYPE

FCU7-MA513-22
NC SERIAL#
M7001234567
OPTION DATA
(a)
(b)DEL.
>j
(d)
A production number
note to a service part
(e)
(g)
S/W UPDATE
MAINTENANCE
--BACKUP
NC MODEL
FCA750PY-N02
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
FCU7-MA513-22
NC SERIAL#
M7123456789
OPTION DATA
NC MODEL INPUT
CONTROL UNIT TYPE INPUT

NC SERIAL# INPUT
BACKUP
OPTION
EXIT
The correspondence of each button is explained in the following section. (This is not
related to the work procedures.)
(a)
Backing up from FLROM to HD
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE DATA TO BACKUP FILE ?
Yes
(b)
No
Deleting backup files
?j
ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE BACKUP FILE ?
Yes
(c)
The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option

data registered in FLROM are written to HD,
C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat Maintenance data
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.J.opt -Option data
The HD backup files (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are

deleted.
No
Writing from HD to FLROM
1J
Nr
AitF YOU Sf SlF TO RFSsOiif DATA
ftACfrt P FIiF >
The NC model, serial No., control unit type and option

data ( \mainte\(serial No.).opt) saved in the HD backup
file (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are registered in the
FLROM
Yes
f4o
_|si
~ORD
A password is required to return the product information

Only Mitsubishi personnel can carry out this
to the NC.
procedure
-r
OK
116
CA1ICEL | CLEAR
(d)
NC model input
J
r
The NC model can be selected from the combo box
or can be directly input.

After inputting the NC model, click on the "OK button.
The NC model in the backup file
(C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) will be updated, and the NC
MODEL in the display window of the MAINTENANCE
screen will be updated simultaneously.

OK
(e)
CANCEL
Press "CANCEL" to cancel input of the NC model,

and press "CLEAR" to clear the items input in the
combo box.
CLEAR
Control unit type input

n:n:ir
The control unit type can be selected from the combo

box or can be directly input. After inputting the control
unit type, press on the "OK" button. The control unit
type in the BACKUP display window of the
MAINTENANCE screen will be updated.
3
OK
(f)
CANCEL
CLEAR
NC serial No. input

NC SERIAL*
M?r
OK
(g)
Writing to HD
A&F YOU
CLEAR
CANCEL
Input nine characters after M7.

After inputting the serial No., click on the "OK" button.
The input will be checked. In the input check, the No.
of input characters and the validity of the characters will
be checked.
If the input check is okay, the NC SERIAL # in the
BACKUP display window of the MAINTENANCE screen
will change.
The backed up options will be cleared when the serial
No. is changed. Note that the options will be cleared
when the password is input and the NC data is written
in.
FLROM of service part unit
to aesto&e DATA FROM fc&oar n F >

Vet
Mu
The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option

data written in the HD backup file
(C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are written to FLROM of the
service part.
The service part is a special unit whose serial No. is
(Two characters following M7 are 0.
M700
Arbitrary characters since the third character.)
The function is same as C, but the password input is
not required when writing in the service part.
117
118
r~ r
2-5
Inputting and Outputting Ladders

The ladders stored in the NC's FLROM can be output to the external media by ladder monitor.
Conversely, the ladders stored on the external media can be input to the NC's FLROM/SRAM.
Starting the ladder monitor
The ladder monitor is starded in 1 131mode
EUlsiilP--
3*/3
."W
so*
]ia
DIACWOS
VERSION
!s * 'SOS/i/*o
rVV'A 0 . OOSn/ttir*
Orpe
DIftGNOS
OPTION
MONITOR
SERVO
SPINDLE
JIPADtJALE| LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
VERSION
MONITOR
Two ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder input/output must execute both COS1 and COS2.
2-5-1
Saving to External Media

The procedure is shown below:
Open the ladder which runs in NC on onboard edition area.

Save the opened ladder in external media.
NC HN123card
(Vertual:COS2 side)
NC
(SRAM/FROM)
(Real:COS1 side)
V*4.
External
Project/\
Save
Project
Open
PC
side
A-*
FROM area
Area for
COS2
7?
NC HN163card
HN482card
Area for
COS1
/ ROM
wrile
Save
Temporary
storage
Copy when
the power is
ON
Onboard
edition area
area
Open
n<=
\
"T
Execute ladder
Edit/Monitor
(a) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING" -"CONNECT NC Setting" to select the ladder of

COS1 side.
1
ill
!
r iLC
Vlf
r~
Ull
(b) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET". (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M02
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)
119
CONNECT Hfr SETTING".

OTjilJeiMiirsa
SET
Warning:
When connection destination WC is changed, the

PLC data on onboard is lost.
aT'
(c)
SST
!
:
i
i
Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key", and click "NC FILE".
I
i
SC
fill
OTOM/L
rut
nir
Wuswi.
riawi
W5OP
Df/IKH.
(tlP
JITHhC
M!
(d) Click OPEN".

i
Oik
Sflfc
K*C
VUUFY
WJ1E
ten it
t$i
BSS?
(e) Click "OPEN" -> "OK".

X
373j>: 1 1S
05101 ?
"tt er
PLC/tw*rk
OPEN
(0
SEL. ALL
/CANCEL
05/10/20 20:50:20 130 532Bvt
05/10/20 20:50:20
33 & B v t e
SELECT
PARAM.
+ PFDC.
Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "EXTERNAL FILE".
!
rsc
MU
c-sr
ulABWs.
If IF
(g) Click "SAVE PROJECT"

I
*35. j
rr fixicT
(h) Click "EXT ERNAL SAVE".
120
M)1
(M3
| SAVE- PROJECT
a
-J
g] PROCRAM
-0 373HXI19
051017
'.r: {*3 Parameter
parent
SELECT
SEL. ALL
EXTERNAL
SAVE
PARAM.
/CANCEL
PROC.
(i) Set "DRIVE", "Path" and "Project name". Click "SAVE".

EXTERNAL SAVE
ffra
DRIVE
LIST
j
PLC ty pel Dale of creating
Fi le name
m..
| Heading
Oi rectory
Drive/Polh _ [D'Vtenp
ld_O5O0O5|
Title
CANCEL
SAVE
(j) When the following dialog is displayed, the saving is completed. Click "OK".
, -l v
;sv>
CospIctecJ.
!
m&m
(k)
Return to the following screen pressing F1 key" twice.

i
(I)
M;
fur
ICiTX
LXttF.
fill
flWOi.
j.
| toll
eve
tar
Click "ENVIRON. SETTING". (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (o), and end the ladder monitor.
t
uu
? itr
WCtR
CICt
ttiV*.
C*!*/XG.
LUGKX.
ar
Oil
(m) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET" on "CONNECT NC SETTING".
121
CONNECT NC SETTING ,
'
IS m
SET
Warning:
When connection destination NC is changed, the

(n) Operate (c) to (k), and save the COS2 side ladder.
(o) End the ladder monitor clicking "END".
2-5-2
I til
nu
iCYICC
UtWR
FJU
?}MA.
ClJJJQSGS.
SOW
JCU1
Loading from External Media

The procedure is shown below:
Clear the ladder which runs in temporary storage area.
(2) Open the project saved in external media on the onboard edition area.
Load the opened ladder to the temporary storage area in NC.
@ Save the ladder in ROM area.
if the steps of (2) and are executed without deleting the ladder of step when the project
name between the ladder executed in the temporary storage area and the ladder saved in the
external media differ, two ladders are registered (multi-ladder specification).
NC HN123card
(Vertual : COS2 side)
\
NC
HN482card
ROM write
Area for
COST
Temporary
side
Onboard
edition area
storage
area
Copy when
the power
is ON
COS2
Project
Open
/x
Save
Area for
External
media
SaveZ
FROM area
Project
NC HN163card
(Real :COS1 side)
Erase ladder
(SRAM/FROM)
Open
Execute
(a) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING"
COS1 side
Edit/Monitor
"CONNECT NC SETTING" to select the ladder of

I
rm
122
DC
( il<
L'siV-JW-
* ME
'I
UJitiK
tevicr
nr-jn.
SISS I
iCLP
tfil
LUi
(b) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET". (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M02
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)
CONNECT NC SETTING
SI
SET
Warning:

arjp
ECT
'
(c)
Return to the following screen pressing F1 key", and click "NC FILE".
| Ml
i
fC
HU.
DCDHiU.
rite
rju:
i
\
Wirot.
2T11HC
W)
*1P
(d) Click ,,DELETEM.

t
Mi
Cftt
vtwrr
SAYt
ICXTE
fcrawT
(e) Click "SEL. ALL/CANCEL", and all data is selected.

X
'
/\ 373lX
l 13
05101?
Pirsroete/
PLC/Mtwo/h
DELETE
AIL
f sa.
/cwa
05/10/20 ?0:5020
130S$?0yt
03/10/20 20.50:20
3360vtc
$CLECT
(0 Click "DELETE".
i
t I~I
&Sf !
! Wl
! S&
(g) Click "YES" on "DELETE CONFIRMATION" screen.
123
3
It acil iwJ I He i deleted.
Is ii all riiM1?
El
SO
(h) If the ladder is RUN" state, "STOP" is urged. Click "YES.

FtC * ri s ftlW stile,
J* &Ieiipn >rfcred ifl*r
lgp Pt,C?
NO
(i) When the following dialog is displayed, the deleting is completed. Click "OK".
ftSMsttid
,
P|
,-E
CcfttpJeletJ.
-V
ft,;
(j) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "EXTERNAL FILE".
rant
uivu
w text
I
tc
flit
B7a*
rSLT
j.
SB
| Ml
I
IM?
(k) Click "OPEN PROJECT".

*3
iaitr
rgg.
n&< j
| ffi
(I) Set "DRIVE" and "File name", and click "SELECT1.
|:$aECI; PROJECT?
DRIVE
I PLC typeFPate of
Jiilsjsff,
E&..
c i ea tins
[Head i nr
Di rectory
B:
Dr i ve/Pftt h
jD: Vlcmp
Project
[ij>d_05030fi
SELECT
moie
CANCEL
(m) Click "OPEN".
124
|
i
tail
OPEN PROJECT :
a I.CS0805.,:|
rKUUHAM
Q 373HX1 13 051017
Parameter
2 param
SEL. ALL
/CANCEL
CP EH
SaECT
SELECT
PARAH.
PROJECT
PROG.
(n) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting is displayed, click "ALL
YES".
X
UP-- -
The program (373MX119.P?) already exists.

Are you sure OK to overwrite?
YES
ALL YES
NO
(o) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click "OK.
iHE.Mwrij Cclete3.
i
sail
(p)
Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "NC FILE.
'n't. ;.5U5.';
Pil>
H.I*
i
:
M:
rue
! S I
HflH
>i
(q) Click 'SAVE

t
4
Oft't
SAVE
VERIFY
JSk
tGLU
| eat)
FCfirUT
(r) Click "SAVE".
125
x]
-FREE SPACE VOLLWE
j=
a PROGRAM
LARGEST CONTIGUOUS
..2
3 [ar
373WX \ 19
Par ansttr
Par am
051017
BYTE
TOTAL FREE SPACE

BYTE
FREE
SPACE
YOLUUE
SELECT
PARAM.
+ PROG.
SEL. ALL
/CANCEL
SAVE
(s) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click "OK".
;X
Collet c4;
(1) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key", and click "ROM WRITE".
esni; j.ifi'.-fr.
TO zrp
era
Ml
reran
iCLZK
|
:
WSl'.*
(u) Click "YES".

! PW wire " -
TStflPiAflV H3KY
Cd.lt
or CfCAHIC
1J
I'-Alt t> CREA11;

IV)
>co
it In RGB?
tr It*
(v) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting ROM is displayed, click
"ALL YES".
AM data in
Ihe
program rersory
Do you
wsm
the lar get *i 1 1 be deleted,
lly
*on(
dale oil I bs written into ISe target.
to execute?
YES
NO
(w) When the following dialog is displayed, the ROM writing is completed. Click "OK".
126
ry.
C*olleiJ.
'
llilll
r
(x) Click "PLC RUN/STOP,,.
i i
SAVE
troi
!I
KM
VIR1FY
-&>
rcfi
IGITC
wire
gg
(y) Click "YES"

STATUS
[SlS
Is PLC started?
xl
NO
(2) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" once.

rnr
| SOI
Ltfotn
tcvict
KlAGfCi.
pwi.
tar
(aa) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING". (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (dd), and end the ladder monitor.)
I
FILE
!
i
l/iCtT*
fits.
JL
soviet
?|ACME.
rlf-JU.
fii
ail
nr
M)
(bb) Select " MOT' from the list, and press "SET" on "CONNECT NC SETTING".
CONNECT NO SETTING
'TTTT'f!
Tj
\*
SET
Miasag8afflHI
Wa rn i ng :
(cc) Operate (c) to (z). and save the COS2 side ladder.
(dd) End the ladder monitor clicking "END".
I
1
FILL
Sr
UiCCP
:evKt
iff}*.
C- IfirtZ.
SI'S j
-w
dt
Dfl
127
2-6
2-6-1
Replacing the HD
Replacing the HD
Preparation
HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
USB memory for data backup
The replacement procedure of HD is shown below.

Note: This method assumes that the NC is running properly. If Windows does not start, this
method cannot be used.
START
Backup of the saved data
Backup of HDD internal data
Replacement of HDD unit
Back up the customers current data.

Back up all data according to "1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data.".
Backup the HDD internal data.
Refer to section "2-6-2 Backup data of HD" for details.
The HDD unit is removed, and it is replaced by a

new HDD unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new HDD
unit to a front cover of former HDD unit (The name
plate and the WindowsCOA seal are affixed).
V
Upgrading of NC application
\7
All erase in program area
Restoration of backup data
V
Data backup to HDD
END
128
When MAIN-B has not been installed to replaced

HDD or when the version should be upgraded to
the latest version, install prepared MAIN-B
according to "2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
(MAIN-B)".
Erase the all program area on PROGRAM FILE
screen. Refer to section "1-8-2 Initializing the
Programs" for details.
Restore the backed up data by following steps.

(T) Restore the backed up data to HDD according
to "2-6-3 Restoring the Backed up Data.
Restore the all saved data according to "1-5-4
Restoring the Saved Data" .
Back up the NC side data to new HDD.
Refer to section "2-6-4 Backing up the NC Side
Data to HD" for details.
sv*
2-6-2
Backup data of HD
Copy the specific files in HD to an external memory of the USB memory etc. by the Explorer.
List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)
Folder (file) name
Data details
operation _
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Gantry programs_
Machining programs for backup
Sampling data, tool data related
Operation control screen data
Display data for NC screen
Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation
Custom display related module
3D interference check- Real
simulator-3D data for setup
Real simulator INIFILE
NC system software
J2-CT parameters
14 Maintenance data
15 Option data
16 SRAM backup
17 PLC internal memory backup
Note:
...
C:\MC GL Data
C:\MC Backup
C:\MC sdg
C:\RUMMNG
C:\nm64mdata
C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
C:\Custom Display
C:\m6y_ymw\M7401Bin\Release\realsim.ini
C:\ncbackup
C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV*.prm
C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat _
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt.old
C:\mainte\srambkf.dat _
C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_
For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and backup if necessary.
129
2-6-3
HI
Restoring the Backed up Data

The backed up data according to "Backup of HDD internal data" is restored to replaced HD.
List of data restord
(If the folders/files listed in the table below do not exist at backup, it is unnecessary to restore.)
Items marked with
under [Resore] in the table below are restored.
It is unnecessary for the items with O to restore, because these items are directly restored from
NC internal data by the maintenance tool in the next step.
Data details
Restore
Folder (file) name

operation
3 Gantry programs
4 Machining programs for backup
5 Sampling data, tool data related
6 Operation control screen data
7 Display data for NC screen
8 Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation
9 Custom display related module
10 3D interference check- Real
simulator-3D data for setup
11 Real simulator INIFILE
12 NC system software
13 J2-CT parameters
C:\MC GL Data
C:\MC_Backup
C:\MC_sdg
C:\RUMMNG
C:\nm64mdata
C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
C:\Custom Display
C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\Release\realsim.ini
C:\ncbackup
C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbus\***.prm
14
Maintenance data
15 Option data
SRAM backup
16
17
PLC internal memory backup

Machining programs
Note:
130
O
O
C:\rnainte\mnt bkup.dat
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt
O
O
O
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt.old

C:\mainte\plcbkf1 1.dat (Other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_
For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and reset if necessary.
2-6-4
Backing up the NC Side Data to HD

The data of the item with O in the previous page is restored by backing up to HD in which NC
side data has been exchanged.
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
the maintenance tool.

Select the "BACKUP" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
t
'.;l
SACK?
FLASH KOX
JJ
ECT-DATA IxO
_id
do t
&-V
BACKUP
OPTIOK
EXIT
Click the [>] button on the lower right.

Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to HDD.
Refer to the of "1 -4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM" for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/
m
KAIUTTJJAiiCE
LXA7SI1P e- m?
COKTKDJ. TJK t T TYPE
LUIIV-KASI
KC CiERI AL*
X7001234S6?
OPTIOK DATA
Df:i
KCU7-MA!.
VC SERIAL*
K? 123*56783
OPTlOIf DATA
f
1
KC KODKI. ttrpltr
IJIflT TTKK IKKITT
KC SESIAL* IHrUT
IT
\ COKTHOL
1
>
3 n,M;rTE)iA;Ki||
PY-mi;1
a.-irrsoi. mi JT TYPE
A;
bJt
A production
note to o service ijJoxt
C.- UPDATE
r-
/] button on the upper right.

The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as "C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" and " (NC serial
No).opt".
Refer to the (a) of 2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.
131
2-7
Replacing Control Unit
2-7-1
Replacing Control Unit

Preparation
HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
USB memory for data backup
The replacement procedure of NC unit is shown below.
CSTART)
Backup of the saved data
Backup of the NC unit internal data
V
Replacement the control unit
Clearing of SRAM area
<0
Installation of NC system
Restoration of backup data
Calender setting
A
Data backup for emergency
END
132
Back up the customer's current data

Back up all data according to "1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data".
Backup the NC unit internal data.
The target data is the following data.
(D All SRAM data and internal PLC data
@ The maintenance data in FLROM (including the
options)
The ladders in FLROM
Refer to section "2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit
Internal Da1a" for details.
The control unit is removed, and it is replaced by a new
control unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new control unit
to a front cover of former control unit (The name plate is
affixed).
Clear the data in the SRAM mounted in the

replaced control unit's HR482. Refer to section "1-2
Completely Erasing the Memory" for details.
Install the NC system software to NC unit's
FLROM. Refer to section "2-2-3 Upgrading NC
system (MAIN A)" for details.
Restore the backed up data by following steps.

(D Restore the backed up data according to "2-7-3
Loading the Backup Data" .
the all saved data according to "1-5-4
Restore
Restoring the Saved Data" .

Set the date and time.
Refer to section "1-7-1 Setting the Date and Time"
for details.
Back up a part of the SRAM data like the parameter
etc. to FLROM in preparation for various data
areas' breaking down. Refer to section "2-7-4
Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes" for
deis.
2-7-2
Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data

The following NC unit internal data is backed up.
All SRAM data and internal PLC data
(2) The maintenance data in FLROM (Including the options)
(3) The ladders in FLROM
r
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
the maintenance tool.
Select the "BACKUP" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/
3iUEfnHK;rqG6.s
-BACXOF
FLASK ROX
IZLii
SBAX
EXT-I'ATI-0
_LJ CD
/tc' 51-mLOc t
C :s
/
Uft'iTE Mill
lAHCEj j
J||
DACJOIP
OfTICH
EXIT

Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to FIDD.
Refer to the (3) of "1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM" for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS.
/
mm
BACK'D?
KC KODEi
PCIIT-XAM:*-??
KC SERIAL/
I/
X/001234567
HC MODEL
/TQ
PY-KD2
CO XT KOI liKIT TYPfii
J--Y- im 2
COlfTKOL 1131 IT TYPE

KD7-HA513-3?
k)
)rt:
i-
SERIAL/
H7123A5i785
OPTICS DATA
OPT I OH DATA
A product icA
&ote to a crv :co port
/
S-V irTOXTEj
mm
HAIHTEHMCZ:
JtC
mi;iTEMiMCz||
KC XOOKL ItiPbT
j
T TVPK l jrpirr |
'l COKTROI. UK I
!i
,.;l ...
ornoir
EXIT
Click the [>] button on the upper right.

The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as "C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" and " (NC serial
No).opt".
Refer to the (a) of "2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.
133
(3)
FLROM ladder backup

Backup the ladders on "LADDER MONITOR" screen of NC.
Refer to the section "2-5-1 Saving to External Media" of "2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders" for details.
Two ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder must backup both COS1 and COS2.
(Example)
The step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings are as follows:
Drive/path
C:\mainte\ladder
Project name COS1 side>cos1
COS2 side>cos2
134
2-7-3
Loading the Backup Data

The following backed up data is loaded to NC unit.
All RAM data and PLC internal data
(D
The maintenance data in FLROM (including the options)
(3)
The ladders in FLROM
(1) Loading SRAM data

Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.
J
si05
ST)
BACiCUP
FU5K JX
sax
Ti/l/Q
IDCT-DA
C:\JW
S'K UPDATE
ijax e*v5TWLb>:( .dot
JjlAjfrTfflANCEj
|(
BACKUP
OPTION
EXIT
Click the [<] button on the lower left.

"C:\mainte\srambkf.dat" and "C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat" (or "plcbkf01.dat") in FIDD are loaded to
SRAM in NC unit.
(2) Loding FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.)
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
fUS
jJAIlITtKAJICE
SAC y.vp
KC
KC MODEL
KCA7SUEy- KUJ
COKTROS. UKtT TYPE
KC MCC'EX.
ECA75U PY-KUL
trsix TYPE
cojrrKOL
F(,U7-A5N-7?
KU'/'K AS13*-??
KC SERIA1*
KC SERIAL*
H712345(B7B9
CTTIOK DATA
A pr<oduct ion r.uric-sr

cote t o serv 1C* JWl
OPT DOM DATA
S'V UPDATE
*
j XAIIlTGUilCrjj
KC MODE!. IKFi;r
COIfTROJ. inur TYPE IK PUT
.
>-
.isEgr,Z j
\
OiCSXIl\ I
OPTIOK
EXIT
Click the [<] button on the upper left.

"C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" in FIDD is loaded to FLROM in NC unit.
Refer to the (b) of "2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.
135
(3)
Loading FLROM ladder
Load the ladders on "LADDER MONITOR" screen of NC.
Refer to the section "2-5-2 Loading from External Media of "2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders" for details.
In the step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings, select the drive, path and
project name set in (3) of "2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data", and load both
COS1/COS2 ladders.
136
2-7-4
Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes

Backup the parameters, etc., into the FLROM for emergency purposes.
Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.
1
1
V.
Btcxvp
FUSS BOX
SJ?AH
EXT-
_lj_Lf
DAfl 2x0
c:
.dot
/
M OPI'ATE
LsINTfcUMCI
BACKUP
OPT It'S
EXIT

Backup the some SRAM data in NC to FLROM in NC.
137
Appendix
3
3-1
3-1 -1
Appendix
Using the DIAGNOSIS Screen
DIAGNOSIS (ALARM Screen)
This is the main diagnosis screen. Detailed information is given for up to 16 current alarms.
3-1-2
VERSION Screen
The system software, spindle version, servo version, system model name and serial No. are
displayed.
S3
;
unta I sam
mamnj umi txmtm j jtatnaar. mnita 1
VI* rC07-MA&13-Xl
'
tri
WUX-JI
lOOIVlTOO-
MXIJt-B
1DOJW001-A*V
loOJDDU-fcXVfi
BMtl
MprpR
<
)
)
.liCT-3
<
<
).<
)
)
>
BRY-C?
<c
JZC3-S
.ItCT-C
atcr-i
CZCT-B
BRV-W
)
)
JTct-y
PRY-iil
BHV
SRV
ix;y
s-x?
<
3,
BRY-H
flnv-12
H*V- 13
Mt lfl
V- J5
BRV-J6
BPM-1
4
(
<
<
.<
-1
iim-i

)
>
Jtcr-ii
JtCT-13
) <
<
) <
)
)
.J2CT1*
<
>
)
)
1
)
<
SI IS1*
V-M O . OPIn/adi
HMJTMl
>4
nrp-o
<
) (
Hyp
> <
)
<
STM-4
8f-3
TTL&
<
8RY-10
TL'RJ JCJM
iiwi
)
)
)
)
1-XDUtU-r t001U3T3HX119
LMiDtn-U IOOIB373-HXL15
DJCKOC
HMTOJTR
<
<
<
BUY J J
fiRV-f
ear-jr?
HGOti. -CA7 50(*Y'K0l
iJliJUM. M7i73*567B9
VOttJ nta
RT:TO
SPJMIMJT.
liAsJ.DMajti:
HdHlTPIl
HUM ITO*
WOHUOY.
TP* U
yoos/io/n
WOM IT OR
Details
Control unit type

Serial No.
NC model
NC software version
Screen software version
Currently selected language version
Ladder (COS1 side) version
Ladder (COS2 side)yersion
Currently selected PLC language version
Servo unit software version
Spindle unit software version
J2CT unit software version
u. 00:34
Appendix
3-1-3
HARDWARE MONITOR Screen

The hardware mounted on the control unit and board is displayed.
MIW; antrm - gtw mmjrm- twiwj wn*
IW 1
n
*
154
1 **1
<l.03)
*rx ion rt
VLC |
W*
tfUlBi K
? tra 1S4
( ** |
x*n3|
X
7
} etn
11C-
IRIO ?i
3 kxlA3
i*i >|
lint ii
(DID ij
IBH> ti
)iw
tf
B|
Bifrtd
[ETHER] is displayed
031-Bit4 is ON.
Display item
when
Details
CNC
HN163 The CNC card name and sub-version are displayed.

HN123 The C NC card name and sub-version are displayed.
The PLC card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN482 The SRAM/FROM card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN531 The axis extension card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN251 The front IC card/USB l/F card name and sub-version are
PLC
MEM
EXT
IC USB
ETHER
RIO
RIO 1
displayed. _
Only the item is displayed when there is an Ethernet option.
RIO 4
RIO 5
RIO 2
RIO 3
RIO 6
RIO 7
RIO 8
1
2
HN203
3
4
5
6
HN203
The IC card name used each part system or channel is

displayed.
139
Appendix
3-1 -4
SERVO MONITOR Screen

The servo monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the servo is
displayed on each screen.
SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 1/2

SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 2/2
ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen (Absolute value monitor)
SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen (Servo diagnosis)
SERVO STATUS screen (Servo status)
The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.
SERVO MONITOR screen 1/2
I NEXT key
T BACK key
SERVO MONITOR screen 2/2
l NEXT key
BACK key
ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen
i NEXT key
BACK key
SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen
I NEXT key
BACK key
SERVO STATUS screen

Note:
140
The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing the key lock.
Appendix
(1) SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor)

The servo status is displayed on this screen.
fir
frriow
WBi* wasurtii wtn*! n Soxsv ywtnsrm i vcmi mtMj B
SKJIVO wowrrcuu/?)
li]
<>
(1J
SPUKD
FTID XJVT (/ in)
(>UOOP
iX)
M/m)
CM*
|A|
1C)
*c
9
0
<
fnrjiRTHT
O)
*>
0
0
MAX CUM
WAX niR2
D
0
0
<AI
0
0
o
0
0
9
9
0
0
0
9
D
-0
0
0
*0
MAX Olh3
0VTR LOW
OYilH bC
OPT.
WAX
i *)
rover.
<*>
nst.pc*ct: (*>
JWRTtA WLTIO {V)

ATUT
ATJ.I <WU*
<BJ>)
(dB)
AMP PIVP
M-lUKW
09
00 00 09
09
00
0o
00 00 00 DO
00 .00 <H> 00
00 00 00 00
90
.00 00 00 00
o
e
1/ *0
Display item
No.
1
GAIN
>1
Details
(1/sec)
[1/SEC]
Gain
The status of the position loop gain is displayed. Position

loop gain refers to the following:
DROOP
(i)
Droop
[Command unit]
SPEED
(1 /min)
Speed
[1/min]
Feedrate (mm/sec,)
Tracking delay error (mm))
The error of the actual machine position to the
commanded position is called droop.
This is the actual motor speed.
FEED RATE
(mm/s)
Feed rate
[mm/s]
The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx)
CURRENT
(%)
Load current
[%]
MAX CUR1
(%)
Max. current 1
(%]
MAX CUR2
(%)
Max. current 2
[%]
MAX CUR3
(%)
Max. current 3
[%]
OVER LOAD
(%! Overload
10
OVER REG
(%)
Regenerative load
[%]
11
DST FORCE
(%)
Estimated
disturbance torque
[%}
1%1
__
The motor current is displayed with a continuous current

conversion during stalling.
The current FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
every second.
The currenl FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after the
power is turned ON is displayed.
The FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous
current during stalling is displayed.
An absolute value of the current FB peak value sampled
in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
This data is used for monitoring the motor overload.
This dala is used for monitoring the resistance load state
when the power supply for resistor regeneration is
connected.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated
torque when the disturbance observer is valid is
displayed.
12
MAX DST FORCE
<%)
MAX estimated
disturbance torque
[%]
13
INERTIA RATIO
(%)
Load inertia ratio
[%]
14
AFLT FREQ
(Hz)
AFLT frequency
[Hz]
15
16
AFLT GAIN
AMP DISP
(dB)
AFLT gain
Amplifier display
IdB]
17
ALARM
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated

torque when the collision detection function is adjusted is
displayed.
An absolute value of the estimated disturbance torque
peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is
displayed.
Alarm
The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision

detection function is adjusted is displayed.
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
displayed.
The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is displayed.
The driver's 7-segment LED display is shown.
Alarms and warnings other than the amplifier display are
displayed.
__
___
_
___
__
_
141
Appendix
SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor) 2/2
(2)
The servo status is displayed on this screen.
W*s;ta }
uioctu >us {' Bnioi sxrvt BiaKTOa
yamm >! taa&ta*
*n*rTa|
fERYO H0*JTGR<2/J?)
irTnr cwr
CRIP MATT
<**)
I.
*.
twin
<**)
o.
c,
*XC JOK
*P)
()
ro
<)
n>A]a
WfltJK RO?
l)
|mj
<5.
o.
o<
o,
31.*-
fWMKL IT
!>
0,
pod
acv*
*.]
(1)
U>
CWD2
IA)
P.
0.
J?
21*.
0,
J:
0.
0.
0.
0.
0,.
.
0.
0.
l<-'1
0.
'*10*
s>.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
o.
0.
6.
>.
.0,
cw>ooo<<>ooo<>olJ OOWWOOOOOWWll OCWTOOOOOPGOOOll 000000090000001 J. <XKXOOOOWOOI
OOOO11OS>OOO<K><X> ooooUoooooooooo OoeolJOOOOOOOCOO OOOOlJuOOOOOOOQO oo&ollbcoooooooo
cxX>o Jr->o<x>c> 1 r*x> oooolooooocaJtJofi o<XH>Jo<>ooo<JolOpo oot>oiooooooo3 ooo oi!o*><*HW>3<>c>o
PS tr.BO*
ftn*. CW?
CHOI
1=1
|vj
CWD>*
POOOW9PIMW9IV cJCBJOOOOOOOOPOaOCa <JOOOOO*>0<HX>OCX>0 PC
oaii
al
OOOOOOOOOtXXSOolO
OOOOOOOOOOOCKXXXX OOOOOOOXVXXKKXtO
ooooooooooootjolo OUOOOOpOAO&OO&lx)
POOOQOOOPPPPPPOO
001X)pQ<X0000(X> OOOOOOQOOOOpQpOti
PT*2
trt S3
=73*
CXXXXHKXXXXXKXIO OOCQOOWOOOOOOOO OOOOOCKKKXIOPPOOO
OOOPOpboOOPOOCWJ
D00000cx>0000oc>00 OOOOPoOOOOOPOOOO OOOOOOOOOoCOOOOO
oooooooooooouooa oooooooooooooooo
oe
ST5S
TfS*
C<S3<>OOCOOOCC><>CK)0
ico owioooowwwo
OOOOOOOOOOOCOOOP OCKJOpOPOOOOPPOOP
rximMVKXVXxjobo1a (Xoooooooooocwlo
#**>KjOWOWOW
(WWOOWOOOOCWOO
i)oo<jcx>ck><w3ot3o iwwcoooooooopofi ppp*H?oc>PP=<><*a*{><> o**>o<H3>c<>oooo<x OO<>OO<X>O<)0CK>O<><J

OOOCPOMWXWOOO OOOCWO<>OPOO<><K>9> o,*>4>CH?W>pOO(>*;wo u-WOWWWIHW POOOCkOPOOCOOPOOO
DV>>C<><>X>OC>0<>00 OOOOOOOOOOOOIXKXJ OOOCOOOOUOOOOOrtO OOOOOOiVJOOtKWOOO oooooooooooooooo
*/>* II
No.
1
CYC CNT
Details
(P)
Cycle counter
[pulse]
GRID SPACE
(mm)
Grid spacing
[mm]
GRID
(mm)
Grid distance
[mm]
MAC POS
(mm)
Machine position
[mm]
5
6
MOTOR POS
SCA FB
(mm)
(mm)
Motor end FB
[mm]
[mm]
REMAIN
(mm)
WORK POS
(mm)
Machine end FB
Remain
command
Current position
J2L
Manual interrupt
The current position is displayed.
|mm]
The amount of manual interrupt is displayed.
10
FB ERROR
(i)
FB error
[Command unit]
11
DFB COMP
(0
DFB error
[Command unit]
12
13
14
15
16
17
10
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
CMP4
CMP5
STS1
STS2
STS3
STS4
STS5
20
21
[mm]
(mm)
Control input 1
Control input 2
Control input 3
Control input 4
Control inp ut 5
Control output 1
Control output 2
Control output 3
Control output 4
Control output 5
_
_
The remain command value is displayed.
MANUAL IT
amount
The position per rotation of the encoder delector is

displayed.
The grid point's value is used as the 0 position and the
position per rotation is displayed in the range of 0 to RNG
(movement unit) multiplied by 1000.
The grid spacing for reference point return is displayed.
The unit is [deg] when using a rotary axis.
The distance from the dog off to grid point when dog-type
reference point return has been carried out is displayed.
The grid mask distance is not included.
This is the position on the NCs basic machine coordinate
system.
The feedback position of the speed detector is displayed.
l The feedback position of the position detector is displayed.
[mm]
19
142
Display item
the error
of between the motor end FB and machine end

FB is displayed.
The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
is displayed.
Appendix
(3)
ABSOLUTE MONITOR Screen (Absolute value monitor)
The servos absolute position is displayed on this screen.
i
vtasini i tnatmn n* ! DTTTW
aw> wann* Isnjnt* t*rrsi [ Konax
w*m|
PXacOLtrtt MPMITPU
A65
voa
KM:
W)B
row
no
W1
Vt. J
3z\
[A1
(**>
o.
#.
o.
0.
0.
ft.
ft.
0.
<)
ft,
0.
ft.
sta
t*t>r
M>8
ICJ
t.
o.
ft,

ft
to
1)
ft
ft
CP)
fin
Fn
Ko
ABSft
(P>
<p)
0
ft
ft
0
ft
ft
ft


ft
ft
p
0
0
ft
EO
si
0
ABSn

M5*Q
<*>
0
0
D
ft
p
ft

ft
ft
ft
O
ft
ft
ft
ft
V 7*
No.
Display item
Details
ABS SYS
POP POS
PON POS
2
3
*5 \
Detection system
(mm)
The state of the absolute position detection system on the

servo side is displayed.
ES : Semi-closed encoder
EC : Ball screw end encoder
LS : Linear scale
MP : MP scale
Power OFF position

Power ON position
[mm]
[mm]
Current position
[mm]
(mm)
ESS : Semi-closed high-speed serial encoder

ECS : Ball screw end high-speed serial encoder
INC : Incremental
The absolute position at NC power OFF is displayed.
The absolute position at NC power ON is displayed.
This is created from the absolute position when the NC
power is turned ON.
The coordinate value at the NC basic machine coordinate
__
MAC POS
RO
6
8
PO
EO
Rn
Cumulative number of
rotation
The cumulative number of the motor rotation is displayed.
Pn
Phase
ABS0
Basic point
ABSn
Current position
The position in one rotation is displayed.

Each rotation is divided by 4096, The range is 0 to 4095.
The absolute position basic point is displayed.
This is the FB position memorized during basic point
setting.
The current absolute position is displayed.
MPOS
Scale offset
The initial offset distance for the MP scale is displayed.
10
11
12
(mm)
system is displayed.
143
Appendix
(4)
SERVO DIAGNOSIS Screen (Servo diagnosis)

The servo mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
r vri
rrm-
ratior. Hiooiii t*m }
arum
OTTO
anw|irn* mntn!SJ*SB HSIIW }
IYJ
rxi
tin IT r*
IS!
[A1
1C)
OMIT Ho.
S/W
VTIVSICHI
comrnoi.
KMCrTYV*
r.wc. oinjtAj, m>.
eCiWLE TYTU
SCA1X 8ZK1KL
MOTOR
WOtOC 7 D
AJ*f JJf3* I
Ho;
w)
100)
100}
100)
IPO I
100)
100)
100)
0
0
0
HAurrE nisi
HAwrrins
JO-OJ
100)
100]
o
n
o
100)
10QJ
fOP)
o
0
)O0)
oo oo oo
oa oo oo oo
p.
|O01
00 00 00
Ov
00
00
oo
00
Co 00
00
!0OI
JOOI
100)
1001
1001
(0C)
100)
JO0)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00 CO 0D 00
00 00 00 00
oo
0
0
|00)
|OOJ
IOC)
1001
rooj
100]
IO0)
|00|
I00J
)0OJ
0
0
0
100]
IPOJ
OO OO CO 00
00 00 00 OO
oo
100)
fOO)
rp)
9
9
I0)
00 00 OO
00 00 00 <70
(70
00
13/ 7
No.
1
2
3
4
Amplifier type
Amplifier serial No.
Software version
Control method
ENC TYPE
ENC SERIAL No.
MC DT
SCALE SERIAL No.
10
11
12
MOTOR
WORK TIME
ALM HIST 1 to 8
MAINTE HIST
Alarm history
Maintenance record
13
MAINTE STS
Maintenance status
144
Display item
UNIT TYPE
UNIT No.
S/W VERSION.
CONTROL
__
Motor end detector

Motor end detector
serial No.
Machine end
detector
Machine end
detector serial No.
Motor
Work time
Details
This is the servo amplifier type.
This is the servo amplifier serial No.
This is the servo amplifier software version.
: Semi-closed loop
SEM1
CLOSED : Closed loop
: Dual feedback
DUAL
This is the motor end detector name
This is the motor end detector serial No.
This is the machine end detector type.
Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
This is the machine end detector serial No.
Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
This is the motor type.
T he cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
The Nos. of the past servo alarms are displayed.
The amplifiers maintenance history or NVRAM (special memory in
servo) status is displayed.
Appendix
(5) SERVO STATUS (Servo status)
The servo statuses are displayed on this screen.
He WnSw
|OJHQCSIS WBUW ; emm &>no HWJUW

SERVO STATUS
1X1
wm* j IWRWWK
enures J
too, OOJ
|0o,ooj
[00,CO|
2
3
[00,00)
0
0
[00,001
[00,001
[OO, 00|
[00,001
[00,001
[00,00)
[00,001
J00,00)
|00,00)
100,00)
[00,00)
100,00)
[00,00)
100,00)
100,00)
[00,00)
[00,00)
100,00}
J0o, oq)
0
0
0
100, 0}
JOO,O0)
10
[00,00)
too, 00)
100,00)
11
IP.
[00,00|
[00,00)
0
0
100,00)
[00, 00)
0
0
0
[00,001
[00,001
7
0
3
ICJ
IA1
ALARM COO XT 1
100,001
coo, 00)
100,00)
100,00}
100,00}
0
0
100,00)
0
0
100,00)
100,00)
|00 j 00)
100,00)
o
c
100,00)
J00,00)
100,00}
100,00)
CoO,Oo)
100,00)
[00,00|
[00,003
0
0
0
100,00)
)00, 00}
0
0
0
0
[00,00)
100,00)
0
0
0
IDO ,00 J
100, OOJ
100,00)
100, 00 J
0000
0
0 l
y
OOOO
0000
0000
oopo
oopo
0000
ODDO
17/ 20
No.
1
Display item
ALARM COUNT
DA output L
l
I
Details
Alarm No.
Count
2
si
0000
DA ADDRESS 1
DA OUTPUT 1
A ADPMS99 2
DA OUTPUT 2
0000
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
The servo alarm No.

The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after servo
amplifier power ON.
Servo parameter svQ61 setting value (address)
Servo parameter svQ61 setting address data
Servo parameter sv063 setting value (address)
Servo parameter sv063 setting address data
145
Appendix
3-1-5
SPINDLE MONITOR Screen

The spindle monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the spindle is
displayed on each screen.
SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 1/2
SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 2/2
SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen (Spindle diagnosis)
PS DIAGNOSIS screen (Power supply diagnosis)
SPINDLE STATUS screen (Spindle status)

The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.
SPINDLE MONITOR screen 1/2
I NEXT key T BACK key

SPINDLE MONITOR screen 2/2
I NEXT key t BACK key
SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen
1 NEXT key t BACK key

PS DIAGNOSIS screen
I NEXT key t BACK key

SPINDLE STATUS screen
Note:
146
The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing the key lock.
Appendix
(1)
SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)
The spindle status is displayed on this screen.

fm
ViV
vaana ; IUOQD i
tn; inis ; IOW KMJT SJ
SPIXDU2 MOtUTOK . U/2>.

CAIB
&nv>O0
fipcna
(.1/300)
U)
(ill- 1)
<0
c*>
CO
0
0
9
0
&
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
t>
0
0
tft>
00
MAX CUR1
10
11
MAX CUR2
MAX CUR3
00
00
00
00 00 t>-0 00
00
00 00 00 00
co no oo
00 OR 00 00
00 00
[1/msec]
(i)
Droop
[Command
unit]
(1/min)
(mm/min)
(%)
Speed
Feed rate
Load
[1/min]
[mm/s]
[%]
MAX current 1
[%]
MAX current 2
[%]
MAX current 3
l%]
Overload
(%]
Regenerative
load
[%]
Estimated
disturbance
torque
[%]
MAX
estimated
disturbance
torque
[%]
(%)
(%)
(%)
OVER LOAD
{%)
OVER REG
{%)
DST. FORCE
(%)
MAX DST FORCE
(%)
INER1IA RATIO
14
AFLT FREQ
(Hz)
15
AFLT GAIN
(db)
16
TEMPERATURE
(X)
(%)
Load
ratio
AFLT
inertia
frequency
AMP DISP
ALARM
0
9
Gain
(1/msec)
13
17
18
00
__
12
Display item
LOAD
6
o
D1SP
o
0
r*%e>EtuiTtni
SPEED
FEED RATE
0
0
DROOP
fSD 1*01*5 J
0
tv
0
IBPinotro
*)
GAIN
iatt)
rPLQ.
<*>
<*>
ATLT CL 3*
ATX.T
0
0
MM Dttr.x>ci; ( *>
OffiXTM RATIO (V)
rtr.D
nrrr roues
&
LOUD
MM nm i
MIU ctmi
MM CUBS
(rtm tixxt>
OVXR REK
No.
1
151MWDU!?)
IHKIKDIJCI |
t>
0
(%J
[Hz]
AFLT gain
[dB]
Spindle motor
[C]
temperature
Amplifier display
Alarm
Oo 00
Details
The spindle position loop gain (1/s) is displayed. The
value is not set when in control modes other than
position loop control.
The feedback tracking delay to Ihe commanded
position is displayed.
This is valid only during position loop control as with
item 1.
This is the actual motor speed.
The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx)
The motor load is displayed with a continuous current
conversion during stalling.
The current FB percentage in respect to the current
limit is displayed.
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
every second.
The current FB percentage in respect to the current
limit is displayed.
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after
the power is turned ON is displayed.
The FB value of the motor current in terms of
continuous current during stalling is displayed.
An absolute value of the current FB peak value
sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
This data is used for monitoring the motor overload.
This data is used for monitoring the resistance load
slate when the power supply for resistor regeneration
is connected.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
rated lorque when the disturbance observer is valid is
displayed.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
rated torque when the collision detection function is
adjusted is displayed. An absolute value of the
estimated disturbance torque peak value sampled in
most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision
detection function is adjusted is displayed.
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
displayed.
The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is
__
____
___
_
_
displayed.
The spindle motor temperatureis displayed.

The driver's 7 -segment LED display is shown
This item is displayed when alarms and warnings other
than the amplifier display is occurring simultaneously.
147
Appendix
(2)
SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)
The spindle status is displayed.
r*m
Wfrij~
St$
IKKU*; >IK*TVIS
mini] arm*- VKD
warm* PT*U ***!*
jjanwrax Banna;
SfJHtU.1 MOM ITOH <2/7)

jspiKDtca j
eve cur
<>
CRIO SPACE
GRID
KXC VOJf
MOTOR P03
SCA TV
KEMAXH
WORK 1*08.
MANUAL IT
ns riwou
W.'C COMJ*
OO.
In)
0.
(M)
<*-)
0.
o.
fwO
p.
<wo
o.
e.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0-
0,
o.
o
0.
0.
0.
0.
o.
0,
0.
0.
0.
.
9.
0.
0.
o.
<4)
0O0OOO0WX3OO000O ooi>w>oooooooooo
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
oooloooooooooooT *
Stal
O-
0.
oooooooooooooooo
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
0. OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
STS5
STBS
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Display item
CYC CNT
GRID SPACE
GRID
OOOCOOOOOOOOOOOQ
STS2
ST S3
ST 5 4
Cycle counter
[Pulse]
(mm)
Grid space
[mm]
(mm)
Grid
[mm]
(P)
MAC POS
(mm)
Machine position
[mm]
5
6
MOTOR POS
(mm)
.mm]
WORK POS
Motor end FB
Remain command
Current posirion
REMAIN
121
Manual interrupl
amount
Machine end FB
MANUAL IT
SCAFB
10
FB ERROR
(i)
FB error
11
DFB COMP
(i)
DFB error
12
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
CMP4
CMP5
STS1
STS2
STS3
STS4
STS5
21
0.
|w)
CHM
20
0.
0.
o,
0.
9.
o$
19
12SPJ#D.E5J
0.
CHD4
15
16
17
18
o
9.
9.
0.
CMD3
No.
ispixomi
0,
o.
:>ct)i
13
14
(*)
DJD2
148
(M>
tKt>XMDlX3)
l:p*MDur2j
(mm)
Control input 1
Control input 2
Control input 3
Control input 4
Control input 5
Control output 1
Control output 2
Control output 3
Control output 4
Control output 5
cocoooooooooocoo
Details
This displays the position within one rotation of the encoder
detector. The position is displayed within one rotation in the
range of "0" to "RNG (movement units) * 1000" using the
grid point value as "0"
The grid space for the reference position return is
_
_
displayed.
When rotary axis, the unit is [degj.
This displays the distance from the dog-off point to the grid
point when the dog-type reference position return is
displayed. The grid mask amount is not included
The NC basic machine coordinate system position is
displayed.
The feedback value of the speed detector is displayed.
__
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Command
unit]
[Command
unit]
_
_
The feedback value of the position detector is displayed.

The error of between the motor end FB and machine end
FB is displayed.
The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
is displayed.
Appendix
(3) SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS Screen (Spindle diagnosis)

The spindle mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
i4e xwbM t-kfe
VZKCTOB } (MK MGWrnat 0 mad RW3 *CHai
tfvxwMje
I
!
WT ! KWCO* WJflTOB t
:
MACHOS*
ISP lJ*P*-*4)
[SpjMZ7|>]
imrr TYEE
UK IT Bo.
8/W YFRSJO*
C6BTK03U
KKC.TYPE
EBC.6ER3WL Mo.
|81TB ENC. IYTE
SUB EMC.8Ea.Mo.
tOTOft
*010t TXX*
ALM HIST 1
r*
3
4
5
6
7
0
MAXHTF BJST
WAXBJfc ft a
I
0
100]
[001
[00]
100]
100)
|00)
100]
100)
100)
100)
[00]
0
0
[00]
too)
ioo)
00 00 00
00 00 00
0
0
9
0
1001
oo
[00]
oo
00 00 OO
00
00
oo
06
00 00
00
100)
0
0
IOO)
tool
0
0
0
0
0
0
00 00
[001
[00J
[001
[00)
[00J
[001
[001
[oOl
0
0
100)
0
0
0
00 00 OO 00
00 00 oo CO
CO
[00 J
[00)
too)
tooj
00 00
00
oo oo
00
[00]
100]
100)
too)
100)
[00]
100]
[00]
Si
0
M
0 S
00 CO 00 DOrt
00 00 00
00
o|
oo .
oo I
No.
Display item
Details
Amplifier type
This is the spindle amplifier type.
UNIT TYPE
UNIT No.
S/W VERSION.

Software version
CONTROL
Control method
Motor end detector
Motor end detector serial
No.
This is the serial No. of the spindle amplifier.

This is the version of the spindle side software.
SEM1
: Semi-closed loop
CLOSED : Closed loop
: Dual feedback
DUAL
This is the motor end detector name.
ENC. TYPE
ENC SERIAL No.
SUB ENC TYPE
Machine end detector
SUB ENC SER No.
MOTOR
WORK TIME
ALM HIST1 to 8
MAINTE HIST
MAINTE STS
Machine end
detector
serial No.
Spindle motor
Work time
Alarm history
Maintenance record
Status
10
11
12
13
This is the motor end detector serial No.

This is the machine end detector type.
Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
This is the machine end detector serial No.
Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
This is the spindle motor type.
The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.

The Nos. of the past spindle alarms are displayed.
The maintenance history is displayed.
The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.
149
Appendix
(4)
PS DIAGNOSIS Screen (Power supply diagnosis)

The power supply mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
He "Mnicrm
vrasiat j Dra*sis HOTT j onwi
[xwxwx w*orn|
j sjrjjvo mrrtw
*> &X*CHOI;S
<1S>
<17>
-uav
<19?
<?o>
1131X1 TYPE
uxrr no.
s/w
YEBaiox
COM AxX$
<V>
MAX TOLT X
HIM VOLT Z
<v)
WAX VOLT 2
(X)
HIM VOLT 1
100)
[001
0
0
tooj
1001
[001
1001
oo
00 <J0
0
o
fool
00 00 OQ 0
urn
00
HAXXrrg *1rs
150
1001
No.
o
9
WOttX 1JH8
AIM JBiKX 1
:HAn*TE
!:
Display item
UNIT TYPE
Amplifier type
Details
This is the power supply unit type.
UNIT No.
SA/V VERSION

Software version
This is the serial No. of the power supply unit.

This is the version of the power supply side software.
CON AXIS
Connected drive
MIN VOLT 1
MIN voltage 1
The driver connected power supply unit is displayed.

This displays the minimum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.
MAX VOLT1
MAX voltage 1
MIN VOLT2
MIN voltage 2
MAX VOLT2
MAX voltage 2
WORK TIME
Work time
10
ALM HIST1 to 8
Alarm history
11
MAINTE HIST
Maintenance
12
MAINTE STS
Maintenance
history _
status
J absolute value)
___
_
This displays the maximum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.
(absolute value)
The minimum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
(absolute value)
The maximum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is
displayed, (absolute value)
The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
The history of the servo alarm No. and time generated in the past
are displayed.
__
The maintenance history is displayed.

The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.
Appendix
(5)
SPINDLE STATUS (Spindle status)

The spindle status is displayed.
r*
tmfc
OT3U*fMJ6*nis monJttrrw| tawti Hn*
ww
|HWM
K*JTO )
SPIUDUE STATUS
r->
KLH&4 COBHT
100,00)
i
3
|C6, 00J
100,00 J
100.001
too, DO)
100,00)
'1
too, 00}
JOO.OOJ
[00,00}
[60,00}
(00,00)
100,00]
1.00,00).
(60,001
{00.001
1 OD , 0 1
too, 00)
160.001
0
0
100,00)
100,00)
100,001
too,*)
0
0
100,60)
loo, O)
0
0
100,60)
loo,oii
100,001
[00,00)
JOO.OOJ
0
6
{06.06)
too, o)
100,001
[00, 0|
[00,00)
100.001
100.MJ
106,00]
a
o
100, OOJ
loo, 00)
100,00}
J06.06)
100,06)
100,001
|00,00)
[00.001
(60,00)
<00,00)
too, OO)
(06, OP)
loo, 00)
|Oo,0D)
0
0
100.00)
12
ICP.OOl
0000
0
DA AOGSKSip *
DA Otm>DT ?.
0006
o
6000
DA output L
106,80)
0
0
[SP*XD1JIS)
0
0
100,001
[60,00)
100,00)
OK WMWEB8 1
DA DOT6 UT X
Display item
ALARM COUNT
ISFIMOU]
Alarm No.
Count
2
fsiMjHnii:?)
}0
No.
JlH>DtDT4:lJ
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
0006
[00,60)
0)
joo.oo)
l.
0
000.0
006
0000
0
<060
0600
oooo
Details
The servo alarm No.
The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after
servo amplifier power ON.
setting value (address)
Spindle parameter
setting address data
Spindle parameter
setting value (address)
Spindle parameter
setting address data
Spindle parameter
151
152
153
154
y >.
r-*
|r? PPSPIAVW
'A:
Fit vV3or* HfP
[TKRCe
[El A MONITOR
:
[MACH III BIG
MONITORING
A|DRXLL MONITOR
[SPINDLE %0A> GRAPH XC
;\ilKAVIGATIOH T RESULT .
[AUTO MEASURE
.
]
]
]
)
]
]
*:
{TOOL
PROGRAM
[PROGRAM FIXE
}
[TOOL PATH CHECK
J
[SHAPE CHECK
* 1
[PROCESS CONTROL
J
[PROGRAM XAYOUT
[H A V IG AT ION
PREDICT ION J
DATA
[TOOL OFFSET
[TOOL FILE
[TOOL LAYOUT
]
:
WORK: OFFSET
DATA I/O
[DATA I/O PARAMETER
USER PARAMETER
I ADDITIONAL WPC
[MACRO VARIABLE
[MKASXIPF
[STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH
[MACHINE PARAMETER
[PLC PARAMETER
1
3
3
CUTTING CONDITION
[ CUTTING OoNDXXIOH LEARN
:5
f.
ru\;~oH
...
i
n>
i>IAGHOSIS (USER)
3
[DIAOWOSIS (MAKER)
[MAINTENANCE CHECK
[RUNNING CONTROL
(GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE
3
)
I)
15 Gain1
NAM
Omm/min
<CUR SORXINP UI> ?
] i
T~
MAP
j
Operation Procedure : Display selector key
> DISPLAY MAP
155
YVYWkYVWV.WW
XX
0.
P.
Cl
0,
0
O-
xz
NEXT CtttAXHKD XOW
0.
Z2
0-
C2
0.
0.
G
H
0,
0,
f$
I
Il
zi
0.
0.
0.
0.
0
C2
->->
)
0)
0)
DS (
II# {
6 i>
G50.2 G113
0 MIN-1
0 M/MXN
0 MIN'1
0
0.
Y
Z
0.
0.
SPDII
(0)
M/MIN
0 MIN1
SPDI2
K/v
i
l|
5PDL Zj
XI-AX|
Y-AX |
T.
MM/MIN
13
Cl
0.
0.
0.
0.
C2
0,
j LOW
0.
0
MM/MIH
Cl -AX|
X2-AX
Z2-AX
MM/REV
C2-AX
*
"
Zl-Rxj
B-RX
/ln
/a in
/in
W-AX
C_J:*
5o%
1 s i fl>
W\A
.TPs -
o;.
Oiran/nin
:t
i
o I
o
0
B
:
o
0
mmmmm
I:
!
V?0KK
H . SPDL
M. SPDL
LOCK
LIGNT
JOG
REV
/.V.W/W.VA
156
200
MACHINE
L
'.VAVA'WM'.
%
\
M. SPDL
M/MIM
m
i
X
:!?
T. SPDL
Crain -
100
FEED
<
I.
i
\
G 40
G 64
:\
!
) !;
(CIR-DR
LOW TNo.
T -OFFSET
98 G 21
G53.5
0X23 G
G13.1
G
<0)
MflGAZNPKNo.
)
23
C 69.50 97
(0)
WRIT :
0.
0.
G
G
M. SPDIi
i
0
Tito.
0)
0.
! T
0.
>
0.
TNO.
(
0.
C2
0(
0 F
G 1 G 17
G 80
G
G 68 G 67
G123 1G111
0.
0.
in
O.
0.
<W0DAt>
z
c
I
I
TRS-CNK
COUNTER
0.
0,
XX
ci
X.2
Z2
0.
0.
0-
OFFSET
0,
Ei
UNO.
REMAIN
MACHINE
0.
xi
ci
X2
t
!!
Zl
M
T
*
>
WHO-
CX
X2
Z2
C2
0,
0.
NEXT COMMAND
0.
0.
0.
0.
XX
urn*
Ccu./
&rfssft Vv>V >'.< H'->&

BUFFER
POSITION
I
5
1I
\YY*Y.\\YYVA\
(Y'VAYSYI'IY
&%>
>
A\YA'AY\\\W.Vi\NNW.Wk\\\V\\%
.WVYWAY
1I
> POSITION
IPS
.YMWNWAVn:
dfc
aaas
A~faitViWrry
( VERSIGMj DiaCSDSIS JSKITt I OPriflH \ SERVO
pxm
?
<.
I
i
ITEM
SRV--X
9RV-V
VERSION
MAIM -A
MAXH-S
1001WOOO-A*WQ
lQQIMOOl-AO
iooim>n~Axwo
XG-ENG
XADDER-F 1001W568-A0016
SRV-Z
SRVH
LADDER- B
LCP
SRV-A
SRV-6
SRV-7
SRV-8
SRV-3
SRV-XO
SRV-11
SRV-12
sRv-13 ; .
S.RV-X9
SRV-15
SRV~16
SPH-1
SRN-2
SRH-3
SP1I-4
t-
*
f
1
.
I 5PDE<LE
SERIAL
yyyyyyyyyyyyy
ITEM
W3HITflR
iM7W HJ3*mS; IfDMTTfiR
>
yyyyyyyyyyyyyy
wox>eL ymryyy>ryyyyyy
MACH THE
MOTOR
VERSION
;:
<
<(
(
(
(
(
(
<
<
(
(
<
vvM( /:
> ::
:;>; < V ''
V <
) (
> <
> <
> <
> (<
>
) (
) <
> <
) <
> (
) <
> <
>) <
)
>
>
(
(
<
<
<
(
>
>
>
(
(
(
I
:
ITEM
J2CT-X
>
)
)
)
)
>
>
)
)
>
Q%
OlAOHOS
c
VCRSlOM
ISOmln'1
OX AO NOS
J2CT-2
J2CT-3
I2CT-4
J2CT-5
J2CT-6
J2CT-7
J2CT-8
J2CT-9
J2CT-10
J2CT-11
J2CT-12
J2CT-13
J2CT-14
>
>)
>
)
>
>
*
i
i
IPS 0
KrC
VERSION
"
SPH-5
3PM- 6
SPH-7
SPH~8
WvA
2005/10/31
11:16:03
Own/sln
OPTION
SERVO
MOHXXOR
MONITOR
SRIMDIE
MONITOR
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
>
fty.WAV/AWV
Operation procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

.
VERSION -> VERSION
i
iI
>
157
fi* Wn,tx Htb
1
2
3
4
5
6
t i- T
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
11
18
1
-
29 GANTRY ROBOT CONTROL

30 FLASH TOOL
HIGH SMOOTHING CONTROL
31
ROTATION
GEOMETRIC
SCALING
EXT-DATA I/O
MA2ATROL 3D
POLYGON MACHINING
HOB MACHINING
5 -PLANE
HIOH SPEED
SHAPE COMP.
THREAD !
SOB C-AXTK CONTROL
INVERSE TIME
DYNAMIC COMP.
33 COO SLOPE CONST.
34 SCALE FEED BACK

35 SOB SP 1/1000 DEG POST.
36 VARIABLE 600 SETS
31 SCALE F/B (A)
DLACHOS
:
I
1
'
38 CYLINDER
39 SYNC. MAIN SP. TAPPING
40 SIMULTANEOUS 5 AXIS
41
42
43
44
B AXIS CONTROL
IC CARD HUMMING
'
45 PROTCOL B
46 SHAPING
41 2ND AOX. FUNCTIONS
48 NURBS IMTERPORATTOH
49 TH.TED WORKING PLANE
R0T-
50
51
S2
53
54
LOWER TURRET MA7.ATROL
60 MILL TURNING MAZATROL

61 HIGH SPEED SYNC. TAPPING
62
63
64
65
66
61
68
69
70
:.
ETA ULRICA!, TAP CYCLE

EIA PATTERN CYCLE
SP/ROT. PARA. ADJUST

TABLE UNBALANCE DETECT
5-AXIS TOOL COMP.
AUTO PECKING
ETHERNET RUNNING
55 TOOL CENTER POIHT CONTROL
56 THREAD START POINT COMP.
-r*v
o*
59
32 ROT- AXIS SHAPE COMP.
70
21 POLAR COORDINATES INPUT
22 COMPARISON STOP
23 HV CHTR.
: 24 SYNC. CCHT .
25 EIA CONVERSION
26 SPLINE
21 G54.1
78 SYNC. MILL TAPPING
KAy
51 RE-THREAD
58 PROGRAM MEMORY EXPANSION
INCH AM COM VEST
SPIRAL
EIA 3D COMP.
1i
jOFIXIMij SEHITO KDHTTtffi I KPJJfiOi BEMITOR [ H3HDVJCE lStNITCK|
ETA
-,To
W3OTM I DljtfKOSIS JfflWITCR
iMlM <\
12
73
74
75
76
77
78
15*
80
81
VERSION
150mins
OIAGHOS
MONITOR
vW*
OPTION
\
1
:
l
t
::
82
83
Qd
0 : 20 05/10/31 ; IX: 13:*3
?'
lb
OPUB/BIU
SERVO
MONITOR
SPINDLE
MONITOR
HARDWARE
MONITOR
LADDER
MONITOR
Operation Procedure. : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION -> OPTION
158
mm
:v r o'- 77"r OTIT,.;. To
,VV
E-TO
!?
'.-?'
>V!j{>fU
j"?*
VERSItM DUU2H0SIS HDNITtJR OJTTCH SOIVO WCMITttR
[sPQHKJB WfflttTJK j HSRDVSiJE
SERVO MONITOR (1/2)
1X1J
i
(1)
DROOP
(i_n-l)
SPEED
FEED RATE (wm/win)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(%)
<%)
(h)
<*)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C-DKRENT
MAX ClfRl
:: MAX CUR2
MAX CUR3
OVER LOAD
<**>
DST . FORCE
<*)
MAX DEFORCE <*)
INERTIA RATIO ih)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<
0
0
0!J
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(Hz)
(<*B)
KFVt CAXH
ALARM
AFLT FREQ,
00
00
00
00
00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
OO 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
AMP DISP
0
0
0
0
<*0
OVER REG
icx)
JB)
(Z1J
(J/soc)
CAIN
t:
MUnTtHt
!
I
J
i
rrnsrg
mmm
1
:
A?Y.
1
50%
DXAGNOS
LSLLiD
Omin'1
VERSION
DTAGNOS
MONITOR
:\WOPTION
Own/win
SERVO
SPINDLE
MONITOR
MONITOR
HARDWARE
MONITOR
TPS 0 j 2005/11/04 110:12:04
t
I
LADDER
MONITOR
t
>
WWAVWA1
.v/w/.'.y.w.v.
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION -> SERVO MONITOR
r
159
{ife
y'VjjjTs
KVsp
VERSItBT DlftQfOJwIS
tSBCCTCK OfTItBf SERVO BUKITHR j SPIMDLE WDnTt | MfiKEWMZE MMTTCR
SERVO MONITOR<l/2)
tzi)
(XI)
(1/SOC)
U)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<*)
DSX.FCRC <*>
INERTIA RATIO <%)
0
0
0
0
0
0
CAIN
DROOP
SPEED
(min-l)
FEED RATE (JftM/jfcii) )
|CURRENT
MAX ami
MAX CUR2
MAX CUR3
OVER LOAD
OYER REG
DST- FORCE
<*>
<*>
<*)
<%)
<%)
<*>
\mx
IRFLT
FREQ.
RFLT CAIN
(Hz)
<<iN)
AMP DISP
ALARM
0
0
0
0
IBJ
CC1-J
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OO
00
00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0
0
0
00
00
oo oo oo oo
00 00 00 00
1/
16
-H
TPS 0: ! 200i/n/04 ,10:12:04
fW
50*5
DXAGN03
isW.
s
VERSION
Owin'1
OIAGNOS
MONITOR
VV\A
OPTION
0m/in
SERVO
MONITOR
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

VERSION
SPINDLE MONITOR
160
>
AWAV\YVVY
yiwiWM V,VA\
miitm
v 'it 11
\Y.\\>YASYiWiV/ V
WYNWAAWAVYi
mmmmMt
* it*
>
Wy*ivft
:K*'s
VERSION Diaorosis: WKITOR OFrrnH j SERVO MBflTCR SPIKDLE MJKITGS
KWDWSIHE
MfflmUR
I
I
:-
'
CHC
1 HM1(>3 A (1.03)
2 KK123 A
X
\
( Ptc )
( HEM
HW102 B
HN402 ft
:
I
EXT ]
i
f
!
|xq USB j
KH-531 A
HR 251 A (0.02)
<
(RIO 1)
(RIO 2]
X
2
3 KM 2 03
[RIO
31
(RIO 4)
(RIO 5]
(RIO 6]
(RIO
7J
(RIO 8]
1
i
HH203
:
f
I
>*'
!
!
msmr
f\A 50%
s
iili)
Omin *v
0jwn/in
! */.
Itl,,lw>.'i
TIPS 0
2005/11/04 ij 18 : I?: 46
' V
0I&CH08
5
VV.v. /.W.S'AV. /
VERSION
DIAL*OS
MONITOR
ORYXOH
WA..VW
SERVO
3 PIN OLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
I
?
AW

VERSION ~> HARDWARE MONITOR
>
161
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI CNC
PLC PROGRAMMING TOOLS
V
COPYRIGHT. O
20D4 Ml
ISUBISHI El ECTRIC CORPORATION
RIGHTS RFSFRVFn
i
f RE
eanm
me
162
iKf
DI/W80S.
Operation Procedure : Display selector key > DIAGNOS

VERSION -> LADDER MONITOR
! I!
>
<YYAWiYiYi
M\\\S\Yl\yAU
mtyrrrtiaaw
>
a? ft;
l fife
>
iLM3K
am
ttlftVittiWf
mm I
- -
iS
WVhfert
5LBJW
msrana|
f\jQ
sionc
ALARM MESSAGE
MO.
5
HEAD DATE
471 .TOC toon not $mm
TIME
TYPE
IX. IS 10:47 OP&RATB
I
I
I
I
f
i
?;j
l
l
I
I
47 x
mo mm
m
VERSION
HOT F01WB
ov
fvW* ioo%
ALARM
ALARM
HISTORY
PIJC
SIGNAL
wmmm
MAXWTtH
CHECK
ii
RUSHING
GRAPH Xc
DATA
ACCOM*!
CONTROL
MATNTEo
ERASE
T-THE
> DIAGPTOS
> ALARM
163
IWmmMm
Sotp Wrtfo*
file
;;
ii
I
[aLsrai HiJ.Ttiia J pi.c sum |
H.7BW
milM
Hjfc
Ho.
'
A.LIUUI MESSAGE
442 DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED

406 MEMORY PROTECT
442
442
442
442
406
DATA RENEWAL HOT SHOWED
DATA REHEKM, HOT ALLOWED

DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED
DATA RENEWAL MOT ALLOWED

MEMORY PROTECT
442 DATA RENEWAL tfOT ALLOWED
-100,
1, I00,
1, -100,
1, -100,
1, -100,
>
)
439 MS2ATROL PROGRAM CKSlGHATBO

439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED
)
)
l, -100,

406 MEMORY PROTECT
8LC
58 DORROTT RI.C
I -\&0.:CORROTX.S1C
1i
i
1
'
>
i
,
130 HO OPERATION MODE

468 MAINTENANCE CHECK WBRMIHO
642 DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED
'
4328,62700,
3)
.t.SC
4,
<
1 EMERGENCY STOP
10.31
9:43
OPERATE
OPERATE
10-31
9: 38
OPERATE
10.31
10.31
9:32
9:27
9:17
OPERATE
10.31
9:15
10-31
10.31
9:11
9: 8
9: 3
10.31
10.31
10.31
406 MEMORY PROTECT
OOSAOET
dPSW
'
10.31
TIME
10:22
9:54
10.31
. ..
(&OOOOFFTE/
0$ 2
TYPE
OPERATE
10.31
DATE
B;59
8:59
8 : S3
8:49
1
1
1
\
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
1I
OPERATE
fe
10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31
8:49
8:46
SYSTEM
8:45
8:45
MG
OPERATE
10,31
8:45
10.31
10.31
10.31
8:45
8:45
8:44
OPERATE
SYSTEM
10.31
a; 44
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
U-
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
j"" 1/
i
1 rv/\>
I
TpS O
g*5
VERSION
~~D
AIi ARM
7 50 min 1
VV'A
nij'KM
pix;
MA nn f.n
SIGNAL
CHECK
PU;
-M
10 : 23:37
wimum;
GRAPHIC
TEXTPILE
CONTROL
MSIHTS,
DISPLAY
Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS
164
OIUIL/JAIR
HISTORY
I 2005/10/31
"
> ALARM HISTORY
The Procedure Of Reset Alarm History And Extended Alarm History

1. Go to DIAGNOSIS screen and push DATA ERASE button.
X
ii+
Ui mVTmnr
Bn.
;Nr
ilfcHal,
AI.XKM KF..13WC
DATE
TIM
TWB
|
!
:
j
:
1
:
IM 0
TTB
;W 7*v>
VERSZOK
2(106/09/2* 22; 3?: 2#
vVVS 1 .
Or[i
Al.ARH
IK
wwm*
HISTORY
Sir.HAf
erase*
RDIDJTHC
OONTBCT,
cpj-.pmc
HAIKI
2. Move cursor to ALARM HISTORY

and push INPUT key.
DATA
3. Move cursor to COMPLETION

INPUT -9999 and push INPUT key.
J
CHUCK JAW
TOOL DATA
CtDW.
BRBSB
TOOL DATA
TOOL FILE
CHUCK JAW
TOOL FILE
TOOL OFFSET
TOOL OFFSET
CUTTING COND.
ALARM HISTORY
WORK OFFSET
SJ
CUTTING COND.
ALARM HISTORY
WORK OFFSET
MAINTENANCE
MACRO YAR.
MACRO VAR.
COMPLETION <-9999 1NPUT>
COMPLETION <-9999 INPUT>
START INIT .
START INIT-
4. Open Explorer and Delete C:MC_sdgAlarmAlarm.txt file.

.
File
8SS
WJ Back
A
View
Edit
V :-
Folders
+
+
Favorites
i:
S
-ft-
Search
Folders
)J\ ~
vi
C: i MC _sdg\ Alar m
X
__) MC_Gl Data
Name
mm
_=J
E xcbjdeAlarrri
I M-I.Machine Oatabas
_j MC.Machine Program
88
Help
Tools
Sire
Type
89 KB Text Document
1 KB Text Document
| MC.sdg
___
A Alarm
I CiistOfnMenij
I cutest
) '. u* morn
_I
ojties
_l
dbl
_) tug
I Tocillnf or matron
>
<
>
165
166
|fw.raS15AI|p0;:
Y '*:
w .Wip
fife
EJSPK
___
W-
m
\
|sown MCSTORZ
I*.
1.MF1
0000
Condition
XZ30,X$30,X690,X930
2.HF2
4,MF4
0000
0000
0000
X231,X531,X891,X931
X232 ,X532,X89?,X932
X233,XS33, X893, *933
5. SF
0000
*\TF1
0000
0000
0000
X234,X534JX094,X934
X238 , X538 X898 ,X938
X239,X539,X899,X939
Sts.
Ho. Title
3.MF3
7.TF2
8 HF
9.DEH
1000
X23C,X53C,X89C,X93C
X1F8,X4F8,X858,XBF8
10. JOG
oooo
xieoafio.xBio.xBeo
13. HANDLE
12. STEP
0000
0000
0000
1000
XlEl,X4El,X84I,X6El
X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8E2
13.PTP
14. ZERO RJETORH

IS. MEMORY
iCjTJVPE
'
17.MDT
IB . OPERATION
X1E3,X4E3,X843,X8E3
X1E4,X4E4,X844,X884
SS:;S:S5J:
0000
X1EB,X4EB,X84Q,X8EI)
OOQ0
X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8B2
No.Title
Sts.
19. RESET
20. MX AXIS IHP
0111
1000
1000
21 MJ.aXXS SMTH
22.SYHC-Z
23. SYNC -c
24.SXKC-SP
25.SYHC
26.GOV. :
27-61 V
ZB.XIIREADXHG
29. CONST
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
30. SKIP
31. OH ZERO RTH.
32. FINISH
33. PRESSURE
34.HAXXHG
0000
35-MFIHX
36.MFXH2
0000
Condition
X1C$(X4ES,X845,X8ES
X1F9, X4F9 , X859 , X8F9
XlFA,X4FA,X85A,X8FA
X274 ,X5?4,X8D4 ,X974
X27S,X57S,XBD5,X97 5
X27fc,X57.,X0D6,X976
X204,X504,X864,X904
>
X200,X500,X860,X900
X20X,X501,X861,X901
X203 , X503 , XB63 ,X903
X205 ,X505 , X865, X90S
X206,X506,X866(X906
X207,X5O7 ,XB67 ,X9D7
X26O,X5GO,X0CO,X96O
X268,XS68,X8C8,X968
X26C,X56C,X8CC,X96C '
Y226 , Y526 , Y9A6 , YAA6
Y227,Y527,Y9A7,YAA7
X/
inj.0]! 2005/10/3X j10 : 23; 43
I
f\T\j
0A
VERSION
!ZJ
ALARM
7 SO min1
ALARM
HISTORY
VV\A
"3~J
0m/in
PIC
SIGNAL
MAINlEH
CHECK
PJ.C
RtUtNXHG
CONTROL
> PLC SIGNAL
167
Fite
Vfcteri
susm JCCSTCBCC nx: Slant,
ALARM MESSAGE
471 1TC ATfc HOI TOmp
TYPE
HEAD DATE TIKE
11.15 1B;'47 OPERATE
HO.
w~v-
:*
il
'Q';VSO:.
*::. .*>
*;
TOOL. FILE
__
TOOL OFFSET
-
..
..
ClTTTTliG COHO.
ALARM HISTORY
WORK OFFSET
MftIHTEJUiCB
MACRO VAR.
.
ADD
'
. %VV>5v:J i
l%0,
me
COMPLETIOH <-9999 XNPUT>.
START IH IT,
[IB: 48; 2:1
| 47 l C DATA. MW FQ1W*>
kW 100%
jVU 100%
VERSION
ALARM
ALARM
HISTORY
PIC
SIGNAL
MAINTEN
CHECK
168
.
RQNHING
GRAPHIC
CONTROL
MAIHTE.
DATA
ERASE
> DIAGNOS --> DATA ERASE
ACClJHlI.
TIME
A.
rfliV'ii niRivav'-yv'v}\)Yi
'~'v-
6M.
.w.ifr'>nvrii
;
<
Fite- WWSor*
SXSJOI
Hr>
poi
j rrrcif ITJRIK j KEY MisTtaa|fOw scan7.|
:-
l
i
i
i
Ol
019
01111011
037
02
03
3
4
6
01000111
10111111
11101111
11101111
10001110
0
030
039 ; OOOOOOOO
o40 iooiloioo
oo
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
09
027
oio
oil
012
020
029
04
05
06
07
013
014
015
016
!5
8
4
2
1
0
O
017
018
041 jOOOOOOOl
10011111
042 OlOOOOOO
043 00000000
11111111
00111110
044
04 5
10100000
10010100
030 11110011
031 11100100
032 OOOOOOIO
033 11001101
034 . 00010001
035 i 10000010
036 U 110010
04 6
047
040
1000
100 0
250
0
2000
2000
049
050
500
0
0
051
052
053 j
054
055 toooooooo
0
056 i
057 j IOOOOOOOO
0
050 i'
059 j 00000000
o
060 j
061 : 00000000
0
062 ;
063 00000000
0
064
0
065
0
066
067
0
060 :j
069 1
0
0
07 6 ;
071 ' 00000000
072 UOQOOOOOO
00000000
091
jllOOOOOl
074 iOOQOQlQl
09Z
093
094
loooooooo
[00000000
095
ioooooooo
096
097
098
10000000
0
073
075 j OOOOOOIO
076 jOlOOOOlO
077 loOOOlOOO
070 j 10101000
07 9 i
0
080 :
OOl
002
0
0
OB3 j
0
0
0103
006 |
007
088
089
os 5
096
|
j
|
1
O
16
084
<
j OOOOOOOO
09 9
0100
0101
0102
0
0104
0
0105
0106 IOOOOOOOO
0107 -OOOOOOOO
OIQO
i
:
i
0
?
\:
ij
1
>
EDI
Vv 100%
DIACHO#
WA ioo%
SYSTEM
PITCH
KEY
MEMORY
PA*Uki
ERROR
MI STORY
SCOPE
-rJ Ij#'?'
|fg||ftjj2005/ll/15 1 18; 50: 58
r:
I
:
<
5&
DIAGNOS ->
VERSION -> VERSION -> SYSTEMPARAM
Operation Procedure Display selector key

'
169
rtfUH
rircf
zmam
Ol
02
03
04
05
6
8
06
07
08
09
OlO
1
<>
on
012
RTT mviwi' ; msfufn sn>n;
oi9 muon
020 01010111
021 10110111
022 11110111
023 11111111
OS 4 immMt
OS 5 10011
0
0
08000000
OS5
0 0000 000
056
057
040 00100000
056
041 00000001
059
03?
039
039
111111
060
018
061
1,00000000
062
0
i.00000000
0
07 9
OHO
on i
082
003
0
0
0
0
0
4OO0OOOOO
L 00000000
084
08 f.
086
087
029 11
030 11111111 \ 048

oil 10000100 \ 049
032 00000010
050
01.1
Oil
015
016
04?
017
035 00000110
01Q
>
o36
cfcp
OtU
01010000
0
2000
063
D64
065
066
2000
067
068
069
VlSl
033 01900001
034 0091 oq 01
093
04 00010009
VJOloA
07 5
07 6
043 OOOOOOOO
0
044
045
0
046
0
?
0
111000019
091
092
00100011
9IOO0O1O
0O1O10OO
1010000 1
0
0
0
0
0?6
O71
020
0011110
P?3 00000009
01 4 00000101
0
29
0
O
OlO
071
O? 2
tOOOOOOOO
0
400000000
077
094
095
096
11000001
ooooo loo
00000000
00000000
00000000
0 10OOO0O
097
096
099
0100
OlBl
010 2
0103
1
0
0103
010 5
088
089
0106 00000090
O107
00000090
090
oioa
0
16
?
0
0
0
rV\*
so %
Hfl
>AAA 1 46 tsi/mS
oiM y
>- v
2006/12/01
09:52:31
\\
HIT
r*r
\
Cursor to the coirect. 0 parameter
Press BIT INPUT-"'
170
'*?
'M
4:
fejg
F$* 'itev* twp
SYSTEM
rmm|nttDt mum } I&Y tfusreaa* ) lasas# %tmm J
03
of
03
XI 111011
010X0111
021 10110111
0.22 lillOlll
019
020
04
3
4
6
OS
06
07
08
0*5 1001.1 m
2
?
026
027
OIP
Oil
012
013
014
0
1
0X5
016
017
oin
023 11. trio X

024
I 11**1011
I I nun
001X1110
Of0 11100000
029 XI I18100
030 llilllll
031 10088100
032 OOOOOOiO
033 01000001
034 000X0001
m% 00000110
036 010X0000
9
033
8
038
039 00000000
040 00100000
041 00000001
042 00010008
043 00000 D 00
8
044
045
0
0
04$
055 & 00 00 0000

0
073 00000000
074 00000103
057 *08009900
075 00100011
m%
092
093
076 01000010
0.94
059 09000090
077 OO1010OD
060
078
10100001
mi *00000000
079
05$
058
o
062
063 00080000
cm
0
065
0
047
040
049
050
2880
06$
2098
0
067
068
051
069
052
29
0
070
Oil
072
400000000
00000000
053
054
0
0
on
A/V. 50%
..
lift
Orpm
J
Select,
VW* .1 , 4
mb
099
002
01.60
003
OQ 4
005
086
0
0
0X81
0.1Of
0X83
0104
O90
:;V/|
00000000
096
097
000
087
008
009
j 0 0000000
00800000
081
8
i
1100 OGOL
G 9000100
01.05
0
0
0
0186
0187
0180
O1OO0OOO
0
2
1$
8
8
0
0
00880808
08000000
8
iwi 2006/12/01
09:52:50
in /m in
BIT- f
the bit. you want, on ur off ... Highlighted = 1 or On
I-
3rX
IHPIST
EX
Not Highlighted = 0 or Off
171
vwvWftwiWft\YT
\YAVTlYlVA*>YtYYn VTYtT.YlYlT tYYYi V/Yl Y\ YiWr>1Yl T
&&$&
SYSTEM FWtfO* FITCH EKHR KEY JCISTflJOf
AXIS
PI
P2
1000000
13
10
0
0
P3
PI
P5
#2G
0
0
0
0
0
-6
j
-7
-7 i
0
0 !
0
0
-7
-13
-1
0
0
-10
-18
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-1
0
0
jj
2J
I \
fc.*r.v5cn.v."
5
;
.*.y
Tl I !!' I
DIACMOS
SYSTEM
1/16
-13
0
0
i
J
0
0
0
0
JPXTClt
KEY
HISTORY
>
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
MEMORY
0
0
0
0
<
.....
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
!
?
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SCOPE

VERSION - - > VERSION - - > PITCH ERROR
j
<
!
'
0
;
i
i
man sar
TJjJJ.'JAWWX'.'AWA'AW/AVW .V..V
172
-;
0
0
0
l
vW'ioo*
ERROR
Si RHBBRBR
#234
#208
#102
#150
#130
#101
#70
#52
0
0
0
XI
| KQCJHY SCOfE|
go
mu
'
T. 'J&%.Zp***r ~
Hrt>
FI**
>
\
\
0
0
0
0
0
0
!
1X8:51; 17
DMrK Ko.
SEARCH
fR-tif
F7?
R;T
\o
-O
riLLi
f
SYSTEM
rwam| men unm
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
<5
10
11 12
13 14
15
16
17
18
10
20
MS
MS
Fl
Fl
MS
DS
F3
F4
CR
F4
48
F7
CR
UD
DS
UR
DS
FG
UD
FG
F2
FG
UD
F2
Fl
FG
TB
F2
UD
F2
UD
F9
AX
AH
F2
41
F2
42
F3
43
F2
F3
F?
4B
F7
TB
F2
F4
UD
F2
F7
F2
45
DS
*D
DS
UD
Fl
FG
UD
F3
F4
UD
F2
DS
F6
UD
Ml
FG
CR
UR
DS
FB
Fl
FS
Ml
DS
DS
UD
FG
UD
F3
F3
F6
UD
F3
F2
F2
F3
40
53
53
56
56
UD
F2
51
F4
UD
UD
FA
40
UD
F3
F7
Ml
F4
Pi
FG
DS
FG
UD
UD
UD
Ml
F?
FA
F2
F2
UR
53
FG
iwoarior SCOPE |
5ft
0 MS
20 Fl
KEY msTmor
F3
DS
FG
UD
FG
WD
MO
CR
UD
DS
F2
F2
F2
F2
DS
Fl
DS
Fl
48
5B
40
5B
4A
55
41
55
UD
DS
UD
UD
F7
UD
DS
DS
08
F2
FT
UD
UD
Fl
UD
UD
DS
UD
UD
F8
FG
MO
F6
FG
UD
UR
48
FA
MS
DS
UD
UD
FS
DS
UD
CR
DS
FO
F6
DS
F?
360 UD
UD
300
400
420
440
460
400
500
Fl
F4
Ml
DS
CR
F4
Fl
FA
F2
PD
DS
Fl
CR
UD
UD
DS
FA
DS
F4
Fl
Fl
DS
DS
FO
F7
DS
F?
UD
UD
UD
F4
F7
DS
DS
DS
Fl
HO
DS
H4
PD
FG
FG
FA
CR
Fl
HO
UD
UD
FG
FA
CR
UD
DS
F6
UR
F3
44
54
F2
42
54
MS
UD
F2
Ffi
f3
42
F2
UD
UD
UD
UD
UD
UD
OS
F3
MS
DS
DS
F5
F2
DS
DS
F6
DS
MS
DS
UD
UD
UD
UD
Ml
FG
UD
UD
DS
UD
DS
UD
F2
F6
DS
FA
F8
UD
UD
F8
FB
PD
PD
FR
PD
Fl
PD
CR
CR
CR
CR
F2
Fl
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
UD
UD
UD
UD
UD
UD
F4
UD
UD
F5
DS
UD
UD
UD
Fl
Fl
DS
FA
UD
UD
FA
F7
F3
M3
FA
PU
FA
PU
UD
FA
F3
DS
F3
UD
F6
F4
PD
DS
DS
F8
Fl
CR
CR
1ID
PU
CR
CR
UD
UD
UD
UD
UD
mmmi
EE
PXA0H03
DS
UD
UD
UD
F3
DS
4A
F7
CR
F4
UD
DS
H.
4B
DS
M0
FA
DS
FS
CR
UR
UD
FA
F5
Fl
FS
DS
DS
DS
UR
UD
FG
F4
FG
Fl
AE
UD
DS
FO
DS
F8
PD
CL
DS
DS
Fl
Ffi
AT
UR
51
F3
F3
F2
MS
FS
CR
F2
UD
UD
F2
DS
FA
DS
F8
DS
UD
F8
UR
4C
UD
UD
UD
UD
UD
F6
FA
Fl
UD
Fl
UD
DS
FB
F7
UD
DS
DS
UD
UD
FO
UD
F4
UD
DS
UD
F7
PU
40
PD
DS
UD
FS
DC
DS
F4
DS
MO
F3
UD
CR
CR
UD
DS
FB
DS
UD
F4
UD
DS
PU
DS
UD
FA
PU
CR
CR
UD
CR
UD
UD
UD
Fl
UD
UD
Ml
UD
F8
UD
DS
UD
:TPS 0 (2005/11/15 18:51:35
E
BYSTF.W
P ARAM
PITCH
ERROR
RET
HISTORY
MEMORY
SCOPE

DIAGPTOS
VERSION -> VERSION -> KEY HISTORY
>
173
yVA*>ViV.,S*VV%\VISNNWIV.VIWTVV>V.VAW,/VAV\WVS
LYftmvWlWWYlWYlVW.W
jMliaF
i Fite
t*
i
*
WWwf Hfr9f>-
serra*
ra ) ?XTCM ERROR j KEY rasrraac
vaxsci
scare i
l
\
i
I
TRIGGER No. 0
Ho.
QZGHKL
00000000-0
oooooooo-o
00000000-0
oooooooo-o
00000000-0
fi
00000000-0
IIP
+
SAMPLING CYCLE
*-
-+
+
4-
I.TBS
+-
i
$
IJ
I
Ii
<
::
00000000-0
oooooooo-o
:?
i
1
i
\
1
\
;
i
ioos/ii/is jiafsi: sa
! FW ioo%
vV*A ioo%
['VIZ
SYSTEM
pxtm
ERROR
KEY
H.TS20RY
WBB
MEMORY
RTRRT
SCOPE
W
TW/.ViV.V.VAW.'.V
Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION -> VERSION -> MEMORY SCOPE
174
WWHWX'IWW.'TO
i
mui
Memory Scope
Primary Function
Digital Recorder
-Ability to monitor 8 (eight) signals set to anything that is

an address
inputs, outputs, latches, etc..
175
176
Memory Scope
Cursor down to the desired signal number!!

In this example, signal No. 1
mm
M DIAGNQSIS(MAKER2)
File Window. y Help
'
Hi
SYSTEM -P AR'Mr I PITCH EPP.0P. | KEY HISTORY.
>v;KEK0RY \3rftW
rS:
Wo.
TRIGGER Wo.C
+
SIGNAL ,
1 00000000-0
f.ly,
;
M
$
Hi
2 .00000000-0 V -:
3 00000000-0
*!
4 00000000-0
ft}.
5 00000000-0
'
6 00000000-0'
V'lllifPSiii
m
ISW*y.
>
7 00000000-0
;v
8 00000000-0
S Jslfvfe,
&
m- VVVilitl
A:-
iVfii
m mm \ iHM aMfimB
vy
ij'-y."/-;;'1 \
vy;-
-- : -i
"*"v
}''
WW
33 EMERGENCY STOP
rVV 10 0%
A
[xjj
WA
Orpm
B-
'
SiiHiP
100
------
j?
r,
8.V
S'-VT
A;
>
:v
-7',l/,V;7 %
iiiiiin
Y
VVV--
V.;
A4
is-:
ss;
iiiiil
Memory Scope
Input the desired address, example X140-0
(For X146, type X146-0 input)

i DIAGNDSISIMAKER2)
Rle Window Help
SYSTEM
.<AK| PITCH
ERROR
| KEY
mrntmmmmmt
HISTORY
TRIGGER No. 0
Ho.
SIGNAL
+;
MEMORY 3C OPE
v-'H-W
--
'>
SAMPLING- CYCLE
+
+
DOWN
T;
1 00000000-0
2 00000000-0
3 00000000-0
iiiMiiiMHi silS
lilgi
. - r*S:
f
j
li
4 00000000-0
S 00000000-0
6 00000000-0
.7
ooo.ooqoo-o
..
Yg,
8 00000000-0
gift
&
To 05 |xj}
A
[WvA
Orpm
m
m
[ j ~'.:7 ]lpgjg ['2000/03/25' [12:52
33 EMERGENCY STOP
!Vv
: I;;
100
X14D-0
177
178
Memory Scope
Insert up to 8 addresss
.......
1 DIAGNOSISJMAKER2)
3V3TEH PARAH
No
PITCH ERP.0R
KE'2 HISTORY
TRIGGER No. 0
+
:f;
SIGNAL,
1: X0140
111
jmmmmummmmmmmm
File VindoW' Help
.ICCKORY-
: ;
DOWN
+
-0
2 00000000-0
mmmmmssmmSBmrnmmsi
3 00000000-0
ii
i'm
9y
Cy'ti
4 00000000-0
lg
5 00000000-0
fM
s
'V;
wmmm.
33 EMERGENCY STOP
I'vviaos
A:.
jxQ]
B
fvWv
Orpm
'.(2,
X
2#
y-:
f?
Ni
100
f
WM
a&
mk
*#
;
i;
ooodoooo-o
-w
>
6 00000000-0
7 00000000-0
&
mmm
si
Memory Scope
XI 40-0 through X147-0

J
DIAGNOSISIMAKER2)
File Window Help

3Y3TEK PAR AH
Mo.
__
| PITCH
EBP OR
KEY KISTOP.Y
1 X0140
-0
2 X0140
-1
3 X0140
-2
-------- ----
TRIGGER Mo. 0
+
+
SIGNAL
HEHORY SCOPE:
wimmm
DOUN SAMPLING CYCLE

~+
+
+
+
----
~+
3
tie
%
i
4 X0140
-3
5 X0140
-4
6 X014D
-5
7 X0140
-6
8 X0140
-7
X'
1M
>\\;
IV?
m- XX& X
.--
'
v,m
xMWB
:>
'
.,-
...
&
33EMER(HCY.
P'/v
100%
[Vjjr
aMMHMM [
!7-
"100
Or pm
DIAGHOS
; SYSTEM
PAPsAM
PITCH
ERROR
KEY.
HISTORY
HEMORYf;
SCOPE
2303/03/29
&
X'iv
f 12: 57
_jr
:\
'
'START,,,
179
X140=Reset
>i
180
Memory Scope
Enter the No. for the desired trigger signal
i pi
(MAKER2)
File Window Help
SYSTEM PAJ..UI
No.
PITCH EPROP.
SIGNAL
-0
.2X0140
-1;
3 X0140
~2
4 X0140
x3;
.5 XOl'lO
-4.
6 X0140
5:
7..X0140
;B6:
XOi.iO:
-7
HISTORY
DP
PARAM
x 7.,1m?
'
>
iu;
Illiii
fSililil;
M
$
wsg
liii 11
Orpm
SYSTEM
20
''5
33 EMERGENCY STOP
DIAGIJOS
Vvv'
W3M
______
. 0:M fvv 1005 [zSQf
SAMPLING CYCLE
+ r-
Tr
ue.
MEMORY SCOPE:
-------- ---TRIGGER: Ho. 6

+ -yw,
+
1X0140
| KEY
|vw ioo'
.PITCH
ERROR
;,
KEY,
HISTORY
I-;
r~~~
I :2P0p/03/2. rls,; 02
MEMORY
SCOEfel
?7$
START
l
In this example, signal No. 6 will be used as the trigger

signal. (X145)
Memory Scope
ENTER 0 TO USE THE RISING EDGE
ENTER 1 TO USE THE FALLING EDGE
U
WmsmmF wmmwmmmmmmmmm
C DIAGN0SIS(MAKER2)
File Window Help
SYSTEM P ARMI:.|:P ITCH ERROP.
KEY HISTORY
; /*?*;
No.
;;
. ;;
X014Q
~i
3' X0140
=rs2
$ g tip
:V
TRIGGER No. 5 DOTO

-:4 - +V I- -;+
-:+i
; SIGNAL.
1 X0140 . ..-0
2
MEMORY SCOPE 1
;:-<
mmmm
:TUW;
. ..: /.
'.
>avi ;
I'
l|raHn|
.V:.
;v;,it
r|
'-..
'.'O
mm
4 X0140
-3
5 \X0140
-4
6 X0140
7 X0140;
-6
3 X0140
-7
33 EMERGENCY STOP
j-W 100%
jDIAGNOS
I
i
Orpm
SYS TEH
PARAH
Jg
m$
lltiSIfllll
i mt istsi
W:
My
mm
I
-A
Vtvy/
lliila
]
|WA
PITCH
ERROR.
( IPlT 0
f 2000/C3/29
M
100 ;*
KEY
HISTORY
[
[12: 58
SCOREI
-START
181
THIS EXAMPLE USES THE FALLING EDGE
3*
'S
182
Memory Scope
INSERT TIME
(20 = .14 SECONDS)?
/
PIAGNOSIS|MAKEH2)
File .Window. Help

SYSTEM PAR All
PITCH ERROR
|KEVHIST0RV
.........
TRIGGER
SIGNAL
No.
1 XOl'lO
-G
Ho . S
wn?co]
DO'JW
wmmmmBi
SAMPLING CYCLE
IP ,7
.
XOi-4.0
3X0140
-2
4 XCI140
-3
5 X0H0
-4
6 X0140
-5
7 X014U
-6
8 X0140
-.?
Wm
IS I
; gf|
\
B
gmxgMmmmmm
as p
i I
<
is
I M 8 11
Wii
11111 ;
li
W:
EHEBGEMCY" SIOT
Orpin
|w 1005 gj
SVSTFW-
7.1ns
M w
33
DIAGNOS
[E3
'
'
u w,US
i
fWA
PTTfK
ioo'
TCFY
MFWriRV'
PRESS START
LTi
jTPS 0
II
jg
2000/03/29
s
p
I|
.
START
[T2:S3PI?
'i
Memory Scope
The sampling cycle begins after the
desired trigger occurs.
,g DjABN0SIS|MAKER2|
File . Window
Help
SYSTEM PAPAM
] PITCH ERROR] KEY
----
SIGNAL
SCOPE
HISTORY
TRIGGER No. 6
No;
y W"
y
UP
-0;
2 X0140
-1
3 X0140
-2
4 X0140
-3
S X0140
-4
6 X0140,
7 X0140
-6
8 X0140
-7
wmm
:v yw.-y.;.,.y .
j,
20 . x 7.1m 3
U'
WJ! :-7:
mmmmi
__
_
_ _ ;
:__
~~
~~
'
2,
"
SYS T Ell
PA RAH
-+
'V
yj33TEHERGENCY
Orpin.
;'V
SAPLING. CYCLE
DIAGNOS
+----+
1 XG14G
|vv'l00% prjjj
[$}
jy-M
PITCH
ERROR
'
10 o"
KEY
HISTORY
'
HEHOEY
ECPE
IPS
fl
'
O '
-o
"
[-2000703/39 FTof
'
'
V.w- y.
EHvraa
183
The result of signals will be displayed after the sampling

time cycle expires.
184
.....
Maintenance Check
ivMmm
3lfc
U2
i
Vi
;#
;:'4&
itf
m
ill I
>
n-
Uj.
xW
t.v
r-t'i
ilKg
IHWHI
-0.023
0.
0.
0.
X2
22
py-
65.3. .10
11!
I*
I
aw
X1
o
;.*
VI ?*
Z1
ilS
IBB
' 'v-
:i
I
1
lliflf
FT witm
EJ 5.'. mi
%
SLIS
1
'
"
.'
oc
nA
mm
0
k,
*r :
...
m
si
is
-';
l
i!inssi!&! If
. *>
-Ill
f.
aJ* BE
'
4W8#L
Si...
.; i*S
Molin
*: r>\
0
.:
:.: PC
.
-!' -
**/&/'>
0.
u
...
-...
N
T13
. f . 5....
.*
i;-
'
J,,
||||j|P
il;
l&raf
"
3Bflgigj[
fi
ly'i
SSlSMlt-i m
111
aa
1$
vi
Ai;>v
31
i*V'\
Maintenance
Check
Jr
'r-
<
.'I
'
X*%< K
*Y-
..
.~
*<'
A? A-
:9*
v.
?' ;
C--
.?
muV
WfS
>
:v;
v?;
185
.
1
8HR
'i m
:i;;8
.
H it V
S| T
K.i
Bii
'-
L+
!N
F TV
3TT. .
T/
A pi
w
v
ft
rXj
iv
12 13
>. o.1
A1
.-:i '
Vi!
1
,r
mu&zBx
:1
If
'.<
*
*|A..' *
V . W I
TTT
1 1T*
'. <*
E>
i
;
I8
ia
186
Maintenance Check Display

|/*MWNIt;HMiK?E CHECK
Pil*.' Wrdcw Hob
mwrnmjci OTCK
Bo.
aiti.1
pxmoua ana;
(l
trot.
lSOp-HJfS' CHECK .1TOK
30C0-WS CHECK . 3TEH2

l
CHECK' GUIDE BAY

6;
tUB-ou- 1
1593.. 6. A
H82LJ
1998. 6. 4
1.18 2L1
1993. C. A
I382LJ
CHICK BHMDiG
LUB-OIL
I102L]
,3- CHICK COOldlTI XZVEL
L953. C
1593.! C
Function
\4\ CHAN
S
cooijjri jiirzK
CHECK- aar- LcvEi t;;

IH CHIP SUCKlT
f
f
_o
1 1821] .
I192L)
.1993,. C. 4
. 1993. C. 1
6 am.HicHnajioRU
L993. C
1 18 2L]
.4
'
Periodic check of items

Last date of check
118 ELI
3000
'
ri/~2'i
: ."[.m 0:i 'l999/p5>3C . '34147
fv.-
Z0
SOI |
POSITION
Orpa
)*V/
O.OClu/iU)
K V.-f'-v;;
DliGUOS
if m
Lonuiewi
mu
that has elapsed since the last Check
Machine function continues, even after the display of time

elapsed exceeds the target time
2 pages, 8 lines each, 16 items total
i rk
I
HC*
MJlXHTEHftJWCe CHECK DATA
Ho.
TIME <H)
PREVIOUS CHECK
1500
3000-fcfcS CHECK ITEMS
*
m
:=
l 101]
2005. 10. 31
i ion
2005. 10. 31
l 101]
2005. 10. 31
11]
2005.10. 31
I 1013
2005. 10. 31
4
v.;
CD
0
"
/V\/
0s
Iff
7 5 Owin'1
VW'-
1.
101]
2005. 10. 31
1/
I
I
$
s
2005. 10. 31
1 101]
1500
1500
..;*
2005. 10. 31
3000
VV
( 101]
15 QO-fiKS CHECK ITEMS
II
\t
-iJ
XM 0 2005/10/31 -10:23:57
Ij
!
l
07*m/jin
i
lOSXTXOJI
D1A0W0S
LOHGTCRW
''.DATA
DIAGNOS
"
> MAINTEN CHECK
187
His
File
Hr*.
ISOO-BRS CHECK ITEMS

HO
1
2
II
18
19
20
21
22
23
7
8
24
25
10
26
27
2B
29
30
31
32
11
12
13
14
15
16
o ?: /
1/
o' 2005/10/31
;10:
1
irs
0>
POSIT.tOH
.0?
TSOBIJII"1
VAA
24; 06
Owm/nin
DtACHOS
PRTA
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->
MEINTEN CHECK -> LONGTERM DATA
188
'itnn'TR
Mazatrol Fusion 640M MAINTENANCE CHECK Dtspl-ay

Function:
Pertodls
dsie
cfleet Herrs. the
lasl dale of sheeting. and tie time that has elapsed since
ine I3&1
or cPEcv.lr-g are displayed.
Periodls elect Items car ba regls'.arec.
8.173 rtf-S:
Tne machine will net stop even rT:ne display df die. time wfclsh: has elapsed since
checking exc-aecs 'fie target lime.
tne last date oT
Data display
1.
Displayed data
IP WMBTCH*JKige OUECK
FJ ..*#W=W Hflp
Ho,
ILkTfTtllTAJfC! CB1CK UAtA.
TOT&lHJj
PJvI 71D VS 5HIC K
WEB
ia
;t4i :
Pd :
%
it;
Si;
ns
1
[
ili
imm
i
t
I:
f)
mmm;
W4VV>iV4MMm . .
Hi j~ i jggvff/
L.
fw
i&et
EUSHH ESZEEBHH
5A-,
jiggfe
1
D725S1CB3S
2.
Display data description

tem
Me.
n
3
Ur It
Hvr# or a erti>:l- cr3 Rem
CM to: HAT*
189
riMt
il
Targcl irne
53
CuTcnUme
S3
PREV30US OJZCK
PJ<;C
Data desedpflon
CAficK number
Kc-.
HA-IMTUCrvHCE.
Graph k:a; repreggnlaton cf ire
haur
Hru
'V M. 0
rate et 1h currer,! Brr-e la Bre targe l. rm e
Target fmt for the rxf.DO'c chxK HOT
CuTcrTt BmsfcfUiepenca'c chscK Itesa

The
art da% cf
Page number
periodic cire-rt Hem
3.
Registering the data for regular check itei
190
A.
Presetting, the target time or the current time

the cursor to r.he data item sstiere data is to c<= preset.
f 1)
Mo/e
(2f
Enter me.
Example: Specify fc90" and press ihe INPUT icey to input 90.
Entry cf toe current time updates the date of date item [5] (PREVIOUS CHECKS
Note:
Data display for Cong-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)
1.
Displayed data
Pi
CHECK
H]p
Fib
1SD0-HJS CHECK IJLHS
Kto1
2
3
/'
IT.
ii'
i
S
CD
>
ti'
*5
VI
S2J
Ilf
123
LO
It
IS
ZT
2D
m
$0
L3
U.
LS
'*31
LG
- DE
r;a~d
iw
lfitil
i
luu*
ftJsTfl f is3?B5?as
neiia'
|W
07355-1:0692.
2.
Display data description

MfifB
Na.
Data descrpUon.
U.Tit.
Cfteclc numa-r
i;
Me
Check terns
-oca terra ensefc Hsre.-
a;
Fat*
Fags minber

Display operations
The display status of cata item will reverse when- the oirrent time reaches the target, time. After
a:m per.cn of checking. rr the cursor to "No. using the cursor key and then press the INPUT
key. The display cf data item will then return from the .reverse status to Che rarmac status.
Entry of the check items to be displayed
The check items to fee displayed cannot be entered directly on the MAINTENANCE CHECK
display. This subsea cn cescrbes the procedure for adding cr deleting the check items to be
displayed.
1 ) Save the factory-set data cf display items beforehand into the file.
to create a file under the specified directory (see Item 2
21 Execute the File Write function

below).
3) Edit the text file as required l see hen 1 betcw).

*5) Execute the File Read function tc fetch the data onto the display (see Item 2 below).
1.
Registering the data of the check itemrs
Using a comnerciavy avalable edrtcr. open the text fi of the folcwng format under the
spec flee directory tom 64mdstai engVnai rnenan ce.txt ).
(urcon] ;
.n*stf*rof c-en'cai-c cr,czv. terns'

.Cc'ur-enr Vn
i, CHECK -JUICE V&Y LUB-OIL

2-4,
[rail IS] ;
n'es*ar Zff
ate c ,Tdm z
I.CKAHJE HVDFJtULIC UNIT OIL

32.
[TW13-0];
Weaker of KtC-nrs cnec*.terns
1, CHECK HACHItfE LEVEL
32,
Note:
eng' in the directory name conespends with the language currently selected for the
display mate.
191
192

Entry of the check items to be displayed
A.
Data format of the periodic check items

[urconj
1,
-TE-TT:
P-ixic-ali-s ebacb icinto
ma
WAY LUP-OTL
- lJp to 24 items can be registered.

- Set the description after the serial number and
comma.
24
Note:
The description can oonsst of up to 4D characters (a two-byte code is counted as two

characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
B. Data form at of the lo ng-term ched! items

[insllS]
l, :m>?eg
r!h*c!c it.ana
HSHE53JLI SSSU. OIL
- Up to 32 items cam: be registered.
- Set the description alter the serial number and

comma.
22
[BSil-Q] SCOO-hr*
c Ic
2,. CHECK WACKIKE LEVEL
22,
Note:
The description can consist of up to 40 characters {a two-byte code is counted as two

characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
2*
Read and Write of check items text file
__
A> the check items presented cn the MAINTENANCE CHECK display can be read in from, and'
written into, the specified text file. Use a commercially avaBable ed&ar to prepare a text file
ccnlainiri the desired check items to be read m and presented cn the display.
A. File Read
Using a commercially available edftar< prepays a text file (containing the desired check items}
and copy it into the specified cirecsory.
j&>MAIMTEHAN6E CHECK
Film
iu7My,
!
File ftead
Filhoi
zazcic.z
Select the option 'File Reac" through the item Tile" cn Ihe menu bar to start data loading. The
contents thus reaa In vrill be displayed as shown betow upon completion of loading.
:/iMiinewawe cure*
Fib- Vrxlcw
ssm
h.fc
wamnifle* DtECj-riiti.
'
S2s;*;-v
_
m
].POD.-}i0aHi.(;>tv;iTia5;
VN*.
rHECXCUIOl-.WTf
UE'rQIL'.
;f
>&y:
'"-t:
-;:b
$Sx).
2- CB20t.SPIl,n -vLOT.-OIt:: :
;E
ySyy.-:
'
.TIJIl
"7
mmm
..
..
smm
"-31-
; m lit
..----3:
B. Rle Write
Select the option Tile Write" through the item Tile' on the nvsnu bar to save the display data.
A text file containing the current display data will be created under the specified directory.
yfeMAIttfrewroE CHECK
filu,
WrsTl-ksIp
193
H~d-v
.?
fisrirar
r"
, ' :"
Vst
'
194
r*
r*
SMU322S.*-..Y__
I mMm
:h Vfafort
! r ronfT
AVA\\VA\WAYWSWjNSV
AMAMM .NA'.'I W
'IY,'-'.V.'I'I VI'. Vi:V.'\
F!
UtHE/riCE/3D
:
[
I
;
II
031
30
02
10
03
04
05
06
D?
2
10
D8
32
Df)
45
DIO
Dll
012
63
10
5
5
2
0
5
0
3
0
D32
D33
034
D35
036
037
D3B
D3$
D40
D41
D42
943 3
944 !1
94 5 !I
94 6|
1
D47
048|
10
3
5
2
10
9
2
60
6
0
D22
DZ3
024
D25 f
D26
D27
D20
029]
030
D1
013
014
015
D16
D17
D10
D19
020
021
l\
sen
CO /ISO
LIWT
| SXSTCK<1I5UI)
||
L; - OY Y
. , j t .'
Gs&gggi
HKMTHE TUS SCLJD
TURKISC
?-
.. _/.....,-
r v
'
IV&
o
2
049
D50
D51
052
053
054
O
0
055
0
0
100
056
057
058
059
060
D61
062
D63
D64
065
066
D67
960
069
100
070
3
5
0
20
100
100
2
20
2
0
0
2
0
D7l
D72
100
0
D73!
!
D7 4 }
D7 5 I
976
077 i
D7B
D7 9
DBO I:
0
0
0
3
20
DB1]
0
0
DQ2
DB3]
984
OB 5 1
0
0
0
0
D97
D98
D99
DlCO
0101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107
D108
0109
0110
300
500
1000
10
50
200
500
700
0
0
DBO 1
DB7 !
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0121 j
OOOOOOOQ
01241j
0125 j
0126
D127
00000000
00000000
00000000
oooooooo
oooooooo
oooooooo
oooooooo
OOOOOOOO
D113
0
0
0
0
0
D114
Dll 5
0
0
0116
0117
Dill
I
DB8 j
0
D89 j
0
D90 j
091| 11110001
D92 j 00001111
D93 j OOOOOOOO
00000000
00000000
00000000
D112
D94| OOOOOOOO
D95 j OOOOOOOO
D96 !- OOOOOOOO
DUB
D119
0
0
0
D120
D122 I
i
D123 j
D128
0129
0130}
D131J
0132
0133|
0134|
0135|
D136|
i
D137 j
5
D13B
0139
D140 j
0X41 :
D142 j
:
0143 i
0144]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5Q%
9OlH'7
ID)
>
::
5
\
5
t
!:
o
o
t
.
M",
s
1
i f\j\j
i
>
0
0
0
0
i
l
>
sinr
WA
Omin
LXH , FACE
30 [ J
;i; i3:53
\
0*u*i/nin
EIA/X30
son
SYSTEM V
TV AM.me
MACH me
SOLID
Ptc
Z.3MXtriX]
[SU]
ITC]
TXM
ISO]
PARIIM-
w*m
f mmmemmm
v.
A'.'.'
MACH1HE
PAFAM.
:
t
;.VW/WWWWWJMU.WJ
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PAPJy>vl
<
POINT
195
iVi*yYAV>v.yyr*
!
.
KEA'asa:
.C--:->V.-r
fm. Vfafcri
l
TJ3ILE
CSH. WKRP
iXH>
VEL.
K25
K26
K27
0
0
yX49
K20
K29
K30
TDC
cmcr-
SMOTHER
SrjHOLE
:-.
B2KWER
f.
::
I
:
i
i
0
500
0
9
K1
K2
K3
'\K4 ;
K5
K6
K7
80
2
*8
K9
K10
Kll
K12
K13
0
K32
0 -:K33.:
0 ;'J :K34 j
0 j;. 35
0 , K36 |
30
K37 |
>
s
i
i
30
K33
K39
O
O
2000
K40
25
50
1000
1000
100
K4X
K42
2000
K15
K1V
K18
K19
K20
K21
0
0
0
0
0
0
2000
X14
K23
. . . K24
XS5
X56
X57
00000111 y:)'.KSl]
K7 4
0
0
K76
K77
K7$
K79
K80
7;:.
o l- Kdi
K82
K83
K84
KB5
0
0
4
1
1
1
2
K63
K64
1
K65
120
120 -:k66!
i
1
K67
120
120
X6B 00000000
120
K69 00000001
0
K7 0 00000011
0
Kll 00000111
0
K72 00000111
K43
X44
X45
K73
: K75
4l<A>
$:;X58
X59
X60
K61
K62
I;
O
O
O
1 ...;V-V46
K47
1
K48
0
K22
f; x5i
KS2
o : A K53
o ':y-k$4
0
0
0
0
#: K50
Kfi$
K87
K08
K89
0
0
K9B
K99
K100
K101
IC102
icio3
K104
KlOS
K106
K107
K108
00 < >
K121
*00< >
K122
-:-V
4 2
K123
5A<Z>
K124
*5B<X:> '><125
Q 010 0000
ooooiooo
00 000 000
00000010
10001000
;KI27
K128
XI29
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
: K132
K1Q9
KUO
Kill
0
0
K134
y X135
K136
10100000
0
kii 2
0
100
0
K115
K91
0
KllS
K92
2 V/ K1.17
K93
IOO< > V; K118
4*94
K119
K95 10001000
K120
IC96 10000000
8ft
:--m&
K130
K131
X133
K138
K139
*140
XI 41
K142
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
"
;
i
HVS 0 2005/11/01
1'.
|/W 100%
i-
ifr
7 SOinin1
MKA50RC
TABtE
WACKO
[KJ
[11
Qxn/min
.***> .VA
PECO
VL. JH)
xiWBV,-:.
COHSXIMJ
ANOTHER
S\ m
mm
miiujjxiw
%s.3
{SA1 i:
l
USER
|BA]
V.VMV.VM-'-VXV.WAV/.V.W//.',
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM -->

IvIEASURE
DLA.CHINE PARAM.
196
SXWOXE
;;'iV
V;V
"If k*-.'
13; 24: 57
PAKAM.
2AKAI1-
n?
I
J
V:
F.S"
|
ns
TXH
KB
KL
{
J
urn
TIM?
TIM3
TXH4
TIMS
TIM6
TIM7
TIM8
TIW9
TJMlO
!
Ii
|
i
30
30
50
20
20
200
20
100
20
300
TXM25
TIM26
TIM27
TIM2B
TIM2J>
TDflO
TIM31
TIM32
TIM33
TIM34
TH<35
T3M36
XIH37
TIH30
T3M39
TIM40
TXM41
150
TIMll j
30 0
TXMl? }
J
TXMI3 f
1.50
50
TIM14 |
TIMlS !I 1000
0
TIMI6
0
nmxi :
1 TIM42
Tima i
70 TIM43
TIM19 j
TIM20
100
TIM44
TIM21
TXM22
TXH45
TIM46
TIM47
TIM23
TIM24
0
0
3
T3M4B
0
0
0
0
30
30
30
30
300
3600
20
TIM49
TIM50
TIM51
TXX52
TIW53
TIM54
TIMS 5
TIM56 1
TXH57 !
TIM50
10 0
0
0
0
10
TIM78
TIM79
T2M80
T3M81
TIM82
TTM59j
10
TIM83
1
TXM61
10
T3M84
10
70
10
TDW05
TIM06
THI87
TXW88
TIM89
TIM90
TIM91
0
0
T3M60
600
10000 TIM62
10 T3M63 1
i
15 T3M64
10 TXM65
15 TIM66
600 TIM67
1800 T3M68 5
;
600 TXM69
3000 TIM70;
100 TIM71
50 TIM"/ 2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T1M73
TIM74
TIM75
TIM76
TIM77
10
T3M92
TTM93
0
0
50
TXM94
TIM95
TIM96
10
i1
>
50%
ljS3)
drain*
vwr~
50
0
SO
50
600
30
60
0
P
0
0
0
0
0
TXM97
TIM98
TIM99
TIM100
T1M10X
TIM102
TXM103
TIM104
T1M105
TIM106
TXM107
TXMlOB
0
0
0
TIM112
0
0
TTK141I
0
0
TIMl43i
TIM144
0
0
TXM113
0 TIM114
0 TXM115 j
0 TXMH6 j
0 TTMIX7|
0 TXM110
I
0 TIMll!)
0 TIM120
THH24
TIM111
TXM145
TXM146
0 TIM147
0
0
TIKI 2 5
TIM126
TIM127
TXM12B
TIM129
TIM130
TIM131
TIH132
T3DMI33
TIM134
TIM135
TIM136
TXM137
TIM138
TIM139
TIM140
0
0
0
0
0
0
TXM109
TIM110
TXM121
TIM122
TIK123
0
0
0
0
TIMll 2
0
0
0
0
0
TIMldd
TIM149 ;
TH4150
TIMlSlj
o
o
0
0
T1M156
tmisi
P TIM150
0 TIM1S9
O TIM160
TXM161
0 TJM162
0 TIM163
0
0
0
TJM152
rmx53
0 TIM154
0 TTM155
0
0
TIH164 I
T1X165
T1M166
T1X167 !
TIM168 :!
;
0
0
0
0
<
gmspr
J 10 ; 15; 50
i:
:
Omro/saiit
USER
[TIM]
IRS]
[RX.J
MftCttlitE
[]
:
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM

PLC PARAMETER -> TIM
197
5
17.
MS
T
VftVKkr,
fi* \f**
H*>
HC
PROGRAM
#|
91
SAVE
Jfi
BB3SMB
SWM)
198
"
---
--
--
;200S/ja/15
TAPE
CMT
i
i
-T-J.
: 35
.*.-.*: \-L~ Jr-sr.r*
jwYss
FLOPPY
ii$fi
:<
p/<M ioo%
MSK
-----
-- ---------------
l
\
IfPS-O
CARD
!
I
..--
:
i
OTHER DATA
OTHER DATA
>
I
I
I
1
i !
I
i
%
m\
Ji *f
1 T
aI
'
DIRECTORY:
:
:
|
1\
I
i? i
PROGRAM
CAH DATA
sI
swe
dJ 55
199
200
..
y.y;.\-.-.\
! POSITION PR2J
21
B
Cl
X2
Z2
BUFFER
0.
0.
w4 . 5
0.
0.
13.30
15.14567
C2
0.
0.
xx
Q zi
0
Q
9
0
cl
X2
22
C2
Q w
XI
Y
21
B
NEXT COMMAND
0.
0.
o.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0,
0.
UNO,
*,
>
Cl
X2
6.
COUNTER
<MODAL IOW
S
0 F
Z2
0.
C2
NEXT COMMAND LOW
0.
->->
<
0.
0)
M
G 23
G
G
G
G 68
6123.16111
OFFSET LOW
z
4, S
ot
0*
G 18
G 80
G 67
9.56 97
1.13
&5Q , 2
0
G 98 G 20
653 5
6123 G
613.1
0 MXN1
0
0 FT /MIN M, iPDIi
o Mor1 T.r SPDL Ij
0 FT /MIN
o Miir1 T * BWBL 2\
Xl-lixj
0 FT /MIN
ft*. SPDL

SPBLl
<1>
T , SPDL2
<15
TNo .
<
MRGAZNPKHo.
(
LOW 108
<
12
Xftf/REY
0*
* /min
Cl
C2
0,
0.
0
LOW
8-AX
POSITION
SET UP
INFO,
O.
rprn
PROGRAM
0
0
0
0
0
0
TOOL
iVWo.Ot
s
C-COHD.
mm \
&
/min
IN /MIN
IM/REV
C2-AX|
/min
DATA
201
Select DIAGNOS
tvw
DIAGNOS
0
0
w'tr
El:Z006/12/13
in /min
PARAM
Cl-ftxj
X2-AX
Z2-AX
CE1
200
IN /MIN
0*
0.
W-AX
o%
100
YrUX |
UNIT :
V\J
G 40
G 64
i
i
FEED
1BT No ,
( GENERAL OUT )
Qj
REMAIN
0,
XI
0.
Y
0.
Zl
B
0.
0.
Cl
0.
X2
0.
22
C2
0.
w
0.
0.
US
WHO ,
0.
0.
MACHINE
Q
Q
S>>KSS>
Hefc
POSITION
Y
H*
rite Ym* Settp Window

xi
.vN>.;
W/A'
y-yff
0
8
69:44:27
/?,
DATA
TOOL
DISPLAY
I/O
LAYOUT
MAP
''
/DIAGNOSiSjUSW)
202
pile
Wm.
FV
View Setup WirxizM Help
;aLWi
W*iRM KISTOEOT i PLC SIGNAL
HEAD DATE
ALARM MESSAGE
No,
TIME
TYPE
m
O/Yr
0 rpm
0%
VERSION
ALARM
VV\A 0
V? !
,I
00 in /min
ALARM
PLC
MAINTEN
SXIHHIHG
GRAPHIC.
DATA
ACCCTMU ,
HISTORY
SIGNAL
CHECK
CONTROL
MAINTE
ERASE
TIME
Select VERSION
Jlmmmmm Wmlm1
Help
Fie
P||
<&
Pl
Winejgwi
VERSION ; DIAGNOSIS iJONITOR j OPTION j SERVO MONITOR | SPIKDLE MONITOR j KiRD-VOlKE WDHITGR
SERIAL M73682107 61
UNIT FCU7-MA513-22
j
ITEM
VERS ION
10O1WOO0-B4A
MAIM -A
MAIN-B
LG -ENG
LADDER-F
LAD D R S
LGPENG
1001W001-BO
1001W011-BO
1001W37 4 - A1310
1001W37 4 - A1310
I001W01137 4A1300 2
ITEM
MOTOR
VERSION
MACHINE
SRV-Y
SRV-Zl
<
<
(
) {
) (
>
>
>
>
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
) (
) {
) (
) (
SRV-11
) (
SRV-12
SRV-13
SRV-14
SUV IS
>
)
(
(
SRV-B
SRV-C1
BRV-X2
8RV-Z2
SRV-C2
SRV-10
<
)
)
)
i
(
(
SRV-16
<
SPN-1
SPN-2
SPM-3
SPN-4
SFN-5
SPN-6
SPM-7
>)
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
<
SPH-B
<
<
Oh
DIAGHOS
s i ID
VERSION
Or pm
DIAGNOS
MONITOR
ITEM
J2CT-1
J2CT-7
>
>)
J2CT-8
J2CT-9
J2CT-10
J2CT-11
J2CT-12
J2CT-13
J2CT-14
>
>
>
<
{
(
(
(
i
}
)
<
<
>
>
<
mr
TPS 0
:\AM o . 00 in /min
OPTION
VERSION
J2CT-2
J2CT-3
J2CT-4
J2CT-5
J2CT-6
>
Ell
r-i
FC&750RY-NQ3
<
SRV-Xl
SRV-W
::
MODEL
2006/12/13 09:44:55
II
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
203
Select DIAGNOS MONITOR
gggaa;
File Window Help
204
i VERSIQH
MACHOSIS MBflTOft j OPTION ! SERVO
MEMORY MONITOR 0ISP

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX
KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo 00
KKOOOGODD1 oooooooo 00
KHOOOOO0O2 csaoooooo DO
I KK00000003
ADDRESS
j KKOOOOOOOO
00000000
00
76543210 HEX
OOODOOOO
00
KHOOOOODOl OO&OOOOO 00
KKOOOQ00O2
gooDDCioo
KKOOOO0GO3
00000000
ADDRESS
i
00
00
76543210 HEX
OQOOOOOQ
00
j KHOOOOODOl oaoooooo
DO
I KKOOOOOGD2
oo
KKOOOOOOOO
00000000
KK00009003 oaoooooo 00

KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo GO
! KHOOOaOOOl oaoooooo 00
KH0QQ00D02 00000000 00
HHOOOO00O3 oaoooooo 00
MONITOR | SPTtffiLE MONITOR
j HARDWARE
I/O MONITOR I) ISP

SHORT
ADR35 FEDCEA98765432I0 HEX
XGQ510 OOOOODOOOOODOOOO
t/o nmttm ntsp

LONG
0
d
0
0000
X00520 oooooooooooooooo 0000
X005 3O ocscicic>eDOOQec?CidJCj<3 BOQG
XQ054Q 0000 ODDOOO DDQOQO 0000
SHORT
ADR55 FEDCSA98765432I0 HEX
SHORT
TOO110 aaloooolaloooaal 2 111

TOO120 OQDDOOOOODOOOQOD 0000
TOO 130 eoOOOO<MWob'OQ!l& 0000
TQ0140 tlrnntl&QaoomQ
XWm
MJWG
643
TOO 3 60
TOO 370
0
L<MQ
0 -2147463648
XD0150 looooooooo oooooo 6000 -32768
XOO16 D 0000000000000000 DODO
a
o
0
X00170 oooo C'Oooooo:D oooo 0000
ADRSS FEDCEA987654321D HEX
0000000000000000
DOOO
HO10 5 6
oooaaoooooaooooQ
DODO
SHORT
H01072 aoooaaooooaoooaa oooo

330108 ooooaoooooaooooo OOOO
L-mo
0
T&VG$MSW?G5*$ZIQ
8513
-mzomsm
MX
tom
SHORT
0
OmoOOOOMdO!iN0 oooo
OOOOOOCIOOOOOOOD
WWG
SHORT
8513
CF00 ~t2W
TOO 3 40 oootsoo0OODOOoid<fO 0000

T003SD OOOOOOOOOGOOCIOOO 0000
643
X00140 oooooooooo-oooooo 0000
3301040
wx
xm%%
ARR33 FEDCBA96765432 10 HEX

oooo DO lo IO-OOOD11 0283
X00110 0000000000000000 D000
X003.2Q ooooooooooftooood 0000
XOO130 oooooooooooooooo 0000
XOOIQO
ICOIIITGE.
0005
IB RSS F EDGE A98?6543310 HEX

TOO0OO ocNooooooloool11 0047
T0001D OO*DOOOOOODOOQC)00 0000
wmZQ
OOOO
TOO 03 0 aoooooooo-oooocioo 0000
SHORT
71
0
kms% FEDCHA987654S21P HEX

00530 aoooooooDoooQoao 0000
TOOB40 oaaoooooooooooao OOOO
00650 0000000000000000 OOOO
00860 0000000000000000 GOOD
SHORT
LONG
71
LW3
o
O
9
MEMORY MONITOR If RITE
ADD RESS
KHOOOQOOOO
7 6 $4.3 2 10
HEX
oooooooo DO
I/O MONITOR WRITE

SHORT
ADR38 FEDC BA987 65432 id HEX
R02 100 oooaoooooaaooooo DOOO
0
Q
P02101 0000000000000000 OOOO
LONG
0
DB1
r\f\
0%
DIAGNG5
~sTT[o
Or pm
VERSION
DIAGNOS
HOHIT OR
W 0
VV\A 0 . 00 lw /min
OPT ion
2006/12/13
SERVO
SPXHDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
09:45:13
WM
RWMMj
T POSITION [TR2]
fife
Vew
Window
Setup
Hep
BUFFER
POSITION
0.
xl
0.
21
B
-4.5
Cl
0.
21
0,
0,
Cl
0.
X2
0.
13. 38
X2
0.
22
15.14567
22
0.
0.
0.
C2
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
Q Zl
?
0 cl
B
X2
Z2
C2
0,
0,
O.
M,
0.
H
G
G 23
G
G
G 69.5G 97
<350 . 2 G113
0
0
0
0
0
0
SPDL
<15
o.
T , SPDLl
<15
8PDL2
<15
->->
G 40
G 64
TNo,
MAGAZHPKHo*
)
<
(
UNIT
FT /MIN
IM/MIN
IH/REY
* /min
0*
0*
0.
ci
C2
LOW
Tv SPDL Xi
FT/MXH T SJPDL 2]
*
1
MIN
O.
)
LOT 108
200
MXJT1
0,
12
100
FT/MIN Mt RPDL
Y~*
* /min
*
/min
0
0
Zl-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B~AX
Cl-AX
O.
IN /MIN
Z2-AX]
IN/REV
C2W-AX
nil P
n % HD
POSITION
0
G 98 G 20
G53. 5
G123 G
G13.1
MXN'1
0,
FEED
TNo.
0
IB(GENERAL
OUT )
05
0(
4,5
0,
0.
0.
0.
O
0
>
G 18
G 80
G
G 68 G 67
G123 . XG1X1
<
OFFSET LOW
0,
Cl
X2
Z2
02
W
0.
Y
Zl
B
<
COUNTER
<MOOflX LOW
S
0 F
REMAIN
0.
XI
0.
mro,
NEXT COMMAND LOW
0.
MACHINE
0 xi
1
0
0
0
0.
WMTM
NEXT COMMAND
XI
Y
0,
C2
vmm
wswmttm
SET UP
INFO.
rpm
PROGRAM
TOOL
vWo.ooC-COKD ,
*BS 0
2006/12/13
09; 44: 27
in /min
PARAM
DATA
In the 1131 Mode

205
Select DIAGNOS
DIAGNOS
DATA
TOOL
DISPLAY
I/O
LAYOUT
MAP
/' DIAGNQSISflJSER)
206
Bte View
Setup Window
Help
j iLfcUM :j ftLftRM KISIGHY j FLC SIGTOL
NO.
j
HEAD DATE
ALARM MESSAGE
TIME
TYPE
&
m
0%
VERSION
MB
ALARM
Orpm
TPS 0
VV\A o . 00 in /min
2006/12/13
09:44:40
ALARM
PLC
MAINTEN
RUNNING
GRAPHIC
DATA
ACCOMU *
HISTORY
SIGNAL
CHECK
CONTROL
MAINTE
ERASE
TIME
Select VERSION
mm
fi
:fl<y
Rl? Window Hgfe?
VERSION i DIAGNOSIS
KOHITQP.
! OPTION i SERVO
MONITOR f
SyrWLE
MONITOR I K&HDVaRE
KQHITOR
OH IT fan -ms13-22
MODEL FC&7509Y~lf03
SERIAL M73682I07 61
VERS ION
1OO1WOO0-B4A
MAIN-B
LG-ENG
LABDER-F
LADDER- B
LORE NO
1001W001-B0
1Q01W011-BO
10G1W37 4 - A131Q
10011937 4 - A1310
1001W011-
ITEM
\
374A23QQ
;
S
ITEM
MAIN- A
M Model
0373GM03300
VERSION
<
SRV-Zl
SRV-B
SRV-C1
<
)
)
>
>
>
<
c
(
{
)
)
)
)
8RV-ZZ
SRV-C2
>
SRV-W
SEV-X2
SRV-10
SRV-11
SRV-12
SRV13
8RV-14
SRV-' IS
SRV-16
SPN-1
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
(
(
SPN-2
<
<
SPN-3
SFtf-4
SEN- 5
SRN~6
SPN-7
SPN-B
MACHINE
MOTOR
SRV-X1
SRV-Y
>
>
)
)
>
>)
<
>
>
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
(
(
)
)
0%
DIAGNGS
sTf(a
Orpm
VERSION
DIAGN0S
MONITOR
J2CT-7
J2CT-8
J2CT-9
J2CT-10
J2CTr-.ll
J2CT-12
4J2CT-13
J2CT-14
>
TPS 0
V# 0.00 ill /min

OPTION
2006/12/13
09:45: 55
v :-S
J*
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
207
The other VERSION will now appear
VERSION
>
m
r\KJt
ITEM
J2CT-1
J2CT-2
J2CT-3
J2CT-4
J2CT-5
J2CT-6
VERSION
( one way you know you are IN the 1131 mode)
Select DIAGNOS MONITOR
-m*
/'DUMTO'UKff''
208
Fil- Window
j
|
VERSION
M&SH0SIS MONITOR j OPTION I
HE KORY HON I TOR D1SP

ADDRESS 765432 10 HEX
KHOOOOOOOO oacoQOQQ 00
HHD0000B01 O5-000000 00
KHOOOQODP2
HHQOO00OO3
ADDRESS
| KHOOOOOOOO
j
I/O KCNITOR DISF

ADR3S FEDA9876S4321C! HEX'
SHORT
0
XOO-SIO ooaooooooooooooo 0000
X0Q520 0000000000000000 0000
a
0000
HOO540 oa a a 00000000000 0000
76543210 HEX
o3oooooo 00
ADR3S EEX'CE A98765432 10 HEX

oooooo lo loo ODD11 0283
SHORT
XOOlQO
KKOOGGQOG2
00000000 00
KHOQOO0QO3 00000000
XOQ530 oooaDpdOdOooao
76543210 HEX
QOOO00OO
KHOOOOOQOL
oaoooooo
I KHOOOOOOOO
00000000
AD PS 5
HOG 1 40
1500150XD016O
XOG170
00
00
| KHQOOQQQ02 oa&Poodd 00
ADDRESS
j
|
00
765432 10 HEX
KHOOOOOGQO 00000000
00
KHOOOOOQOl OOOOOOOO 00
| KH000000D2
EEDCBA987 65432 10 HEX
a
LCWQ
643
X00110
00
I/O HOWltOR PISF

SHORT
APRS? FEW:!W*7$543210 HEX
TOO!10 ooloooololoooool 2111
8513
TOO120 0*0000000000000 OD 0000
D
Larc
643
oooooooooooooooo oooa
3CQOUO ooQQ0>OQ0Od$$QO09 0000
XOO 130 oooooooooooooooo 0000
00
OOQOOOOO
ADDRESS
SERVO MHJITOR ! SPINDLE MHUTOR KSRtrtraRE KOHITOR
aooooooo 00
oooooooo 00
KHOOOOOQOl
j KHOOOOOOOO
....
He|p
wm
3CKrooO$0$toQOOCMi&
000P
lloolUlaooooQD
CFO0. ?12544
mam
TWQBtsmmwzm
OQ oooooQOooooGioo
HEX
OOOO
SHORT
0
OODOOOOQOOOOOOOO
0000
mmmamwomw
QQQQ
TOO 370
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOD
0000
8513
TOO130
100140
YQ034Q
TOO 3 50
TQ030
LCW
-8220835i4
mm
0
0
mm
ADRSS F:EPCB&987&54'3 2 IP HEX

TOODOO 000000000!00011:1 0047
TO0D.1O 0000000000000000 0000
SHORT
GOOD
0000
AD ESS FEDCBASP76543210 HEX

70083 0 0000000000000000 0000
SHORT
a
a
Y00840 00000000*00000000 Oado

T0O850 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OQQO
TQ086O
0
0
0
SHORT
oooooooooooooooo 0000
0 -2147483648
lo oo 0-00000 a 00000 8000 -32768
000000000000000a 0000
APR3S FEPC8A987 6543210 HEX

HO10 40 oooooooooooooooo 0000
HO10 5 6 oooooooooooooooo 0000
SHORT
mm
0
daooOoOO 00
KH00QD00G3 00000000 00
HO IQ 7 2 0000 OPOPOOO 00000 0000

HO1088 oooooooooooooooo 0000
HE KORY KON I TOR WRITE

KHOOOOOOOO 00000000 00
I/O KONTTOR WRITE

ADRSS rDCBA9876S43210 HEX
SHORT
0
02100 oooooooooooooooo 0000
Q
R02 2Q1 OOOOOOOOOO-OOOOd 0000
Y00Q20 0000000000000000
TO0O9O
00000000a 00000 o o
71
71
0
hOm
LCN&
0
I
..
n
OH
DIAGHOS
s 1 i]D
VERSION
:VW 0
Or pm
BIAGNQS
MONITOR
flHk US
0 Gin /min
OPTION
i'>/>W < rf
vW'
v 1 v>
2006/12/13 109:46:52
I
: I
SERVO
SPINDLE
HARDWARE
LADDER
I/O
WHITE:
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
WRITE
CANCEL
Now the I/O WRITE & WRITE CANCEL appears
9 POSITION (TR1J
F?le View Setup- Window Help
.
POSITION
XI
45.912
0.
Zl
-0.30512
or
i
:
0.
13.38
22
15.14567 \
0.
Zl
0.
0.
0.
22
0,
gQ 121
Q 21
o.
0.
0.
0,
id
ci
0.
X2
Z2
c2
0.
0.
0.
0.
-i
UNo.
<
0*
0.
0{
i
0
0)
0
G 98
G 20
GS3.S
G123
4. S
0.
0.
Zl
B
Cl
X2
Z2
C2
0,
G13 < 1
! M* SPDL
0 MIN 1
0 FT /MIN M. SPDL |
0 MIN1 T , SPDL
0 FT /MIN ,
T SPDL 2 1
0 MIN*1
XL-AX]
0 FT /MIN
Cl)
T, SP'DLI
i Cl)
T SPDL2
:
(1)
I
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
TNO
>
LOW 109
|
Zl-Axj
Y-AX
IN /MIN
0.
0.
0.
12
MAGftZNPKNo.
> <
<
UNIT :
a
Cl
C2
m/&m
ci-nxjj
X2~AXl
/min
/min
IN/MIN
IN/REY
0.
0.
LOW
/min
Q*
Z2~K&|
C2~AX|
1
'
W 10*
POSITION
SI [
SET UP
INFO,
G 40
6 64
OFFSET
0,
~>~>
<
> <
6
0.
0 F
M
GOG 18 G
G 23
G SO G
G
G
G 66 G 67
G 69 . 5G 97
G123. 1G111 G50*2 G113
FEED
TNO
160
(GENERAL
OUT )
<MQDAL>
NEXT COMMAND LOW
MAIN
MACHINE
WNo*
:
:
!
COUNTER
cl
X2
C2
w
0.
NEXT COMMAND
0.
0.
Cl
X2
C2
i
I
BUFFER
o.
xi
0r pm
PROGRAM
#A 0 . 98in/min
P1
$0M
ir
100
200
o
0
0
I
I
I
I
I
C-COND
P ARAM
DIAGNOS
DATA
I
I
Vm
2006/11/30 j III 01: 29
DATA
TOOL
DISPLAY
I/O
LAYOUT
MAP
209
(Important to remember when changing R parameters)
: .% ;;.v: vXvv.:y...
Matrix now goes 5 places right of the decimal.
0
0
0
0
i'
TOOL'
itlilArNnCN/MAVFD
(AKEgj::
210
I Fife
......
'
->
'
'
1
1 pg
IB
Wm6:m Hdp
VEBSIQH
?
DIJU2TOSIS MONITOR j OHIUH j SERVO MDKETOR SMMDIJB BOOTTOR { HSSDMKE 1MHITOR
HEHQP-Y
ADDRESS
HHOOOODOOO
BGNI70F DI3P
76543210 HEX
GGOOQQOG
00
I/O WCNITQsR BWF

ADRSS FE0CBA9876S43210 HEX
SHORT
XQ0 170 OOOOGOOOPODOOCl-QO
0000
7274496
o;
W1:1000 000 Q1 oooooo oo 00

HHOOOOOOOa oooooo-oo 00
XO0180
XO019O
XQQ1A0 Q<WNSDOOOK>OOQOCK>
0000
0000
KH0OOOODQ3 OOOOOOOO QQ
AH D RESS 76543210 HEX

HHOOOODDOO OOOOOQOG 00
HHOOOOOQQl ODOOOODO DO
ADRSS FJE&C8*9e?6S43210 HEX

MOO IDO QooooolQleooooli 0233
X00110 oaooO loaooOoo# 0200
SHORT
MH00000002 oooooooo 00
X00120
oaooooocwjioooooioo
MHG00OOOO3 0000000=0 00
XO013D
OOOGOOO0OGOQ0*G
ADDRESS
76543210 HEX
HHOOODOOOO GOOOOQOO 00
MHQQOOOOQ1 80000080 00
1101111 006 F
QO&OOOQgO
00000000000000-00
33555075
0000
0000
OOCHQOOOOOOOOOCKK3
0000
QoooooDD
00
00130
00140
000*0000000000000
OOOO
OOOO
MHGQ0DOOQ3 0-0000000
00
XD015D 10=0=000000 000000=0
8QO0
MH00O0OOO2

HHDOODDOOO OOOOOQOO 00
ADRSS FEIKBA9S76S43210 HEX

>10011.0 oooooolooooooooo 0200
oooooooo 0=0000000 OOOO
00
HHOOOOOOG2 oooooooo 00
X0013O o0=0=0ooooooooooo-o 0000
MHOO0DDOO3 000000=00 00
XO014O 000000000=000000=0 0000
39H0OOOQOO1 0000000=0
XQ0120
76543210 HEX
HBOOOO0OO0 0OOOOO99 00
ADRSS FEDCEA937654321D HEX
R02392 ooomoolleoidlo 1CCA

R02 3 93 ooaooooooo loolo=o 002 4
YOD34Q ODOGOOOOOOGOOOO
0 -2 147483 648
-327 SB
SHORT
512
0
LOMO
51.2
0
Q
SHORT
SHORT
-e22083Se4
hatm
0
ADSSS FEDCBAWR? 6543210 HEX

ODOOd =0=000000000000000 QQ'OD
OOQQQ fcO0oa&oOQr$&OQ 0000
00000 0000000000000=000 0000
0000.0 =000000=0=000000000 0000
SHORT
ADRSS FE&CBJM7 6543210 HEX

YDDDO0 0000000=001000111 0047
SHORT
:
ham
0
0
0
Y0OOIQ =0000000000000000
00020 0=000000000000000
0000
0000
71
0
0
00030
0000
0000000000000000
i
LONG
4673 I
0
0
GOOD
Y00350 OOOGGOOOOOOOGO 0000

TOD3 6.0 OOOOOOOQGOGOOOGO 0000
YD03 7d 0000000800000000 GOOD
LOWS
I/O BCWITOR WRITE
tCEHORY MONITOR WRIT!

ADDRESS
SHORT
mm
ifjcwiTOE
S FEDC-BASO? 65432 .10 HEX
ham
643
512
ADRSS F E DCBAS8 76343 2 10 HEX

XO012D
i/o
SHOW
AMS* FEDCB AB7 $S4 3210 BEST
YOO1I0 ODOlGQlOO1.00000 % 12 41
4673
0
mm# o m ommtmmmm o QOQO
0
0013O 0-OGOO o D= cooa o-oooo 0000
rm i4Q i ioo % i xioGQoaooQ CF OD ; -12S44
LONG
W.
71
L me
7370
36
t\/\/
10%
ITIJi
VERSION
TPS 0
2006/11/30 11:05:09
W\A 0 . 98 ill /min
Orpm
><<>**
DIAGUGS
nwX<t<uWAvAvhMvM<vi
jjMgtr
m
DIAGNOS
MONITOR
OPT I
c **iv
SERVO
SPXKDLE
HARD1
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR
LADDER
I/O
WRITE
MONITOR
WRITE
amCEL
Stay out of here unless instructed to.

Monitor all addresses in this area. X,Y,M,D etc.
O!AGNOSS(MAKR|
1 Fie Wndaw Help
Mats MMKOSIS M3KH0R OfflOM j SEKVO HOHTTOR j SMHBUB MMHTOR j MKSDlfSEE KHUTOR
KEHOY MONITOR DI3P
ADDRESS
76S43210 HEX
HHOOQ0DOOO
oooooooo 00
J3H0QQQQQQ1
OOOOOOP'Q
QO
| HHOOODOD02
00000000
00
HB000DD003 OOOOOOOO 00
HHOOQOOOOO
I/O HONITOF !D ISP
ABRSS
FEE>CBjL98?654321fli
I/O
HE I
0000;
TOD140 1loo llllOOQOdOOO CFDO
SHORT
QO
JLDRSS FE D CBMS 76$ 43 210 HEX

ZOO IDO 000800 iQlOOOOOll 0283
ZOO110 OO 0000 lOOOOOOOOO 02 00
| HH00000002
00000000
I ZH00000003
OOOOOOOO
00
00
ZOO120
ZOO130
HHOOQOOOOO
76543210 HEX
oooooooo 00
TOQ120
HHOOO 00001
00000000 QO
X0Q13Q
HHQ0000003
00000000 00
oooooooo 00
ZOO ISO lo a DOO OO0OOOOO0O 8000; 32768
HHOOQQQOQl
ADDRESS
moomoooz
|
AX' D RESS
76543110 HEX
HHOOOODOOO ODOOO0-&O 00
| HH0Q8QQ001 oooooooo 00
0000000000000000
oooooooooooooooo
OOOO
0000
1DRSS F.E D CB A98 76543 2 10 HEX

oaooooooooooaooo 0000
Q0O0>PO0O0PQ0Qa00
512
0
AftftSS FE DCBA9878S43 210 HEX
512
Hfl00GQ002
oooooooo 00
ZOO120
0000
ZOO130 o oo ooooa oooooooo 000#
0
0
HHOaOODOOQ
oooooooo 00
TOO 14.0
OPPdPdOdTOQQOdPd
0300000000000000
00 QO
-#22083184
km%s Tmcmmi6B4mio HEX

OO O Q O0=00 OO 00-00 OO 00:00
SHORT
'>000
00000
OOO00CJ0Q0OQ00DQO
00:00
0
0
000.00
MDQQQ0QQOQBO(3
OOOD
wm
o
0
ABORT
YDOOOO 0D0O10'0001000111. 0547 ,'WQQm . m&ammmmmm moQ

TO002 0 000000000000000 0000
T0OO3O 080Q00;OO OOQ Si>0 Q O 0000
tows'
0
0
0
..MMHSS FEDCBA9876S43210 MX.
512
SHOT*?
00000
wm
SHORT
-12544
mi.
OOOQQ wQomQQommoQ
Y00350 000o40ft60e4000 Q0OQ

TO03 60 .00000000000000.00: O'QOO
Y00370 000000:0000000000 0000
QOOeODlQOOOOQOOO 0200;
4673
0
0 -214748364#
QOQO
LC0
4673'
700340 OBOOOCWksopOOODOO OOOO
L.om
ZOO 140 ooooooooooooooao 0000
ZOO110
SHORT
OD loo lead ioootscJt
Mm
LOMO
33555075
643
SB!
'
0000;
ooer
00
7654321.0 HEX
mo110
7274497
oooooooo
oooooooo
ADDRESS
MSP
JJQNITOE
mSS FH>CBJ8?6S432iO HEX
1241
TOOtZO'
OOOO
TOO130 oooooiooododooo . 'OG0B
ZOO170 0008000000000001 0001
zooiio 0000000001loin i
ZOO190 OQODOOOo a ooooooo
ZOO1AO aa & o oo oa O Dooaa o o
LCM&-
SHORT
hotm
/!
mis
0
0
0
:V:iQ.-:|
1
I/O HONITOR WITH
tCEHORY KGHITOR URITE

ADDRESS
7654.3210 HEX
HHQOCJOODOO OOOOOOOO 00
JfcDRSS f EDCBA.9876543210 HEX

02392 00o.lt lOOtl 00 Id 1-0 ICCA
02393 oao&oooo&olooloo 0024
SHORT
7170
38
LONG
2$m$m
Ig
kt>m3 FEDCB AR876S432 10 HEX
10%
DIAGROS
MB
Or pm
VERSION
BIAGN05
MONITOR
mm
V# 0 . 9 Bin /Akin
OPTION
mu.
2006/11/30 11:06:56
jr
SERVO
SPXRDLE
H.
MONITOR
MOHITOR
HbHITOR
JWARE:
LADDER
I/O
MONITOR
.WRITE
irnmmSM
CmCEL
211
Use this area for forcing.

You may force up to 4 addresses.
XOO170-1 forces on
XOO170-0 forces off
Powering off the control cancels all forces. Use this button to remove forces. WRITE CANCEL then INPUT.
mM
212
Fie Window Help

VERSION DIAGNOSIS MOUTIR | OP110*1 j SERVO MfMTTOR
MEMORY MONITOR MSP

ADDRESS
76543210 HEX
HH0000000Q 80000000
00
HHQQO0DQQ1 90000000 00
HH00000002 oooooooo 00
MH00000D03 DOGGOOOO 00
Alt DRESS
76543210 HEX
MlMTfOR Hmmm Kfl&WTOJR
i/o MONITOR \m?

ADRSS F E DCBA9876S43 210 HEX
SHORT
200170 OGOQOQQOO OOOOO 00 0000:
200180 ogdopood d 111111 POST
K00190 0000000000000000 0000
2001AO ClQ GO OOOOO DOOOOOO 0000
ADRSS FE DCBA9876543 210 HEX
SHORT
o-ooooooo 00
OOOGOOGO 00
oooooooo 00
>700110 ooooooioaoooaaoo 02.00

X00120 000000000.0000000 0000:
512
0
200130 0000000008000000 0000
76543210 HEX
ADRSS FEDCBA9876543210 HEX

200120 OODGOOQOO-OOOOO'OO 0000
SHORT
HHOQOOGOQ2
ADDRESS
MHOQQOOOQQ GOOGOOGG
00
HHOOOOOOOl 00000000 OP
200130
OOOOPOQO&ODOOO&O
HHQ0000002
oooooooo 00
200140
ooooooooooooooao
HHOOOOOOOl
OOOOQOOO
00
200150
IGOQOOOCIQ
ADDRESS
76543 2 iO HEX
BHOOQODOOa 0GGOGOOO 00
HHOQPOOPPl 000000-00 00
ADRSS FEDCB A9876543 210 HEX
00
HHOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOG 00
200140 0000000008000000 0008
MEMORY MONITOR HR2TE

765432 ID HEX
HHQQOOOOQd 80000080 00
LONG
0
512
4673
SHORT
LONG
0
0OOOOOOOOOOODOOO
0000
Q0DO
ADRSS FEDCBA9? $543-210 HEX

00000 000000-000000=0000 0000
ooooo mmommzQQmm&o oo&Q
00000 0000008000000000 0800
SHORT
0
0800
ADRSS FEBCB A98? 6543 2 10 HEX

YD 0000 000000800 loo 0111 0047
TOGO IP aooaaoooooaaooeo 0000
700020 0000000000008000 0000
SHORT
YD DO30 8000008000008000 OGDD
C0OOQ080OGGO00OO
-822083564
Y00370 0000000000000000
Y003 60
LONG
4673
0
0
OOOOO
LONG
SHORT
0000
0
CFOO -12544
ADRSS FERCBM87 65432 10 HEX
0 -2147483648
SHORT
HEX
1241
0000
Y0D340 OOOGOOOOOOOOOGOO 0000

YDQ35Q 0000000000000000 0000
ooooo oo 3000 -32768
200120 aooooaaoa-oooaooo 0008

200130 O0OGOOOO0OOOOODO 0008
ADDRESS
ADRSS FEJ>CBA9e76S432iQ
YOD13LO coo 1 J j 1 c-o Lcocoo 1
YOG12 Q <3-6OOOOQOOOQOCOO
YOG130 oooooooooooaoooo
TOO140 noollliooQOODOO
urn
33555075
0000
00OO
512
OOOOQOOO
20011.0 OOOODGlOODDOGGOD 0208
! HHOOOOOOOl
7274496
643
HHOOOOOOOl
i/o MONITOR vmp

Lorn
2001 DO QQOOOOlOlOOOOOll 0233
>
111
HHOQQOO0OO 0-0000000 00
HHOOQOPOOl
j SpntDUi
LONG
M. o
0
0.
LONG
71
71
0
0
I/O MONITOR RRITE

ADRSS FEDCBA93765432 ID HEX
SHORT
:'h
LONG
7370
36
ooollloolloololo ICC A
ooooooooo-o loo lo o 002:4
\J
10 k
\J
mi
S3 H P
rpm
VV'-A 0 . & Bln /mill

:<,:*//// vpx
I*
. : x vy,:
JX;
;;
flft, 0
:v$ .<:
2006/11/30 11:02:36
:H:X -WVV*.
iDRESS
I?
'
ADDRESS
>
4-
Use this area for searching R parameters. Force under I/O Write.
Use this area for changing R parameters.
PIC PARAMETER (DATA TYPE)

ADDRESS
ACT J Vli
M KM OK Y
K 2350
STANDARD
CON.Ml: NT
H 2830
**
Long type
R 2380
I
2880
1
2
3
4
5>
213
R 2390
R 2890
>
*7
R 3980
s.
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE SKIP SPEED
ns m /
cn i
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERPAID
DISTANCE OF THE TOW SENSOR SKIP AND DEC.
2 AXIS SKIP POSITION
ni
1 AXIS START POSITION: Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE
V AXIS START POSITION OF TOOL LENGTH MEASURE
X AXIS START POSITION Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE
TOOL
BREAK AGE ALARM LIMIT
300
17
<
25000
20000
(7874)
214
Long type
PLC MIA dm TYPE) PARAMETER
c:omm
1
STANDARD
RL
BELUKE ATC BLOCK l
AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS
Si
>
BHBO KB ATC BLOCK l
AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS
$2
BEFORE ATC BLOCK I
AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS
S3
BELL) V
ATC BLOCK 1
54
BE LUKE AtC BLOCK 2
55
BELOKB ATC BLOCK 2
*7
BbLURb AtC BLOCK 2
61
hi
BBLOKB ATC BLOCK 1
SB
BEL 0KB A 1C BLOCK 1
50
10
BE I '0Kb ATC BLOCK 1
60
1i
BEL UK B ATC BLOCK 2
61
12
BEL UKB: ATC BLOCK 2
62
13
BbLUKb ATC BLOCK 2
63
U
15
lb
17
64
OOMBHf
RS>
mmm
Short type
...
FIX BIT PARAMETER <RB1 RB8>

KB No.
i
BIT
COMMENT
PLC DEVICE
RI 1156
0
1
2.
3
4
5
6
7
0
ENABLE E NOR ILL TOOL MEASURE

TYPE OF FEEDBACK X
TYPE OF FEEDBACK V
TYPE OF FEEDBACK 1
TYPE OF FEEDBACK 4
VALID
INVALID
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
INCREMENTAL
INCREMENTAL
INCREMENTAL
INCREMENTAL
3
4
c
D
7
8
9
A
MAGAZINE MAX TOOL NUMBER
< NOTE 1
Ml OH NG. MAGAZ INE TOOL DETECTOR
D1SAVA I'LABLE A V A I TABLE
*}
4
5
SELECT TEE T CODE *M06T**"
NOT *M06T**T***
AXIS MOVE AT ATC BY PLC
2 PALLET CHENG ER
<N0TE2>
ONLY PROGRAM BY PLC
VALID
INVALID
Rill 57
n
3
4
5
G
i
"AUTO "OFF
AUTO "ON
LH SAVA 1LABLE AVAILABLE
COOLANT MENU AT POWER ON

ONE CYCLE SW. OF PALLET CHANGER
TOOL MES. EQUIPMENT AT ATC
ARM
FIX
*T
>
8
9
A
B
C
El A ATC METHOD
T CODE
MO 6
AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT ATC

AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT PALL ETCH ANGE
Z-XY
Y X
XV z
3
4
i:
B
E
F
0
I
2
3
4
5
6
D
E
F
mom
If 1001
Ml 002
If 1003
Mi 004
SO 005
10006
Ml 007
10008
111009
Ml 010
in oi i
Ml 012
Mi 013
MIDI 4
Ml 015
Ml 016
Ml 017
MI018
Ml.019
Ml 020
Ml 021
MI 022
Ml 023
Ml 024
Ml 025
Ml 026
MI 027
Ml 028
B1029
Ml 030
M 103 1
215
216
Short type
PLC-CMN PALAMETER TABLE
R
El T
2'M.10
3
4
u
I;v
8
9
n
3301
D
L
F
0
i.
3
4
&
6
f
9
a
B
C
1)
COMMENT
MANUAL MEASURE
TOOL 11)
VARIABLE TIMER
VI 00 ONLY
Vi 00 ONLY
Vi 00 ONLY
m: CONTROL.
FMS PALLET ID
EMC CONTROL ID
RS232C 1 PORT TYPE
TOOL ID R RESISTOR LOAMTHERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFF SET
THERMAL DISPLACEMENT MACRO VARIABLE WRITE
VI 00 ONLY
TOOL ID SERIAL TYPE
TOOL ID EUCHINER
TOOL i, ENGTK TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
TOOL LENGTH AT WRITE
TOOL DIAMETER AT WRITE
TIME TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
LIFE AT WRITE
FLAG TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
FLAG AT WRITE
ID NO. AT WRITE
DATA AT MANUAL WRITE
PROTECT SPINDLE TOOL AND NEXT TOOL NO. OF MUTE
READ AND WRITE TO LIFE CONTROL DISPLAY
READ AND WRITE TO ID NO. GROUP NO,
TOOL DIAMETER READ AND WRITE TOOL COM, TYPE A
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
TOOL DATA
COMPENSATION
COMPENSATION
TOOL DATA
INVALID
TOOL DATA
INVALID
TOOL DATA
INVALID
ALL DATA
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
VALID
INVALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
LIFE CONTROL
OFF SET NO.
OFF SET NO.
LIFE CONTROL
VALID
LIFE CONTROL
VALID
LIFE m TOOL
VALID
ONLY FLAG
217
9 9LZ~ 0009
ItfOHS
OS T 002
W
.]
/'
\>0
I
/
/
\s
j
i
9ESS9 ItOICI mWI 88CKS 9iSm)I ISUCOI
DN01
tOCtilt 80988C8 9Uiii.9I
J.80HS
CCM-SSCC f9880K9 SEitUni 9Stj*893 I160L89CS
t-C8If'iLC i.01
8t9(.8t.fi:
POOO oooo-oooooooooooo o>TOOX

X2H
I Z t 8 91 Zt *9 8ZI 9$Z Z\S KOI
St-QZ 960
c6I8 t89I
Q9LZZ
......
99LZ~ 0008 ooooooooooooocc ~
os T 002
o-ooooooooooooooo
OH COX
0000
S1
mu
0000 ooooooooooooO'irevr'oc 1 002

0000 0-000000 O OOOO 0 0 CO OCT 002
JH o i "O' $ 9 L 9 ms ;> 131 s ?; 
ja
JA
MR-JT-CT
SAVING PARAMETERS
221
222
MR-J2-CT DRIVES
Wm
'
.. ..
I IfiaSt i
I
is
m*
BIS MU
V-
*- '
m a1
III
#4
s
ft
K*!W. f
mlmM
|MJUtCt
KPS
.f it
m I
if
Kl
Hv'ft
X.
fi
JNSH
iftce
9
iiaiisiP
S fee Cl
91
:
!5'i
Mi
Mil
SM
s?
as
&
mmmmmmmMMMmMMMmmfmmMMmMMtlMM u*M
c
xt
is-
PMSMMMMW
wyy>ywsyyyyyyy%yy>%y>wyy
:<
MMMIMMMMM
iMMMiiMiiMM
a
wmt
>Xx?K-S
Kg
ss
K3
i*:-
>
sm
2fc
X-.
SSSB
x*
I1mMMfMWiWMMMWM0MlWMMM
VJ
SS23KK
iS
tSxS
<-xc
>*X\
MWW1MWWWWMWW1
K
/,TL
,sv
s?
>X'
*3
ssSS
X><J
*3
>Xr
SSS
rim W
-J53
l#L
&
mm
$3
f:Fil
te#
W'
lat*%M
MSM
||S
sS
--r!=?,0
>>Xx-
L%
;n
|jli
3SKS&;
3?
flfel
J&m
m m fil
&*
ViSlI IOTS
*!SlfSMmmmm.Itafe*
#P?
\
:Xx?
>y$
rm
/r
HD
co
V*A*TJ>--*.*>
223
224
mmmmmmmmmrnmmmmm
352
SR
KaK>
'
K
2SJ
<*
$1
tgj
Intel LN+Modem
PC Card
S| WinZip
tfj Documents
Main
<
jS
Q
Settings
iU Run...
| l|yil
Shut Down...
Hltari
MS-DOS Prompt
CS
.:
illtlieJ
a
f>.
/S*
/' ftp/
Hi
E
&
P
4#
gi
MS
/I
Printkejj
Internet Explorer
-
Ml
ill
'
g Startup
g WinZip
Pin:
Help
_g
,:
-'
g NetOp Remote Control

g Online Services
lg ORiWOCO
MMMMI
Lg KEY HISTORY
IS MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
Programs
MB
mmmmm
g MAZATROL FUSION 640
-ri /
Desktop On-Call for Masak
ig
ig
Outlook Express
(oQ Windows Explorer
tills
mi
IffI'FjFile
(S.)S efcup lWlMonitor.
_*i
|>r*MMtsp
lAJAIarm Qpiagncsis
B
i.i,
A'-0~:<V, ',,
'
:- :
cplppt SetUp-Axis
CptT rn A vie Tnh
Select
1 abs'K"
HHBBBHBMHi
UIIAlifUipSAI*
!
Siaiii*
;.*
:.
225
ij'Aaa iAeUACTUvAy fvu,;:
IBIBiiS
226
MR-J2-CT Setup Softwaie (Foi MG)"MAGAZINE[Rotary Axis Spec.)"
| (F)File
(S)Setup (MlMonitor (A)Alarm (D)Diagnosis fPjF'arameter [T )T est-operation | (U)SetUp-Axis (H)Help
MAGAZINEQJ
Axis Select(C)
Axis Spec.(S)
&
a*-
lisffiir
HH
1 n Si
a
MU
mm m9m m
AMR.J2CT Setup Software 1st Axis*

(P)Fite Setup
(Monitor
Liner Axis Spec.
(A)Alartn (PPsgnoss (P)Paramefcer (T)T$$fc-operat:iof OUjSettfe-Ms (HjHefci

L
'
BB
'L.ijj
Il
S HHB
MBS
w
I
:Krh:
nil
niH
:
ills lit
i
227
SELECT PARAMETER
228
r.
o'
iPV.Vd'WfcSf
UTO ,
_______
1
~
sif
Pa.aUe
sr-ss:
Nuirfee N-srmc
itw:iX,
Rtename ;
'.m;:
1
'
::.V >: :siiPs/:sV::::;-S::::;;

j:>:
*i*ui
sIHjHgsp
...
llli!
As
TTr:
1 1 in#
~ ~trr
i
SIS
~*1
SiSSSKSS
S':
PARAMETERS ARE BROUGHT OUT ;EROM THE MR-12 DRIVE
''ISIS',;
S : i:SS.
'
SS
i;
'
:
': '
'
.-
wmm -
: SS'SS'S
. 'S'.
'
SSiSSsii:'
V/f kEfat)
Detailed):
!.
Comparel
ADS Poi
---:
r~~~.....
,
___
_
S- S'
SSliS
Al read
li
::
iiss
>*<
0>
<
'M
'*
<
<
h- "
PMNM
wv*$m.
Si \
iMsm
is:
lialSeifl
Chants fed
'
Erd&l
Press All read
Pop up window will appear....maintenance; All parameters will be read. Is it O.K.?

Press O.K.
Parameters are brought out from the MR-J2 Drive
- . ~ .. ..*
.I' l
i
M
TTY
ni.
(P)Fite Setup ('Monitor fAjAlarm (Diagnosis (Pparm&ter (TiTest-operation (UJSetiWs (HjHete
mrnmm
s
WtfM
in
Parameter table-
aasa
sH
,.
sap
" '-
File name:
j Nurrfce Name
Set value
U rd
Setting rang
'
[
'll
'
-J
111:
Yvi
. . ...
i
!
i
iTCTl
':
ill
T%*i\
/|
.?
:D:i:?5K:::S::::::sS;-S:::::i:s
3
I:
t\
Please turn eft the servo ampfe after seating the parameter vath the 8,t- tga
~r
WrrtelWf
Detail Inf (I)
Ccrrcafe.10
AJl read
\\
1
|1,
-
'
I
All wrlJ
iiilili111
Change kill]
'
Mial Sei||]
End)
iP
- I
T
:
SELECT File
SELECT Save
'.
229
11
230
mmam
Save in-
pINGSTONfEl
zi
*>
is O in*
:Zd LADDER
My Accent
mi
m\
Docurnesnte
s***
!
'
Desktop
3
9>
Z 1
~
My Documents
ji
~~
__
_
.
My Computer
:
$vto
fife HiSfn:
Save as (ypts
My Nelwoik
Races
*pfl*
zJI
Cancel
i
'
. _ . ;
'
VrsteMI
Competed
Drtrfw..m
iia|fl*(
AJ\ffltfQ
All >e4*
-J
chaw lastly
U:;
MSi
i
Save in (Where you want to save) C: or E: etc.

File name (A name you will remember)
Press Save
Parameters should now be saved.
Use Windows Explorer to verify.
hfcidSeS
'"'Si
5r
wis*>
Swi
~v
,';
2S a'H
Cra1
I
I$
V*
MR-J2-CT
UPLOADING PARAMETERS
231
232
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MGJ"MAGAZIHEfRotary Axis Spec.}" - [Parameter list}

& (FJFile (S)Setup iMJMonitor (AjAlarm [DJDiagnosis IPjFarameter il)T est-operatiori (J ]S etU p-Axis
liiaiPi
, [H)H elp - It?!
MlltSm
*1
'
V-j:
si
ave[S]
intfP)
ir
table
''A''
u.
mmm
4.
HE
File name :
vOi
\<* s.i
vj
nd(Q]
,;
Setting range
Unit
Set value
..........
.............
............
------
IS
v;
II
Select Open on File

......
Fab
. i
.......
- ..
Iill
m
m
T"
II
4-
4-
i
\
\
t,
tfi
1
I
I
II
|1 >
M
m
&
!
s mmmmmmsmm
/;Y;
!!/
.
.
the
Please turn off the servo airolifier after.. setting the. parameter.. with
:
ppp
.
..-i :<W.
. V V-V-
>)
I/-1
Ev
!.
Detail Inf . (I)
Compare (C)
;Ml
II
m:
:iV
Write <W)
V/iM.
V,
Parameter value
'v:
<
!>)
'ii;
;<.rj
i,
X;
d;
Set
read.P):| all
I
|Change list,L)g Initial
taissi C 8 p $$-1IIp pi |-/k) % End(Q.)
:
writ>I;tKj
V-
ABS Pos. Repair (A)
sign.
Hi!
'Ay
/y
>::pp
i&n V
M
Vs'l.f
:i
.
; iSlssSi-ii
'
..
*V
rr
1#
'
(E)
S:
vl
-M
.....
......
|pfgy
S;.
JT
.Lr''.
aaa
,
S / ;w
j
'<* ~> C
S.F .! .1 ..
\* t
(F)Fite (S)Setup tMQMonibor IA)Alarrn (OSQnosis (P)Parafiteter (T)Tet-operaUi (ytSeit-A>S (H)Heb
i
I. '!.
a.
>.
dBBhiwm..
: Parameter table'*
Mi pl ??F:ci I i
'
"'
'!j
Unit
Set value
[*
S etting range
iu
.
'
WW
.;:
'
.:
mm
_ ___':'WM
'
Mm
Wiimao
Detail W.flJ
.
........
....---
mmmm
Compare
& Parameter
the
*?
sm
rWSKKHHSfSBSm
I
....
lililiiliililllP
liigliiM
All vwtdUS)
AJI read
Change Mi)
initial $e
I MMi : ~
* * ** . I
<*
I::
.;
MM.
mm
SELECT Open on the File Tab
'
M
-
.;
4-Sit
Mil
II
End)
l:>
ijil
1
l
,i
bdl
lil
| Fie** turn fc the servo ** mm
r-r~
..........
--------- ......
-
. . .. . . . . . . .
i
US
tSSSf *
'
[ Nurrtbe Nam
wsmBL
......
.
~
i
Fib name :
':
S
:
233
234
locfc in'
'*&
Jli
KINGSTON | |
** ia
tit M*
SB!
Op.-n
JjLADWA
mMnlH i
MyRflccrt
Documents;
>i
SelirpgTiwia
:
D GSkkp
Hj
-
OP
My Dcewients
&
ili
My Computer
Mjp Network
Races
Opsn
Fite name;
Fites oHype:
Cancel
jfcprm
TSPSTS'
TOelST
D<W Inf (il
i';S
HI
mm
..
j
I
saasifflis
Mit&m
mmm
Cbanpe
Intel Ss1((
irnm
WM1
mmmm
Look in (Where you saved it to) C: or E: etc
File name (the name you would remember)
Press Open
5>* MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MS)
-"MAGAZINE (Rotary AKIS Spec.)" - [Parameter list]

(P)Parameter (I)Test-operation (U]SetUp-Axi$ [H]Help
11 f)File (S)Setup (M)Monitor (A'jAIarm
[jyDiagimg
~
Q
Magazine Selectede?
Eile name : ft: \INDEX. PRM
Parameter table
Numbe Name
:Motor series
Setting range
Ifni
HE
0000-FEEFh
: Regenerative
:
1
0000-FFEFh
: Motor gear ra
1-32767
: Machine gear :
:Feed pitch
1-32767
36.
1-32767
1
I
i
deg!1-32767
: In-position Verify-enoi
: ftuto tuning
: Position lo
&
#007 #008 #01 9 #020 #021 #022
: EMG-decel t
Please turn off the servo ai%
Write <W)
Conpare<C)
Detail Inf . <I)
|All write
ftll read<P)
!C
0000-EFEFh
4-1000
ii
0-20000
0-32767
1 ShQvhidPjffeijyices
0000
: Motor series
*MSR
OK
#001
IndexJPRM
'at
#001 |*MSR
#002 *RTY
#003 *PC1
#004 *PC2
#005 *PIT
#006 INP
#007 ftTTf
#008 PG1
#009
#010 EMG
- lr?( Xj
<K)
I Change list (L) I Initial
is. Repair (ft)
Set(E)
End<H)
235
0 Press Compare
mm
236
Go to SetUp-Axis and change Drive

Select Compare Again
237
[Patamelei fell HM.igixi

|'R]Parameter ;jT)Test-operation:;t;|tJjSetli)pAxis::::''!'(H)Help
1* MR-J2-CT Selup SoHwaie (For M6] -"IMDEX TABLE(Rolary Axis Spec )"
238
it1*
If] File [SjSetup [M )M onitor (A'lAlarm [D]Diaqnosis
,;v :; -:; v;,,,.

Bile name
/V
Parameter table
Mm
Set value nit
Setting range
;w i;
ft!
&
:Motor series
0000
0000-EEEEh
-RTY
degenerative option type
0000
jOOOO-EFEEh
#004
#005
#006
#007
#008
#009
#010
: Motor gear ratio
*PC2
: Machine gear ratio
*PIT
deed pitch
360
Please
sWI
AT
:Auto tuning
PG1
: Position loop gii f 3
EMG
: EMG-decel time
>.
4-
; 1-32767
'w.rwi iv*vw
...
turn off the servo auplif :*
3ud /sec
il
JA
*MSR
'A
v>
Coirpar e
<
All read(P)
I m II
%m
Ml write <K)
hBS Pos . Repair "(B.)
ai
.Vrf.r'* IW' Vt
'
&i i
WM
1 Change list (L ) I Initial
|||
Set<E)
j?
Be tail Inf . (I)
M
i
WMim m
:v.-;s
Write <W)
>
|3 mmi
1 1 "|
~
raft
(&MA
II
0-32767
-WMfssOK
0000
: Motor series
4-1000
JJ4iV
#001
I
I
m
sSSSSe
|
a
0000-EEEEh
sec
'";|
a$
1-32767
0-20000
__
"
m flOOOdeg 1-32767
/erifiJ was completed. t

,
\
1111* if i A::
4
&
*17
SMMMN
mm ;
1-32767
deg
Parameter-maintenance
MM
Wmm,
*MSR
: In-position det<
>
|IS
K'
#001
#002
#003
INP
'
vV;
Numbe Name
*PC1
JffJ
'
Endra)
A-A:
H'
Press ALL Write

A
V-
|||MFN2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ"IHDEX TABLE[Rolary Axis Spec.)*' - [Parameter, list]
k.V EJFile
[S'jSetup [M)Monitor (AjAlarm (D)Diagnosis i'PIParanieter OTTest-operation fiJISetUp-Axis [HlHelp
-Ifll'/
*1
m
Pararneter table
File
narK
$3
A:\iNBEX.PKM
X X
Nunbe
#001 *MSR
#002 *RTY
#003 *PC1
#004 *PC2
#005 *PIT
:Motor series
: Regenerative option type
:
l
: Motor gear ratio

: Feed pit ch.
0000
: In-positio:
#007
ATU
: Auto tunin
#008
PCI
: Posit ion 1
EMC
1 1-32767
1-32767
ideg
1 1-32767
gj
i it
>
!i
Cl
1
i
bi\4:r*'3 tl\t 9 JLV/M
All parameters will be written. I sit OK?
- :v
fflrag
mi k im
;
N;..
it nit*
.AY-
0000-EFEEh
V:
* * }?'/$<
I#
XT;
1
V
iSi
:
1 $$/ii
|
lliiif iim
a*
Write <W)
0000
Motor series
*MSR
Detail Inf. (I)
Compare (C)
0000-FFEFh
MS Pos. Repair
0-20000
'A
mSs />
ini
iSlsll*Wa 'iWBIliM
A
m I
0-32767
iYi
.
Ill
Im
t&
I3
I
t
4-1000
WiiMmiMi
m Wm:& the g||
'Su.
fill read CP, )
XI
wmx
If m
.X-
sign..
i/::
#001
Leg 1-32767
Y t
&
I
mm sc
III
V:
: EMG-decel
Please turn off the servo
JParameter-maintenance
INP
<
I
I
I
360
#006
0000-EEFEh
!l
0000
Afr;/r'/,A\vVAWVAV\V MVCIM
#009
#010
Set value Unit ,
Najre
Ax,
t,
VIA;
gx
:M it
1*1
$1
&2
mi:
239
iilill*
240
.lelxl
MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-~"INDEX TABLE[Rot3i)i Axis Spec ) - (Parametei list!
fFjFile (SISelup- (M )M onitor (A'lAlarm |U)Diaqnosis .fPJF'arameter Test-operation (UlSetUp-Axis [H )H elp
Iffl
;:vParameter table
v ;
: Tile-;\::jiame
u,v.-'
*RTY
:Motor series
t;(.\say*u
TNy e.y
<<c>.*>
*PC2
1
I
: Auto tuning
: Position loop g
: EMG-decel tine
t*
ii
360
W&.1:*
uc
Detail Inf. (I)
Ml read.'c.i i-i'Jc-C' ',
11''sigh. miisssf
inleter I
HHHM|
_ __
W'l.*V.WOl
Ml wite(R>
1
II
H;
BI i
0-32767
UBS Pos. Repair ( Bl)
PressOK
;';v
!.
4-1000
ill
Goirpare(G)
m11
w-vyy:
0000
i i3i
,: MM
Mm :: fc
:I
/-v-.-r i',:
EH
i 0-2 0 0 0 0
'>,. ('/;.;.\V> JwVO.v/.'r.t
VTrite (W)
0000-EEEEh
rJHWtt9L
Kv
il
r1000deg 1-32767
!vVriting:was-.c.orupleted. id/sec
Motor series
111
ill!n
range
;0\i\
-=-,
1-32767
ideg
Ml
turn off the servo airplit

*MSR
> y/?
11-32767
S.
#001
:d* tl
AiVvf/fcv-.i 'x? 'Jci /; yw vyr.v.;*iV>*vi
*/y;
11-32767
1 .......
Please
-/:CCA
0000-EFEEh
Parameter-maintenance
F
0000-EEEEh
: Motor gear ratio
VZ
v/ :.; &*
v ./.;* )>$
0000
!
:Feed pitch
v/,< i?
I Sett ing
i 0000
: Regenerative option type
: In-position det
:. :
Set value Unit
*PC1
#005 *PIT
#006 INP
#007 MU
#008 PG1
#009
#010 EMG
:.y ;; r.t
Numbe Name
#001
#002
#003
#004
-;
>:
.*
*MSR
n .
..
, _,
Sc
v>;
MR-J2-CT
SETTING ABSOLUTE HOME

241
I
# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ"MAGAZINEfRotary AKIS Spec.)"
BBliil
242
'
'
'
IFjFile ISJSetup (M)Monitor. lAWaim (DjDiagriosis (R]Parameter ITJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis (HJHelp/

\MAG.AZINEil]
Axis Select(C)
INDEX TABLE(2)
HI- r Spec 13J
,
WSmmEBB
m
M
1
1SI111III
I msP
jRjj
ri;1
mm
m
i|
IIS
mmmi
m
m mm
Ills
ais
i
i:
i40Siam
mm.
:;V.V,
151
ISIS
'
sHSSiJ
mm
SSlisiililS
mm
HIS
I
|pf
1
y
giS
iiM
Sffii
>
ujjeiV.I
mmm
VV::
"
Joiiuow(w) dnjasts) s|!d(dJ

-v'&'r
243
Sii
MSM-
WMi
is
CL
1
Pit
v<;V.
3 X
A;:
S*-
ui
S*w
wAQffi
*:
c
o
**J3.
?-;
Ij
2
JD
*S**
cm JS
5
E?
ro 0>
.o
u.
~n
r\
QC
DL
i&
'*!S /
:s
i;; rmm
,
"
Vfe=
I?
;S
3-,..
IS
$
OJ
Ir?1
***
Ilfto
3E
u. A
<J
:.
vm
:,o; c
O
cm
>
fa
>
cmV
CL
3.
fPS D
CJ CO
-.I :.-
CM
r?
DC
X'
42)
(D
1
it
!i<0*
ISS
la
SI
11
244
iH
-P
i
01
O
MH
ft
O O
ai
-i.
to
OJ
y\
S5
CL CL
Q.
>uli
w
w
o
cu
P.
HI
*4
I*TI
J-l
111
p'
OJ
sz;
;Z3
0.1
4J
H1
01
i i
5> l
as
PH
Tl
01
m
*I
ID
2
o>
tr>
WM
g .O
-._y
CD
'U
m tb.1 Ml
sfc
Lu
LJI
ll
is
ms,
OJ
H
to
if
-p
4*-
Q)
0M
sss
fe
i-
iU
V>-V*.T'0 ,
0
-p
L-l
i i
ft
.!2
o $80
SI i
c
D
CJl
.Kv
siss
&-I
.22
*
Q
Mrsi'
Vpjilj::/-;;
&
ii
BH
w $*m
mm
ifeP
win?*;
HiSi
**
ill piaS
m
wmm Si S gp
mvm.
'
;-:i
a 00t
m
<
m
f I*
I*
H
:P4
;;V-:* Vi
:m
II
IS
;
sisp-
%%
'__v
CD
mm
gill*
p. liSl*Hilfl
'
Jfl 111
...
<
LU
-*
If
p
PStH
tessiS 8
*'
D>
m
wm
tpcjl
-rV-1W*v
i-'io4
to
lilli
Sill*
igjU
;Mv-S
AM.
'
mm
mi
ai
01
*iH
I
0J
P
I
PH
L.
O
P-,
TH
i
iij
4-*
1 I
111
P
H
iSm
fflSjH
msm
Hi
iWiis
:!i!l
Baa
$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
[pit;
IMNcriilO;
MIIIBSJ '0
i;
wm
"1
/t
ypsx at, it o.J'J

de-grfes
i.
i: z l : iia*.' i. fi L
::'v
'cunetei:
Jog
group 1 :bc
i V Vf ;
I i'Lbboiuuo
M
__
-1
rit
'
Cii. jlip
JX
......
phsit tori init'iai set tl).

'
St II
Completion
...J
mull!
:
>: :
Isct. lifee
I tie g re &
...
-**S|
*-"'iVf.r.P.
-It
23
to
'
P's s
;; CP
s;
ivV/,
.O
CflPliStf
;
245
iSHST
IIH
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6J"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" [Test operation]
246
tV
(F)File (SjSetup. fM)M onifcor [AjlAlarm
Position
359.648
iPjF'arameter
Operation
degree
Step
Ref
Parameter group
return
"
Jog
Step
P a r am e t e r g r o u p
nr i'
Initial set
....
:gmm i
rnmm
Completion
Machine edge
degree
7 j
Rt.(R)J
ij
stOB<0)
MMH
0 . 000
W?
Origin-Set (S )|
.
Zero Point (B)
Reverse
Absolute position ini tit
Origin Set
-:
Hanua
Initial set
auuui
kut/
f~
-J
73|
iPM
Pl
f?
a-
192.744
. . Ufcv.
gsanatiM
The test operation node is selected.
I:::-.;--'.
'
'
mBM
.........
..........
# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
tV (E)File (S (Setup (M (Monitor [A}dlarm (D (Diagnosis fPParameter [THest-operation.; fUlSetUp-Axis
Sl&ill
ng~
i
m
><v
v*v
l*
iiV
P5wi
P.v;<;'
Vt:
;!/V.:'
m
Mm
Step
degree
2<J
.1
Operation
359 . 648
era $
Position
.1*1x1
I'HlHelp -Iff!
..
'
<-
vv- mt
MHi
<0
SC
K-xy
Parameter group
: Step 2Eiocle:l/f ee(a||l(
51i| 1
1 degree
Parameter group
#NfBS|Ri|L
'-- W
r-T-
1/ 1000 degree
Absolute position ini.fc 1/100 degree
1/10 degree
<
0 . 000
degree
edge
Machine
. v.
, d;: :. "V '
'
. ./i-'.--;/.M.'...:i;:v:-/
192 744
rt
: :
'
DS
181111111
Jm
.yv).v,
lliili
v;r
i.
Sill
WMM%
.
;
4 1*
Piet ion
Zero Point (B)
/dif
MlPli
-Set S )
Iiid> al set
Origin Set
.;-
mg
v.-.
1 degree
Initial . set
?Si
x-rivd
it i
Mm 'Mr#
ta
);
_d_mBm
flfE MHnHiR
aMtflwwwM8ir
""
RJgfippi
degree;-, InpL
d
.<.*. iVU'i l.V
failliti
V\
5) v
j-
/'
mip
i
is
*':
P-.
jg
Ad
v.
:v
A0;:- 1
ft
The moving destination station number in automatic operation is selected.

If 0 is set. It is a special instruction as one station rotation.
/;
{$&
?<
yi
*'A
247
", || v
;:mL
mm:
.V
MX
ft
mm
'.V/At/ 1
d:
ii
Wm
&
;-
HR
m
&
\;
vu livUi WSkw HrIffllSwiWM)
$$ MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6]"INDEX TABLE[Rotaiy Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
248
( fij
wM p
I'FjFile (S)Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIerm [Diagnosis [Parameter [DTest-operation flJISetUp-Axis iHIHelp
11
3 6 . 648
degree
j::l
?; .
&
Origin-Set <S)
IS'M
Initial set
Initial set
lili!
degree
192 . 744
V;
jsjI
JlfiSSiS
''
|
.
i.
Machine edge
Zero Point (B)
stop<0>
mar
Completion
Origin Set
rm0&
.
IPtFerse Rot . <R> I 2
v-R
V :
1 degree
Absolute position initial set (A)
0 . 000
Rot. (G)
Step inode feed
F1 ar ame t e r gr o up 1
Step
iNormal
Parameter group
;iil
Operation
Posit ion
degree
It is possible to stop xiith the SHIFT key.

:ui>y
/
'
-V;.
pti
-:V
>
: -i ,
lllillilllillll
S'* MR-JZ-CT Setup Software (Foi M6J"INDEX TABLEfRotaiy Axis Spec.]" - [T est opeiation]
kV
fPjP.arameter
(F)File (S]Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIarm (D)Diagnosis
degree :
Parameter group
P ar ame ter g r o up
fU IS etU p-Axis !'H 1H elp
It? I
Step
1zl
,
.l] 1
I|
,
I
8iaagillaai{iiiaaii
rnmmmM
Step
-**-
1 degree
rm Sr t/VtviCtv:Origin-Set <S)
<l
Bev. Eot
::
'
Initial set
Initial set.
lilffpjlMII
-OOP
/top<0,
Completion
Origin Set
_-_
_______
Machine:
Zero Point -(B)

0 . 000
Operation
Position
3 6 . 64ci
fTITest-operatiori
degree
edge
i
ililllllflHMSRRMKM
Tp:;'
192 .744
MMi
.0,V:'
i
OdlPiApP
__A_
;
;
,, <
ffi7 n;
stop
SHUT
to
with
the
possible
key.
is
It
?Jy!
a i.tei tfjSpgi
m
m
Ena(S)
Vi.
|1
tv
i
;
249
....
ftf?MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6)"INDEX TABLEjRotagy Axis Spec.)" - [T est operation]
1
250
iFFlis (S)S*4> up ; (MIMqpifcir (AiAlasra Ijipagnodf

;
-.
-...i.. l_i (
'
.J o g
|degree
SWSliiia* illllll
I.
Ref
=.
Up 1C Sr t- l ull
return
PterKS;t;e:feu'gro'up
i
a ;:arr \ e t e r g r o u p 1
SelectJoa
_
A; 4
>4
1113
.......
v a:
Click on Box
dr let r ft
;30
r ,:
&
Comp let: ice
;&g
is to Point
ilsohine
192 744
............
----... "vfKCT!-
.: ,?Sty,
v'e:
Udldd
mmmv tm k<-
.......-
";.
in :;1
v-V..
degree
'*
r t ,
t-'crtc
<$M<W
g.'
!s*ai
IF
mm fil
mggmm
a,
best operation made is selected.
>
..; V. 1
1. V'
""ji
I'l'li.a
Bgia
it
>'?
*
'Cs'J
'
?$MR-J2-CT Setup Software [Foi MG]"INDEX TABLEfRotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
TS-'iStup.. i3bl]Hprtitor;-;-:(&jisc/v UrJk* iayi, ;o:si* [Pracsige
?.- -.
- \ .v
4 > it '
. '.E-: '*'. .> ..
: .'-* V . *..
'
t1 .
j\
- i
.,*.--,
'
If lift i
i.
;
!'-
r ai:mm t e. r
s-i *iC:
gr o-up.
v./:
.....
:=;
u e r gr o up 1 up
ii
iSSSEtS
X will a1ppear
;...>.,
......
......
.....
..-.N
L
(;
'-
IfeOlmne 'ecig;s
mm?
set
192 744
_ .:
alii
'
'
/*
0- -V::
'
is snanred in Jog or Step mode a.nd match to a sero point of the
[machine .
jSisase push <Origin Sat < S ? >
.....
nMMMpfc
degree '1
I\rSh.e
/'
insi.U-Bm-1
:
-Origin
I,.*
Ur
i-.,,,,,,..
Po:i
.......
_J
i f ! ff
,"i
Fftt?oKl7''pc=iSn
.Zejro
||||||||j ;p|
riapHHi
MHtttai
button,
2a
251
$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6)---"INDEX TABLE(Rotaiy AK'IS Spec.)" - [Test operation]
252
l':
Lip-Op iM.jMo.4or
:;,;
'DLino-r-;
i t ion
1?
&
| <v F.b s Q1 u :: e ;pos i *.> *1 n ;.ina
>/
sat,
Origin
Oar.trine edga
-;
<
>.<
> in I
v\m.
itSSlilf $0
The a>d.& is moved in Jog or Step usde and match
Imscft:i :ae ,
...
r~447~i''i L: ii,
'
iniapaSji
to a -zero point of the

..'..
<
JQrigin Set S ) > button.
:' :
c.
-MM&MNi
-2?
mi
please push
mmm
......
V- !
iv:
;.\;Lb
Pi
n
Depress Origin-Set
I
F a c sme t e.v grp

! F ar nme r. e r gr o up 1 : :y.
wr*i5
ru n
}T !l.tni::
sin
ivi
=J.
r
:*!v
1S1SII
Op*
mmmm
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MS)"INDEX TABLE[Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [T est operation]
tV iDFile gjSetup [M )M onitor (A'jAiarm
s*
BP~
OMI
330 .051
degree
zJ
Jog
P ar aicie t e r gr o up
IK
!i:/k
>zi
(Si
'
Zero Point. (B)
gVl
.'
>-
End(a)
<
11
Machine edge
<
degree
192.744
degree
>0
; ;.lv-
The axis is moved in Jog or Step mode and match to a zero point of the
machine ,
Please push <0rgn Set<S)> button.
253
i
(G)J
Origin set
Origin Set-
0 000
..
V 1 >
-
- \ygm '
ilf
S)
Origan-Set
Initial sat
Initial set
-..oogpi
I jNownal
y
'm
Parameter -group
-i
*
Ml
mm
Depress Norma! Rot.
;f 1
Operation-
Position
Jfllxl
lpllp
254
Axis will Rotate

Will Stop at Z Phase
new Home
ThisAt is1 not
c r
Cycle Power on Machine
_kse
K ,1
66 '//
/'t
wmMiiiiSi
US
I
{[
ttiist
mmm
miim
fKfflSK
m,
WiUfSMSSiSiit
MillMI
MiMiSMM
iiiiiii
!!
NN"
:<sg?
=li
A
%
%Mi
W&m
tar
sssg
fyA
aV'*' f
;1:
g?
Si
50
Sggg
tMimMM
!l
;
IS8ii
iB Start
IIIIISI
mimmm
2*
iifiiiiii
Bill
% r
.M
mm,
<5
>A
s*
IST/ i='JS%
<3
mmmmm
.. .
.....
A
.
.- .
y.
-." '' /. .
ft
Sa
X--N>
,9
SIBII*
w
is
>Xs\':
&
<3
255
256
w%
':c
4*
Spls
jjj
HH
ri?
HI
I I'J WiriZip
j
lj Programs
.
-
Documents
Ig
0 Help
| IJ Shut Down...
1113
;<
m*
S'
liitili
1|
v'.sYV/-. *%.//iA'A'y
vm.
Main
g MAZATROL FUSION 640

Is MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
mmm
g NetOp Remote Control

g Online Services
MMMM
g F'rintkey
g StartUp
g WinZip
Settings
Run...
fg
" g ORiNOCO
| ,:3 Find
*
.
g KEY HISTORY
&
SwT1
g Accessories
g Desktop On-Call for Mazak
g Intel LA,N+Modem PC Card
V -
m.
Internet Explorer
MS-DOS Prompt
C3 Outlook Express
l)
Windows Explorer
<;*
;r
HI
K.
4-.
3je!SP
257
::
.......
..........
.......
......
.....
.....
"*
J b >:t . sjsj
S;j!.' hiV ' b-
Mnfe: ;
S 'SJJ:
I
->n
';
?.
iliildnps Ps
i.
gffttfHHl
v'*,'\
i-
i < i. .'**'' v.
;<-bV-\~bi:r'i:>
"*;i|lil
I
ISM
IF'
M.
:' "
;
V-v
mt
jiii
>M
258
**
MR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6]-,'MAGAZINE(Rotary Axis Spec.)"
I'FjFi'e (S;Setup (M)Monitof
I
I
[
_
(AjA'arm (D)Diagnosis (P)Parameter (IJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis iHIHelp,

.
||||M
MAGAZINE II)
JEB3E3BHII
SgfAg'S#
wgggsis
s mm a
mum
;
Axis Select(C)
Axis Spec. (5)
m
m
t.
T;.;a
%
.
'
'
'
. |ag
iwi
j.
1.
&
r,
H
-J
#Sn
.....
......
V!!i
'rS-
; V,
v s'rk* r
j
i" A
Ji-V.* i ',M5
Aa
1FJFile (SJSetup [M]Monitqr I'A.larm
fPJPararoerF.r.QlTsM'PtstipiiAlM-lS'etid'pjKi'C'AFfHOHelp.
;;5?!
259
Si
IgfiSiarc
wW1
><
i.v.v
##<'
ij
'/
PWR!l2r situp Software (FoijM6)iMAGNElBotary Axis Spec r

j CEFile [S)Setup (M)Monitor lAftlarm [D)Diagnosis PjPararneter '., .lljTest-operat
'1
260
::
3*
: :; *;
Position
degree
.i l
Jog
i
"
Par sane ter group 1
P Absolute
> ta-
Initial set
11
% Re1verse
I - 81 :vi |. ;
&
_
r
,11 ft fiw:;:
"
degree
i:
1
b
ft
as
_1 B 1
11Pi!
mmgmmmsmm
smm
:,;.y;:-.
prltAft#
degree ;
j'jt-t
Y-iV*-
Julia
*>
r
P-tv'
':
fcV**
It is possible i to st
PS
..,
Mi
vv. aj
isppfr
V;
s l.gulu*'
i
I
1
',$ Cancel
'
MS
Zero Point (B)
E)
Operation by the external input signal becomes invalid in the,test

operation. Is it UK ?
.
f
OK
I1
I
*8
.pi,,
T est-operation
*p.MUMP
1
i
mw
i
u
'
WY3jn
pi
< 1
Ro t . G )
Normal
>
W> '>
. ..,..
d
P
posi
'
..." /
Vjiv.V :
:v
ftjjv
;Vr
18
.SX*J
sa
Operation
Parameter group
vtf.
.'!;
WW#
r-r
s Tflpa,rph
I'iv
1
X :llv;'Vvv.
- vf!
prrS.iv >>>
f.
J
.:V vV
/
%i
.- ;
.1
Pb,
iai8Ills;i
;<-f
'lllil
iia
$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MB]-MINDEX TABLE(Rotary Axis Spec.)"

File
Test operation
sjp?:
Operation
Position
68 . 689
degree
Ref. return
; n;
f*
{Parameter group
# m'M
dis
position initial set (A)
I18
xil
se JUjt;v<E)$
&
$
<
Wf$M
?>V
Origin-Set S)
**.<>
}!r
J.
Normal
\\
TMial
fiuitornat ic
r~
r Absolute
.. . . .
Para tie ter group 1
mm
EC
Ti
Ref return
A
mm
\|
IJJ jS etU p-Axis lHjHelp

Im x
|S)5etup [MjMoriitor [Alarrn [D'lDiagnosis (P)Parameter iTJTett-operation
81
mm siistsis
lii
jmmmmmmmmmmmMl
",y
o \<
'VVM >
Initial set
Initial set
foXsV
Origin Set
mi'.
;v
iI Zero
Ilaohine edge
Point (B)
0 . 000
..;.; v,V
v Vi,/'
Completion
degree
68 . 950
M
1
W-
V.
degree
y:
Ov
if.
ft
End(]l)
1:
SS
.
I *111
_ __
llwpl
The test operation mode is selected.
261
M
is
ri.;.'......:n;,:,;:;;2: IVAA
voo
m
H
I
1|fl
262
Axis will home to new position
263
264
Servo Drives
MDS DH
Black in color
400 volt
Quick disconnect of motor wiring
Has a replaceable fuse for control line
voltage.
New generation power module
Fiber optic linked.
265
266
___
Comparison DH to CH
r*'
_____
Interface
iWWjjffB#lTi4-iilli. J*mrHmms
FiberOptic
Eectnca
F
|
.
y
I
V.-
Motor temperature
measurement
Spindle Motor
Encoder( PLG )
Thermistor sensor
cv
Analg
Serial Interface
h
;yz-?:
Servo Motor
Encoder pulse/rev
Thermal
HF/HP motor
WM;
(4.000rpm)
mm
swigpl
sl"al
HC motor
(3,QOOrpm)
41
i
sg
asm
SisIHisalii
16 million p/r
yj_
ui
-i
m
ii
m
. ;
Features and Enhancements

mmmm
High
::
iw
"
iTi i feTiS *3|11wii* r

T-V
mML
i iffifftlwl*fiflf *mW&.
w&w.
?vSi
M New CPC CNC unit and 1 6 million pulse encoder ensure high speed,
;
high precision operation in sub- micron control,

B New servo system and 16 million pulse encoder with smooth interpolation'"
improves roundness by 38 %. (VARS,AXfS500.,R25rnm.F1000mrn/mtn)
A':-
:V;
X,
AS,:
H New offset method has been developed to control stick-slip and spikes at quadrant
changes in circular interpolation.
-}f
iw
*li m 2 1 mm
.
sritf
fSW
MISS r arid Ihign Speed
; ;
Current'Control
fi High efficiency spindle motor and 5 times higher frequency current control, amplifier
reduce motor heat generation by 12 % .( high speed , no- load operation)
IS;
267
......
268
Mr-J2sB-CT4
400 volts available
Enhanced and new parameters for better
performance
Auto-Tuning is enhanced.
New alarms, including overheat.
Capabilility to upgrade the software of
drive.
Easy disconnect instead of terminal blocks
MDS-DH
mm
:..r
i
mm
lg
JmLJwSisl MM
11
;
t$&W
V
ill
Jlffl
.1
jl
Ti '
if
r.vy
fill
mm
K*
lil
If
U.
issif
Mil
IIS
iw
<
;i
r!&
I Mp
A
ES
illa
>
J
ill
111
33S
.
iJ?'--
J. :
'
P-;
-''>
tea
111
it
B
15
asm
i
v:f-
:|
gS
-*
Wz/
..'.vfr'fr
fV:'
js
ij
K-VT,:
f;
|fljjf
m
>
.f*
p
f L/U
'f-
Quick
269
Disconnect
Motor
Leads
270
of_Drives_
Top
Fiber optic connection
|gg3g-
IB
mam
.'-rb-*...
4:
IPIifcSSJ:
*1
illil r
liB
l'.
ll!ggg
E5?
mmI
i-as
i;
Sji
JI?
r :
mum
u;
Pgywjwn
Wot
Jpg
ste
.::
%]
UPSi
;J
smSSBi
: !:
i i .'
H; IfffiSS
I ui
****;
I :,;
<
TP
iyg
S'J BoK*M'
ga
m m 'frcf
$ rt
|H; .. ;!|l
p-~i -- ta|
jSsi;
IP'vvM
sllimKKS
I gg m
:-
p,
:;.'l$*.,(Ai.
mem
ft
fy
Mm
X:
I~!T
J-I
fip
j,
;i
v;
:c;
:i|
liiHi
;.V:-.*F
w-"-i
M
ilfazj
#la INIMi
r
v..
- :::; rit
'}
m
,W4
I?
3 l*jilr
$.;4
*i<y--. '>../&.,
LF
1
!
I ir
R| $JL
I JiA
w.;.
Wi
g?
'
>y
It
..-.y'Mv.
.41
I
IB
aaaauSSg
>
"V
!3
|i
*: ;
>i~
'
'
If*
.
-4:
li isc
Srj
m
J
io
i;i,
can be in
Battery for Absolute,
ri
out of drive.
mS-SSS-l
i
"
271
t:
ikb4
TS
*yj(
5-tf
&gf S
Er~
WSBBM
Mm
P*j <&j
-.
ip
w
A
,S
ill
w
on
jjLjW;
f.
&
r.
; guLZE
.__
||fe J
TO
ws**Wss'3c
JilSTjf,
SSMSSMI li
Mi
3h
v-
:i
i
pHawi
9H
sgs
ITH
rSva
sgffli
uoipeuuoo
kfc
ii
322MfflniH?Lt a st
*f|
gflflsl
MU* '-w|
ns
L I
ppppl
KiMaBsra
4
f; j
mm
:m
H*MA
:i
:.
it>
=3?
rrr
m
i
:
PR
*3
I*
illi
i!i
Oil
-.a
-";
1
iiii
AO 0} OAjes
;W~~
IM
WMm
i-U
1111 WBI?V,TH
B
-.
:V
8i
;g2i
a*:Sf.'>'-:.
rr
r i ps
*
iss
su.P
1
fSm
il; $* ||
' ;;
g\ !f
1

o!
'
ptefea.
rj
si
:N'
*33
x:
as
':
MS
OI
O
CM lilSL.
I
w*
'. .
si IS
:v
;X.-<V'
IS
.:;-'VX;Vr
T*'
|- s.j- a
g- il 1
:'i
</;
x
s
(Xy.v>
V;
>.-
>-'
M
Iv
'
a
'.
&.
&>
- ''-i'
'
.-; *V:
**.-, :V.
ft
<.a&
*y.;Vv
//..;.
till
III!
I3:>vv
! pI!l l|i xi11|Iff xf 11!!1
jiXrXM
feiX
-
.
- gr.wrw ...-
:
r.;
.'
g
;
: Iiiiteikifeif
<
v-
'A'*:.'
tX-'X
.....
: :..
Qdii-
M l
{a
rr*U.
1MBHiiiffl
r laga
M Kwm
* SA-yuro y yy:-:y
ai: _-
w&sfesaeD - 1
yyyy-s
j--..
:al
I iniiiiiM
;lj
v
'i '1'
f I#.
'X*STf.
>
Qi'lS?
: JZZ S
v *
"
yv
::S'V
C ii
wm h pi
272
i* r*
Wi
|itx|i;||>|f!|v
III ...|I|
[K
CM pI
IE
31
X*
BB
X:>-
;:
18
.*.
*.
ci.VXS
(/) %
fix'
.-j
fmS\S
gigs
y.
:e-
<?
$l*5
;J<'X
~-
...:'
-*
*!
! vf si?[
cn
::$ v.
w-v*
Bltlgs
.;..8S .;:
&n 1j ! ilp.-f
'Hri -d lifis
J
:1
i
2
>r Xs Vrv
'
,i;
i:,- ,
V ./; \
ft 4|ltli
%Ht
M*K
&
*; ;\'
-H-l-
.v
*;
M .
IC2
Xv-
iii
LJ
*4
X-i
-' :.: ;. 'r.
118111?
**
B?
Q'1
*>'*. >
aaa
BE
'
IS
Mi
:.Yv:'>
H1 11
Si
SUffil!
HR
'
Hit
:4Wli9|
IfeiaiaPa;.
Mi
V,
:-
I
UMIS
;; -pam
-9
'
;|
f:.
f.\
MR-J2S-200CT4
,'v
*SM
-J-Vt:
111
: 1;
i.
'? -i'l. ;;.
Lj;
400 volts
'
31.IIS!i:
i j Si
11
Jfe
:V
wim
;i-
Larger than the equivalent MR-J2

Uses 24 Volt for Control voltage (MCC)
Has Quick Disconnects
!!
X
?:
;
:
&
Disconnects
I!
:
.la
S]
IY
I;
::
I
L
5
<.
i;
-T4-
'1
:-
**_
rf ii.
ih?
:
t:
v.
rfC*
'Kith:
%_ 1'V 0
'
wiS
&
i
1 11
i
Quick
J*I
CV'.-tt
'
ill
-Li
m,
&
Si:"-':
:i
[
if
@1
f
FI
273
sa
y
r
is
:- -
j.
'
libs tiamaflirf 4
iipi
274
Mr-J2S-350-CT4
400 volts
Terminal Strip
fJVinsUBSSHI
*10.aVci<<&::
wBaB
V* ' v v
AA' ''
w%m
M
A
/V''MBiiU|m
IS
Sffisg
SB*
24 volt Control
if
iif?
11 I
n
,,:A-
w.
IE
a
rip HB r>
AA
*
AA
AA-E.
PPL
<l.
5*y
AA
'
'v '
ig
ft
........
...
ftm
l";
5?~S
!(
#A
|
A i
a
if! - i
A,
IE
BPU *
:IilE
I
WV A!
ET
'
.
jfe
'IwKatesgigBga
m'A:
fiK1,-'
:
V-V
ftiiifiiiafc
?,M'r>..mJ
EE
i
A':
WMMM
A
a
u
I. E
liPsT
j:
{;
g3g;en' HMW **
aatag"
; I
IS
rm
HI
A:
if*.
EE tEu
I!
iy
!ii
if A
iih
P I
''-
>vy
>
,-&iu
1111
;;
HJHI
I A / Jill
iS-lS EE..
- -- J mBKSSBSBBm
H
rawiifcM
JsM
-UN
WL
<6
$K<m
BB
A.
9,
4A.;:w 3SStfSf*K
n
3
si
KM!
;*
r-:v
I K,.-'
!'
'I' ?:" ;.
.
' ''
'
V
'
JE
jfV|
Si
-v .
"
K.-;:,v'
p-
jf
'
.v;;::.-g:V:
-1
am
BB
Kill
H-dH
sum
Im
iBiSSis
SiSllilSIgiil
L1
PSi
,..-
,J
./
y-.
..5
mil
;-
j
'*
;*i
KS||5
JP*
IKraggjg*
-*
a
I
275
&
276
Spindle PLG
Spindle Pig TS5690 is a serial type and is used
by Mazak. Every machine but Integrex

Consists of a pig pickup and connects directly to
the spindle amplifier. (No PreAmp).
Waveform adjustment is not needed. Only need
to set the gap distance of .3mm
Cannot view waveform, so Mitsubishi is
preparing a diagnostic function in future to
pig or drive.
determine whicn
Checks position and speed.
Spindle Pig cont.

Used on Igx200 to 400 series ERM289 plus APE391 H
(H/H) Heidenhiem
Reason that we use is that the Heidenhiem can get to
higher resolution than can be obtained from the regular
pig unit.
Phase A waveform rides 2.5v with peak
to peak of 1 .0
volt. Turn dial on pre-amp, one is for volume, other is for
phase-shi.T
Phase B has same adjustment.
Adjust phase Z so that is 60 percent of Phase A.
277
278
Spindle Pig cont.

Spindle Pig TS5691 is also a serial type
and is used by Mazak only on Mpx or Igx

machine for lower milling turret. Gap is
.15mm
MDS-D/DH-SP series
The adjustment manual for the spindle PLG
TS5691 (Spindle serial detector)
Tentative version
* The
adjustment manual contents of the serial detector TS5691 series *
1.Application
2.Type name
3.Serial detector TS5691 composition
4.Adjustment procedure flow
5.Adjustmet method
P2
--
P2
P2
P3
P4-P8
279
1. Application
This book applies the adjustment points of cereal detector TS5691 series (MDS-D/DH exclusive use).
2.Type name
TS5691 series
3. Serial detector TS5691 composition

(1) The serial detector TS5691 is composed of the sensor, the preamp, and the detection gear. The entire composition and the
closeup of PCB are shown in Figure 1, and the function of each volume is shown in Table 1 and the function of each check
pin is shown in Table 2.
M Whole composition chart

Sensor part
PCB ( refer to Figure! )
Closeup
Preamp part
Sensor holder
m9
__
1H3
Preamp connector
(White)
BJ
Check
pin
Sensor connector (white)

Detection gear
Check pin (PO)
|p)inted wiring board closeup iigurq
(PA.PB,PZ.PC)
PA PZ
15 5 r
PO
jTn
o I
PB PC
VR2:
[]
VR4
T
I.
it
ilVRI
VR3
VR5
'////
Figure 1. Closeup of
Table I. Function of volume

Volume
VRl
VR2
VR3
VR4
VR5
Function
A phase ofTset adjustment
A phase gain adjustment
B phase offset adjustment
B phase gain adjustment
(Z phase width adjustment)
-J
PCB and the composition of the entire detector
Fable 2. Function of check pin

l%i name
PA
PZ
Function
A phase signal
Z phase signal
PO
<
Pin name
PB
PC
Function
B phase signal
Middle point Voltage
Ground (0v)
Basically, It is not necessary.
(2) In this detector, A phase, B phase, and Z phase are output from the sensor to the preamp as the analogue signal.
It is output from the preamp to control amplifier (MDS-D/DPFSP) as the serial signal.
(3) Please use the sensor and the preamp by the same serial numbers combination.
(4) Please note handling enough so as not to apply the scar to each part.
280
4.Adjustment procedure flow

The confirmation and the adjustment of the output signal of TS5691 are done according
to the following flow.
Start
V
(Step.1)
Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment)
Install the sensor holder on the motor.

The gap is 0.1 5mm between the sensor and detect gear.
X
(Step.2)
Preamp PCB Installation
v
(Step.3)
Connection of cables
V
(Step .4)
Adjustment of A/B phase signal
Adjust the output amplitude of each A/B phase signals

by using the volume to 2000mV 10mV.
V
(Step.4)
Check Z phase signal
It is not necessary to adjust it basically only

by a wavy confirmation.
V
END
281
5. Adjustment method
Step 1 Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment)
M5 screw
Sensor holder
Sensor
Installation surface
Detect gear
Figure 2.
Installation of the sensor holder
c
O
Sensor holder
_ _j
n
Sensor
&
Detect surface
Gap=0.15+0.01 mm
/-\r}
Outer of detect gear
Detect gear
Figure 3. Adjustment of the gap
282
Step 2 Installation of Preamp PCB
Screw
Protection cover
\
Preamp PCB
Dont insert the insulation washer

into these spaces
Stud
Y
Figure 4. Installation of preamp on stud
Step 3 Connection of cables

(1)Connect the sensor cable and Preamp connector
o
[TCD
[]
[]
To the spindle unite
L
I H EK BBS a
T
Preamp connector
ISensor cable connector(White)

To the Sensor
Figure 5.
Connection of Preamp and Sensor connector
283
(2)Connect the preamp cable to PLG F/B cable (CNPE1 ).
Preamp
Connect to CN2A
<
PI
(J)
T
[Preamp connector
I'O)
PLG cable (CNPE1)|
iH
IPnv*H
Figure 6. Connection of
(3) The chart of PLG cable connecting wires
Spindle unit
PLG cable
Amplifier side connector (Japanese Molex Inc.)

54593-1 011(connector housing)
54594-1 015(plug cover A)
54595-1 005(plug cover B)
58935-1 000(shell cover)
58934-1 000(shell body)
58937-0000(cable clamping)
Detector side connector

Pin:
1 70363-4(AMP)
Housing: 172169- 1 (AMP)
PLG cable (CNPE1)
Signal name
0.2mm2
X X
X X
0.2mm2
3
4
2
I
H-H
0.2mm2
>o< +
7
8
SD
SD*
RQ
RQ*
5
6
xzzx
MTl
MT2
0.5mm2
+5.0V
0.2 mm2
0.5mm2
X+
5G
0.2mm2
FG
Figure 7. Chart of PLG cable connecting wires

electric wire:
MadeRecommended
of Bandoudensen BD20288 (The shield cable of compound six pairs specification No. -17145)
284
Step 4 Adjustment of A/B phase signal

(1) Setting of the open loop control
*1) In case of IM motor (SP017=0xxx or 2xxx), Set bit1=1 ofSP018 parameter, then turn off/on the power line once.
*2) In case of IPM motor (SP017=1 xxx or 3xxx), Set bit1=1 of SP018 parameter, and set SP113=10 (speed setting
for open loop control), then turn off/on the power line once.
(2) Turn on the spindle unit and NC, rotate the spindle head to CCW direction by the standard rotation speed.
Parameter SP020
PLG gear type (p/ rev)
Standard rotation speed (r/m in)
8000
512
100
6000
384
140
4000
256
200
2000
128
400
formula for the standard rotation speed.

The standard rotation speed(r/min)=200(r/min)x(256/PLG gear teeth number)
< Example > In case of PLG gear teeth number is 1 28 p/rev,
200x256/128=400r/min.
* The calculation
(3) Adjust A/B phase signals by using the volume to 2000mV10mV.

V(TP 1000mV5mV
B phase signal
A phase signal
Vdc 010mV
VP.p 2000mV10mV
285
Step 5 Check Z phase signal

(1 ) Confirm whether the Z phase width is 60%5 of A phase signal at one cycle.
A phase
Z phase
100%
60 5%
Z phase width becomes about 0.7ms at the standard rotation speed
When the adjustment ends, stop the motor rotation , and press the emergency stop button.
And return 0" to1 of bit 1 of SP018 (SP113 is returned to 0 for IPM). Finally, turn off the power supply
of NC and the spindle unit ,and turn on it .
286
287
rtM
bO
f-T
C\
-JCt
>
*v>
;?P
<c
rf
r
Up
/ V
Jp-
u.'
Y1
.y.--
'
i
S-o
r
IK\\
-3
CO
t,
&
s?
g"
.<&
><
Q.
y L
ss
I
/
n
!I Q
: a>;
i <0*
CJl
i-I <J)
CO
\1
p*
wt
%l
m
,
[
m
* |g
mm
JSHHP,
sJIXI
gw
-' .
ll
I
1
-i.
<
StSPiiil
WffspXSSffS?
m
si*
yyxm
.-
'
'
MB
& SSiiSSSS
I CL
CO
I
mm
sa
|_X
|
If
S
-~m
>
NJ
V.
!g | Zg. -
-Sr
xy ;S'V':|
5
rsias
'
i I,
*r
j. jg
my
If i
MB
I-
**
s| 1 ~
I
-~
8S8i
:/i:
IS 0
!f
1
Si
1
.x.
ii
SCjsi
X vX" *
.Ifc;
288
Spindle Open Loop/Orient

To place spindle in open loop, set SP018 bit 1 to on.
Parameters are different.
This is now a servo type spindle, so parameters are greatly
different.
Switches back and forth from speed command to position
command on CH, however on DH, will be automatic.
Spindle control signal for diagnostic display. See page 525,26,27,28,29.
Spindle Orient Shift is parameter SA96.
If trouble with sync. Tapping, change SP 8, 9, and 1 0.
NoAutoTune
Pos. Gain
Speed Gain
Non-Interpolation.
Spindle modeSpeed & Orient
mode
SP001 (new for
DH)
Interpolation mode. Same as

CH C-axis mode. Contains Caxis and Synchronous Tap.
Synchronization
New for DH
SP002
SP003
SP5.SP6.SP7
SP8.SP9.SP10
SP5.SP6.SP7
mfr
11
IP=
II
4;'
&
fHif
ggglU*
&
i]
1tetcv
lii
JHfLd
*#11
'
&-
Fit
'
i
*1
-ir
X.
HEP*
fi
fWS
li*l
;:
5M
r;:
"'r-i
'-
i3
>iV4:
't
>
srM
i.fM
SS
HHII
tap
Ift -i!
mm :
5S8
m TJm
iffli
'
KA
(if.
..jm
If mlS
fs5V;;m
:':'
-4fl
fi IJ
'.
til
P8HP*
XjH ;/
-JW
-:
t'-
-7:i
'%ViX
V
''Tj
44 *..;-4%%
TZ***
(g)
If
Jns,
%\ l
jr
t
V> >;i I
fi
IT!
f>
Jp
-.-' "* ;/ :.* .
4:;:-
1
Hggi
a KS
.- vn
f; V
8k*
44
<4
t::
->
V,
..
..
s$.
&>*
X'
[/ ;4
>&
vif
\ \
V
mIS:
II
fsw%S
**
It
a*
>'
M'-'4 :|l
tts
lefcsi
[ 3 j|p"
saB
3R- :*
m.
Ssa
ns
jpa%ggg
*wm
. . *r
.f
8HS5B1
&
""
*
',-
ma.r : TL
mm
y"4
i..*>
'
'
IbL
I Ills
Hl
Wmb>J
?pr
I-:
289
i.
a--.
C-lVt;
M
:-
$mm
ainpid
F-
6|d 1-96SS1
290
Technical Notification
25. Sep, 2006

Model
$
H
Unit
7)
Magnetic pole positioning of 1PM spindle motor with MDS-DH spindle drive unit
1. Outline
When the current model, MDS-C1/CH spindle drive unit, is equipped to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, magnetic pole
positioning is necessary during machine's setup* (Automatic phase Z tuning). In the automatic phase Z tuning function, the
tuning result (magnetic pole shift amount) will be written in the spindle drive unit's memory at the completion of tuning, and
thereafter, the result in the memory will be used. Thus, when replacing the spindle drive unit whose automatic tuning is
complete, it is necessary to perform automatic tuning again for the new drive unit in order to write the tuning result in the
mi?
memory.
However, in the case of MDS-DH spindle drive unit, the tuning result mentioned above can be set in a parameter, so it is
unnecessary to perform magnetic pole positioning again at replacing drive units.
In addition, please refer to below for differences between MDS-DH and the current MDS-C1/CH in magnetic pole positioning
due to the change above.
Magnetic pole positioning is to memorize the relative position of the detector's phase Z and motors magnetic pole position. As IPM spindle
motor is permanent magnet motor, it is necessary to constantly grasp the motor's magnetic pole position. Owing to magnetic pole
positioning, it is possible to grasp the accurate magnetic position by referring to the memorized magnetic pole position at delecting the
detector's phase Z.
2 .Difference From Current Model Regarding Magnetic Pole Positioning

The following table compares DH and C1/CH regarding the major items in magnetic pole positioning
Major item
When to
perform the
positioning
1
o
Procedure
and
necessary
time
Current MDS-C1/CH
What is different from the

current model
-Machine setup
-Motor exchange (Including -Machine setup
Not necessary in replacing
-Motor exchange (Including detection
detection gears)
drive units.
gears)
-Drive unit exchange_ _
(1) Set the spindle parameter (1) Let the motor detector's phase Z Even though the procedure
SP205=0->1, and turn the
steps increase, necessary time
pass.
spindle ON.
(2) Set spindle parameter SP225/bit4 will be reduced.
(2) Positioning complete in up
to 1, and turn the spindle ON.
to 90 seconds.
(3) After 10s. write down the value on
(3) Turn the NC ON again.
the spindle monitor screen.
(4) Turn OFF the spindle , and set the
Result of positioning
Others
MDS-DH spindle drive unit
(magnetic pole shift amount)
cannot be checked.
value in (3) in the spindle parameter

SP118
(5) Turn the NC ON again
The magnetic pole shift amount can
be checked on the spindle monitor Magnetic pole position result
screen or by the setting value of the can be checked.
parameter SP118.
3. Details of Magnetic Pole Positioning with MDS-DH Spindle Drive Unit

To this document, procedure of magnetic pole positioning (magnetic pole shift measurement) is attached. When MDS-DH
spindle drive unit is connected to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, please perform magnetic pole positioning following this
procedure.
[Machines to perform the positioning (Mx)l :
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle
INTE200/300I II
upper milling spindle.
4. When the Change Starts to Apply
MPT/INTE low er
milling spi n d I e,
Magnetic pole positioning (magnetic shift amount measurement) by MDS-DH drive unit is supported from the software version
A4 (high-speed synchronous tapping will be supported from A4E).
As the version A3 and before doesnt suppon magnetic pole positioning, there will be 5 seconds of display time at the initial
start of the spindle every time the power is turned ON. This can be solved by upgrading the software to A4 and after, and
performing magnetic pole positioning.
-Added magnetic pole
Issued by
Authorized by
Sales Dept.
posilioning lo Outline 066-A
1 0, Aug. 2005
0
ft)
-Added models to which the

change applies
-Changed the supported
software version
-Added cautions to procedure
of magnetic pole shift amount
measuring 066-B
31. Oct 2005
Sawaki
Sano
Tsutsui
25.S(*j>.
25 Sep
2006
25.Sep
2006
2006
# BNP-B8959- 240-*(BNP-B8959-066-B)
Drive System Fundamental Development

Sec., Drive System Dept., Nagoya
Works, Mitsubishi Electric Corp.
5-1-14, Yadaminami, Higashi-ku,
Nagoya461-8670 JAPAN
+81 52 712 2298
TEL
+ 81 52 712 3960
FAX
291
[Procedure of magnetic pole shift amount measurement with MDS-DH drive unit]
When SP142=0, set as follows, and turn the NC ON again.

INTE200/300 III upper milling spindle: SP 142=1 333
MPT/INTE lower milling spindle
SP142=U1
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle
SPI42-1 n
Start
Set all SP125. 126 and 127.

all to 0.
(Note 1)
Normally, set
1. Setup for magnetic
pole shift amount
SP226/bit5=1
(Pulse application magnetic pole estimation valid)
1
Spindle forward rotation
(About S60)
<
CYC CNT" on spindle

monitor is not 0
2. Check if phase Z is
passed
Y
Spindle stop (Servo OFF)
SP225/bit4=1
.(DC excitation mode start)
I
Spindle forward rotation
(Arbitrary S setting)
<
Weak excitation lime passed.

Normally. 10s
3. Measure magnetic
pole shift amount
Write down the value of 'AFLTdB" on

spindle monitor
I
I
Spindle stop (Servo OFF)
Magnetic pole shift amount SP118=Value

that was written down
I
SP225/bit4=0
(DC excitation mode stop)
(Note 2)
4 Set magnetic pole
shift amount
Turn the NC ON again
Finish
[Notes]
1 Perform magnetic pole shift amount measurement without workpieces and tools With workpiece and tool, the measurement
result may be incorrect.
2. When the measurement is complete, make sure to perform DC excitation mode stop (SP225/bit4=0). Otherwise, after turning
the NC ON again, the initial parameter error alarm 37 will occur
3. Magnetic pole shift amount is different depending on each machine. When importing the parameter from another machine
(SRAM data), make sure to change the SP118 value to the one suitable for the machine
292
T'l
)
[Related parameters]
Parameters with an asterisk * in the abbreviation are validated with the NC power turned ON again.
Name
SP118
Abrv,
Description
MSFT
Magnetic
pole shift
amount
SP125
DA1NO
r-5
SP126
DA2NO
SP127
DA1MPY
D/A output
channel 1
data #
D/A output
channel 2
data #
D/A output
channel 1
output scale
SP142
KF6*
Flux control
ratio 6
ii;
Details
re
setting range
(Unit)
Set the magnetic pole shift amount of I PM spindle motor.

When set to "0". shift won't be performed
-18000 to 18000
(Electrical angle
When performing pulse application magnetic pole estimation, setting is necessary.

When in DC excitalion mode
Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
ratio %.
When set to 0". it will be 20%.
Normally, set to 0".
W/hen in DC excitation mode
Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
ratio %.
When set to 0". it will be 50%.
Normally, set to "P".
When in DC excitation mode
Set the weak excitation time in the ms unit.
When set to 0", it will be 10000ms.
Normally, set to "0"
In the case of IPM spindle motor
Used in initial magnetic pole detection of IPM spindle motor.
Set the time and coil to apply pulse, and estimated magnetic polarity in pulse
application magnetic pole estimation.
As this setting is specific for motor, normally set the value in the spindle parameter
list.
1/100)
-32768 to 32767
1 . Time to apply pulse: Set in the [ps] unit. (0<Application time<350)

2. Coil to apply pulse: W/hen selecting low-speed coil, add 1000 to Ihe application
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
time.
3. Estimated magnetic polarity: W/hen setting the opposite polarity, set negative
sign to the values of 1. and 2.
E g.) Perform 333ps of pulse application magnetic pole estimation with low-speed
coil. Estimated polarity is the opposite polarity.
SP142
-(333+1000) = -1333
bit
When set to 0
Name
When set to 1
0
1
2
3
4
ded
DC excitation mode start
Normal
SP225
SFNC5
6
7
8
9
Spindle
function 5
A
B
C
D
E
F
bit
0
ovsn
Overshoot compensation type 3 Non-sensitive band setting (Unit is 2/1000)
When set to 0
Name
When set to 1
2
3
4
SP226
SFNC6
Spindle
function 6
pon
Normal
IPM spindle pulse application magnetic

pole estimation valid
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
293
PROJECT NAME:
PLG Adjustment of Matrix Control
The new PLG TS5690 of Matrix Control does NOT need to do PLG automatic compensation
function(SP245) like current PLG TS5276 in order to adjust A and B-phase sine wave signal
input into spindle drive.
Also there is NOT a PLG PCB, it is NOT necessary to check voltage of each-phase sine
wave signal on synchroscope.
M640
CH-SP
liiSi
Si
m
Bus Line
CN5
jj-
Analog
Pri-Amp
'
PLG I*
(TS5276)
Thermal
Spindle
Power Line
Mx
DH-SP
Optical Cable
CN2t
Serial
Thermistor
New PLG
(TS5690)
Power Line
294
Spindle
r-
Replacement of Unit Fan

When an alarm and/or a warning is displayed about the coolant fan on the NC monitor screen and the LED portion of the
unit, replace the unit fan.
Drive Unit Alarm

No.
Alarm
Fan stop
45
1
Power Supply Alarm

I No. /LED
Alarm
i
72/
Power supply:
Fan stop
Description
A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and the loads
on the unit exceeded the specified value.
Description
!A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and

overheat occurred in the power module.
[Drive Unit Warning

Alarm
No.
A6
Fan stop warning
Description
A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
[Power Supply Warning

No. / LED |
EE/
Alarm
Power supply:
Fan stop warning
Description
[A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
295
Replacement parts
Model
13
fl09P0424H3D
pMF-04C24DS-RCA
{MMF-06F24ESRM5
Size
p40mm (for MDS-D-CV)

p40mm (for other than MDS-D-CV)
p60mm
MlvlJ-09D24TS-RR15 p90mm
|MMF-T2D24PSM5 Dl20mm
i
1 1 . Turn off the breaker for the input power and
(remove
the drive unit after the charge lamp on

the power supply unit turns off
j
|
|
|
296
ft
V
2. Unscrew the mounting screws at 4 places to
remove the fan guard on the backside of the
drive unit.
BiiP
tv,*
I
V
jji
\3. Remove the hooks (at 4 places x 2) from the

jfan guard and then remove the fan guard.
SalllS i
ir..> 5
in
pS
297
El
%
Igp
8pgf|l
After removing the fan guard
SO
11
|4. Unscrew 2 screws for mounting the fan.
sBiSlm
2M
!
!
11
I:
!..
298
E :i
Wm Si
i*
5. Remove the rubber bushing for the fan

power line and disconnect the connector.
:m
Remove the connector and replace the fan.
-O
"c
{dire assembly should be performed in the

reverse order of removal.
lit*
fe,
m
/
299
MATRIX Maintenance Modes

Ivlaintenance modes which are added newly on the MATRIX machines are the operation restriction functions with various
interlocks used at the service and the maintenance To perform safe servicing and maintenance operations, the functions including
the feedrate limitations and the axis movement interlocks other than the equipment required the adjustment are operated, and then,
servicing and maintenance can be provided.
1. Selecting a maintenance mode

The following selection conditions must be satisfied:
-The machine is in a stopped status.
-Manual operation mode or MDI mode is valid.
-The setup switch is set to the ON position (1) with the door open.
(1) Press the DIAGNOS menu key in the POSITION screen.
EOS XT 10)1
SET UP
FROCRJIM
INFO.
TOOT.
c-eoiw
PARAM
ormnios
DATA
DAT .A
TOOL
DISPLAY
I/O
LAYOUT
MAP
IN
(2) Press the VERSION menu key.
VERSION
IN
300
ALARH
ALARM
PLC
MAIHYEH
RUNNING
GRAPHIC
DATA
ACCUMlf
HISTORY
SIGNAL
CHECK
CONTROL
MAIWTE-
ERASE
TIME
Menu select key

Menu key
!i
8m
rrrnrgiTOTy
mtt-iHof"
|
JL
ii
lp|liijF0l ri
-
't
kpy
fejai
PS'i
(3) After the DIAGNOS screen is displayed, press the menu select key
press the INPUT key.
(4) Press the machine menu key and then press the screen select key
will be displayed.
K*_ Then
.
enter password "1 131" and
i once. The MAINTE. MENU menu item
(5) Press the MAINTE. MENU menu key.
MA1HTE.
MENU
301
(6) The items provided for maintenance purposes are: MAINTE. MODE ATC, MAINTE. MODE PC, MAOSTIE.
MODE AXIS, MAINTE. MODE SPINDLE, and MAINTE. MODEDBB. Select die appropnate item according
to particular needs. The selected item will have its display highlighted on the screen. Select the menu items as required
one by one.
50%
(~'3D
MAXrtTE .
U&Xin'E.
UODB
MC
MODE
PC
Onlti~u
[VW
tlRIMTE .
MODS
AXIS
MODE
SPJHELB
_L
|WSJ O' j 200u/0/Q? [l3:23;d2
Onon/ula
M3LTWTB .
MODE
DBB
<Display in maintenance mode>

"The "WAAMITNG; MAINTE. MODE AAA" is displayed as an alarm message.
(AAA: Selected maintenance mode). Then the selected maintenance mode will have its display highlighted on the
screen. When the maintenance mode is cancelled, above display will be cancelled.
Cancellation of the selected maintenance mode>

Tie selected maintenance mode will be cancelled:
-When die door is closed
-When the setup switch is turned to the OFF position (O)
-When power is turned off
-When the selected menu key is pressed again (to clear the highlighting of the menu item).
302
2. Operation hi maintenance modes

The door interlock is cancelled under the following functional limitations:
(1) Functional limitations on each maintenance mode
<Maintenance Mode ATC>

-ATC/ magazine-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only ATC-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-c odes: M6, M17, Ml 8,
M19.M149)
[Ml 5, M16: M-code for ATC cover (Option)]
<Maintenance Mode PC>

-Pallet change-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only pallet change-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-codes: M70,
M71.M72)
<Maintenance Mode Axis Move>
-Movement at tlie maximum speed is possible by pressing the axis feed switch and the MF1 and MF2
keys at. the same time. Releasing any keys stops the movement.
-If neither the MF1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited to 2 m/min (if it is
rotation axis, surface speed is limited to 2 m/min)
-The maximum speed operation is also possible for axis movement in MDI mode.
303
<Maintenance Mode Spindle Rotate >

-Operation at the maximum spindle speed is possible by pressing the spindle starting switch and the
MF 1 and MF2 keys at the same time. Releasing any keys stops the rotation.
-If neither the MF1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited lower (The maximum
speed depends on the machine type.).
-The maximum speed is also possible for spindle rotation starting in MDI mode.
(Usable M-codes: M3, M4, M5, M19)
<Maintenance Mode DBB>
-Automatic operation starting is possible.
-Axes movements are permitted (Usable M-codes: MO, Ml, M2, M30, M99)
(2) Hand pulse operation for axis movement is possible, even during maintenance mode.
(3) The chip conveyor/ screw conveyor comes to a complete stop.
304
305
306
Matrix Special Menu

Allows customer to add their own menu
keys to call up special softwares
Example shows setting for printscreen
functions.
Edit
c:\MC_sdg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.txt
307
308
Matrix Special Menu Explanation

Comment
Only
Menu Shown
u
/Si
XWO
m.-.!
iir
/v-m
fi-ic
|[Henu-1]
..
*
\c\-:
* j Hen uNain e=Pr i nt:
Screenl
-c:\jna1
me\pr1
F11 BP aril
nx: screen -exe
[Menu-?]
Men u Maui e=Pr i nt
Screen!
F11 QParh-c:\jfla1 me\pr1 rat screen 2 exe
1
j [Menu 3]
Actual File path

and Executeable
(.exe) file
/.HUP
|Men uNam e=Pr i nt

ScreenB
F11 epaxhcsVaal mte\pr1 nt screen 3
i
Matrix Special Menu Example
mmmmmmm
File Window Help
Mi;V
Back
Search
Folder;
Actual File i
Favorites
+.: I j My Documents
.7; Q Start Menu
Size
1
Date Modified
8/ J 7/2005 2:39 AM
Type
KB TextOocument
...i
"aaj
j [Menu-1]
screen
MenuName=Pri nt
Pi 1 ePath=c :\ma1 nte\Prin tscreen. exe
Programs
:+
fvlane
HIJBBI BUSH
>: [J Desktop
i
is
;! So
[i] CustomMenu.txt
G Cookies
G All User?
G metpub
[Menu-2]
uName=Print
Menu
Qj m6y_yrnw
Scr een2
File Pat h=C : \mai nt e\P
O ni6yboot
+': L_J mainte

*J
!0I C:\MC_sdg\ CustomMenu
Folders
\i
i AT
AO*jl C:-5
+'.
-veaisna
G MC.Backup
[Menu-3]
Screen3
Fi 1 epat h -c : \mai nte\Pri nt Screen3 exe
HenuName =Print
MC.Direct Mode Programs
ntscreen2 . exe
G MC_Gl Data
:f: G MC_Machine Database
;
;.t-
D MC_Machine Programs
iG
MC_sc'g
G Alarm
G CustomMenu
D cutest
(3)
D cutmorj
D cutres
G dbl
D fug
~
it:

TUTT2s% Tnr
Screenl
Full Ptint Screen
Print
Scresn3
(2)
I Mil
1/23
14: 49: 26
>
MENU
(1)
310
311
312
Matrix:
Howto select multiple Folders in the Explorer
address
jss C;\
x
=olders
-
Name
Size ; Type
0 0CPCU
1 0 Documents and Settings
I 0 inetpub
'
31 Desktop
J Q My Documents
3 Q My Computer
3A Floppy (A:)
S S3 MAZATROL (C:)
L+!
CPCU
0m6y_ymw
0m6yboot
File Folder
] Administrator
l .~l .iboconsole
l~~l Cookies
0 0 Desktop
0MC_Direct Mode Programs
0 MC_Machine Database
MC_GL Data
I 0MC_Machine Programs
CDI
S
Favorites
Q My Document
Ei
1 0melpctrl
CD Start Menu
Iddies;
File Folder
File Folder
File Folder
File Folder
File Folder
0nm64mdata
>
Ctrl
File Folder
CCncbackup
S3 [0 Programs !
1
l+i 0 All Users
:
j
i+J 0 inetpub
Ij
i+l 0 m6y_ymw
1+
12/1/2005 10:10 AM
Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl to Select

Multiple Folders in Explorer.
I 0||
0
0MC_Bacdup
El 0 Documents and Settii
E
Shift
Date Modified
]pli tool
0 Program Files
0 RUNMNG
IJZoT,
7T9
10/26/2005 6:47 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
9/1/20135 12:00 PM
10/23/2005 6:32 AM
10/25/2005 7:46 AM
C:\
X
:olders
Desktop
+3 Q My Documents
3 Q My Computer
E
3A Floppy (A:)
E 0 MAZATROL (C)
S3 0 CPCU
o 0 Documents and Settir
*3 0 Administrator
1 .iboconsole
r~1 Cookies
0 Desktop
;+!
+:
+
+
Size
Type
Date Modified
File Folder
12/1/2005 10:10 AM
0 Documents and Settings

Cl inetpub
Shift
0 m6y_ymw
I
0m6yboot
Cl mairite
Start
0MCJ3ackup
IK
!ia
rn Ctrl
Postion Cursor to Stating Location.

Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl.
Move Cursor to Ending Location.
:0
,0!
V? Favorites
0 My Document
0 Start Menu
i?
+.
Name
QCPCU
10 Programs
0 All Users
0 inetpub
0 m6y_ymvv
I iribvhrinr
+-
11
n LllI :
0nm64mdata
0 plctool
0 Program Files
0 RUNMNG
0 Voice
End
File Folder
File Folder
File T older
File Folder-
File Folder
ile Folder
10/26/2005 6:47 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
9/1/2005 12:00 PM
10/23/2005 6:32 AM
10/25/2005 7:46 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
313
314
315
316
Remote I/O
__
__
_____
<
-V
>6'SV \si*i .'4V-
X1
i O
;
:
si
HI
:
X2
* Z2
si
/j
y
3--
<%>m.
J
! ,L
.".1#
II*
5.
SSI
wif'sifi
.3
*0
0
r>
a$<r!
2
v2:
M|h
0
:
'
'
i g; o
zM
_REMOTE itO
/
>
'*
,fc*
.- : ym i
C"i : :.:
'
fk
'
):
y* ;
izfe
v? J
0[
o] I
N
T13- 0[12- 0]
PC 47 C 0) .
0.
-* **in
;--g
-65. 3
-0. 023
0.
0.
* Z1
BSP
j*
.-Ti
...
...
y,*
TROUBLESHOOTING
_ v *'.. */ _
---*
X
feir*v
Wi
m
*
fL.
i
mm
<)
H clI V
Ma
RA
1>
j i; gs
'.0'
317
Mg
'
T ,s
&
RMiSiga
?<K?
V& I
fir
*
jmmXtL *'
4n
I >
[in- H
R Ijlr
1
1
111
m
il
r-.
I w
:K
t
I
fulfills)
..
.v':
hi
Oil
JC'
318
rx
raiwi
r\
rr\
r?\
n rx
XRT
v_y LJ\_y
v.
v_y
WAV'1''
ma
Si
?|as
/: ;
iiSilil
POSITION
BUFFER
X
Y
0
0.
-40.
UNex8 ,
S
0 F
igi U17
UPC
-100.
X
-100
Y
-3U0 a
2
0.
m
G
-GX4f
G40.1 G
80
67
lit
0.
G 91
G 98
G 69
G 23
G 50
G 97
H
G 94
G 54
G 15
1
(CTR-DR
->-> TNo.
)
\y\
SPDL
(i)
FEED
PALLET N
UNIT :
Di(
H#(
T-0FFSET
INDEX
0.
0.
0.
0)
0)
100
11
200
m SI
a
I
a
Y-AX:
0.
HI
i
i
m
>
W|
al
Omm/min
T
G50. 1
If X
(400008000,
G 40
G 64
min"1
H/HIN SPBL;
MM/MIH
M/REV X-AX:
0
0
55 REMOTE 1/0 ERROR
11
V;
NAGA2NPKNO .
0
G 21
li x if mi*fes fei
Hi
TNo.
Sllfe
i''!*
0)
v}V'j
(ill x
M#
File View Setup Window Help

X
Y
ZERO RETURN
...
ir
2-AX:
2001/01/13
TPS 0
:>
110I
w&
10:29
M Y.WV/'V
:/
:
::
fi
lilW ifpi
I
TPS
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR(Mill)

9 REMOTE I/O ERROR (Lathe)
nfhF
-11 11 11 I I 1 1
rn
n
055
npF
H-N
D1024V MALFUNCTION
(Note,
, )
PI
III
#1
it
Cause
ill
ifIII
Please contact your YAMAZAKI MAZAK products service station.
Note: & Q0 C|C
Q1
This is a Hexadecimal #! If other than 00, it has a problem in that system.
No.1 system (XG~)

No, 2 system (X80~)
No, 3 system (X100-)
f
Action
f||
til
pftl
WhatlsaivstanP
mj
No.4 system (X280-)

VVXV,;
Take Hex # and turn into 8 digit Binary!

7
6 5 4 3
2 10
01 0 0 0 0 1
M mi nmm\m m ti lim? Hits 421

m
1
WlatlsastatloiP
Station
Station
Station 8
319
The above example indicates that an communications error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 2 system.
x
\J
320
nru
nfhR
II
009
Cause
Action
\U\U
Hr
REMOTE I/O ERROR
Red
An error occurred in data communication with the remote I/O card.
Please contact your MAZAK service representative.
_j
/To
n
w
dy
inn
uH
'
rm
9 REMOTE I/O ERROR 2(0000,0001)

N
/ \
Problem in system 2
Station 8
Station 5
Problem is with station
r-n rr\
L J
Jlf
cm
K1S
mm
rr\r7\
,-n
mm 7i
VJ3
\1S
uu
r?nrr\
wuup
rv)
;-s'
/Nrr
UjV_yuJ
Kiy
;
-
'
::
'
za
File Window Help
VERSION
DIAGNOSIS HOW IT OR
[CMC]
HR113
OPTION | SERVO
HR122
[BUS]
M -***'
[RIO]
1
1 HRS53
2 HRS 71 ;
3 RX312
4 HR371
HARDWARE MONITOR
SPINDLE MONITOR
[CPU]
MONITOR]
Wd
V.
<u
HRS53
HR371
t|liWlmMMSm
HR371
ppi
:
HRS 71
Vv
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR
|W
50%
321
DIAGNOS
(z$
VERSION
Or pm
U0000G7G0,
TPS 0
2001/01/12
V#. 0 OOin/min
DIAGNOS
MONITOR
OPTION
SERVO
MONITOR
10:05
sss
SPIKDLE
MONITOR
a a:
HARDWARE
MONITOR
LADDER'
MONITOR
322
pr
R1
LMI
D UU
fVF
mn
C\
cv
ERtlTl:
File Window Help
DIAGNOSIS
[CMC]
HR113
-iH
y-
sat
VERSION
MONITOR] OPTION]
13
SERVO
MONITOR]I
x|
SPINDLE MONITOR
HARDWARE MONITOR
_ smritii
[CPU]
HR122
US]
& OD 00
[RIO]
i
1 HR353
2 HRS 71
HRS 5 3
HR371
3 1X312
4 HRS 71
HR371
07 00
T
TTT
'
No.1 system.: (XG~)

No.2 system (X80-)
No, 3 system (X1CO-)
NoA system (X280-)
HR371
vnm
765413210
-;
4 2
Jiinary
L Station.
Station
jraWJ
t 00000700
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR
50%
DIAGNOS
[zjjl
VERSION
0 r pm
Station 8
I V'A'V 0 . 0 0 in
Sliii
<E
HARDWARE
MONITOR
&00000700 - -
aaa
LAC'D ER
MONITOR
/T\
/m
crq
u VJL/
DI&0N03I3
[CMC]
HR113
iu
i.
MONITOR] OPTION]
Qi
JWULJL
mmmmmmmM
>
SERVO
MONITOR]
SPINDLE MONITOR
HARDWARE MONITOR
'BUS]:
5.88
xii1-.
-*
IB
-
Sc 00 00
[RIO]
1
1 HRS 5 3
2 HRS 71
3 5X312
4 HRS 71
&
HRS 53
HR371
It
[CPU]
HR122
O'
File Window Help

VERSION
- mse-a/SK
07 CO
.HR-371
system (XD~jji
No.2 system X.80~)
6
w vr
HR371
7
7B54|32tO
B 4 2 1
Binary
4 2
|
i
i
vM 4
niojJ
f 00000700 .
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR
|w
501
_D
Or pm
323
DIAGN03 VERSION
jV'M
0. 00 in/mJ
i
=2
v,'.
&00000700 *
HARDWARE
MONITOR
LADDER
MONITOR
2
5
324
i rn <ThR
JI _3
ns
r r
n juu
JW
ini
S7\
i joy
ffb,
UUU0ii]liJ
71
7a
(Dr\
V-/
:w:
x\
File Window Help
..jV :
| DIAGNOSIS MONITOR] OPTION]
VERSION
[C1JC]
Hill 3
SERVO MONITOR
SPINDLE MONITOR
HARDWARE MONITOR
STATIONS
[CPU]
HR122
BUS]
m
Liu LG
07
[RIO]
l:"?
1 HR353
2 HRS 71
HRS 5 3
HR371
l-'l-i;-.-
HRS 71
NoJ system (X0-)

Na2 system (X80~)
No*3 system {X1Q0~J

NoJ system (X2S(H
HR371
3 RX312
4 HRS 71
oS
0
7 6 5 4 3
e 4 2 10
fl
Siafion
Si alien
- STtof lohl
*
Mill*
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR
pvv
50*
(3
DIAUNOS VERSION
0 r pm
U0000p700y
|V#i 0.00
in/m
210
4 ! 2 1 | Binary
Stations 8
I4i
&00000700
,E
|R
HARDWARE
MONITOR
LADDER
MONITOR
1
2
3
325
__
win
sm
OS
3$
a
50,
is
C 3
a
-(
15
*
L*l
1 $Y2i I
i i
cr
CD $VM
-i
\1 ,,
<
SV2*-i
3D
Ju
SV3
c-i
5'
OH
*
<y m
- es
>
't*-0
r*o
rirnr
>
>w
CP
IPS

K X
e>
>
CJ
4J
opiC)
v_r*
>
*
CD r
1
rn >
UCiiH
2
o
hj
|C/>
0
f
O;
rLo
> i-o>
UCttH
u am
i
: 9
>
*D
i-->
CO
5 Lj
lieaH
Li
\. ...A
il
g
|M)
I
(0
rz
*c
*v>
t.
1651Pi
t
C3
L:L
ueaw
O
o:
-*i
I
Q
IPD
C3T0 v
oz
r
OH
12
II
*
W
&
o_J
-L
IOO
(=)
m
o
CP)
>
>-
31
Era
C<
*
o o o
*
t O T
03 f"C
0P)
*9
ill
I
I
u>
03 5V2'M
03
*t>
<*230>
N.
EE
PS
c=o
>
io
1 Sv2-J tx23ii
11
FH
326
AP20
@(>
ss
Sr
X4024
(2601 )
X2024
tXT 6 1 )
_T3L
!C
4-0
X
X
tO
.XL, fXL _Q_,

CTj
-}
HHRttiMlN]
Is-
s
.-r, s g
wr>
Uf>
Q2
to
*( i
"
JJ""
rz
to
to
40
CSJ
5
4S
X
*3-
MO
1
lQQ[l;ii i! lilii: i! i!|
i
to
%
ec
i/3
tt
to
to
<
CHS
CHS
pa
Cv
in
>
fr
SK
'-'
4(g'|'
|I
*
JUMPER: 1-2
|)
|J
C1D I-,,,
W
XL, XL
o
so
3MB
aa i
so
to
*
patter?
7
C.
X)
SO
i}@
an ]CHI
r
KHRMISMNI
MAGAZINE
SET:?
t|i 4|T 5i|j
CN7
Ti o
CHS
ii
CHS
4i=y i
CN
IIIIII!
Statin # an Se0B= 76 s 4321

X3024 (XT 3! )
Mazatrol Fusion Remote 10

Communication error count
Spec
Tins function is always activated ( Note In case of lathe parameter 088 bit 0 should be on
This function is that it. can output counter value of communication error corresponding to the R register table below.
Each count value accumulated in R registers can be made cleat' by R51 28 setting
P.5 1 28
bit 0: Clear Max value (make "0" for R5000 -Eh 0631
bit 1 : Clear accumulated value (make "0" for R5064-R51 27)
While
*When this bit is set . start ot clear ,and at same time thus bit will be off automatically
looking at these registers is helpful, it is not. 1 00 % accurate as telling where the problem is. There have been cases
where the P.-register may be higher, but problem was actually on another station where R-register count was lower.
Signal name
Max value
Commnicaiton
VsV.A.'.AW.A.V.AW.A.\W/v
Max value
CRC
Accumutated
Value
Communication
Max value
CRC
327
Counter clear Flag
Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station

3
8
5
1
2
7
6
System
4
1
R5 000 R5001 R5002 R5003 R5004 R5005 R5 006 R5007
R5008 R5 009 R5010 R5011 R5012 R5013 R5014 R5015
2
R5Q18
R5016 R5017
3
R5019 R5020 R5021 R5022 R5023
R5024 R5025 R5026 R5 027 R5028 R5029 R5030 R5031
4
P.5032 R5033 R5034 R5035 R5036 R5037
R5038 R5039
1
R5040 R5041 R5042 R5043 R5044 R5045 R5C46 R5047
R5 048 R5 049 R5050 R5051 R5052 R5053 R5054 R5055
3
4
R5 056 R5057 P.5 058 R5059 R5 060 R5061 R5062 P.5 063
1
P.5 064 P.5 065 R5066 R5067 R5068 R5 069 P.5070 P.5071
2
P.5072 P.5073 P.5074 R5075 R5076 R5077 P.5078 R5079
5
P.5 080 P.5081 R5082 R5083 R5084 R5085 R5086 P.5 087
4
R5088 R5089 R5090 R5091 R5092 R5093 R5094 R5095
1
R5096 P.5 097 R5098 P.5099 P.5100 R5101 R5102 R5103
'V
A
R5104 R5105 P.5 1 06 R5107 R5108 R5109 R5110 R5 111
->
R5112 R5113 P.5114 R5115 P.5116 P.5 1 17 P.5118 R5119
R5120 R5121 R5122 R5123 P.5 1 24 R5125 R5126 P.5127
4
R5128
328
REMOTE D I/O SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION FUSION 640 CONTROLS
Mills
Only!
The relationship of PLC address with remote I/O systems and stations:
Bus
System No.1
OUTPUTS
Station 1
X000-X00F
Y000-Y00F
N/A
Station 2
Station 3
X010-X01F
X020-X02F
Y010-Y01F
N/A
Station 4
Station 5
X030-X03F
Y020-Y02F
Y030-Y03F
Y040-Y04F
N/A / 5
N/A/ 4
3
2
1
Station 7
X040-X04F
X050-X05F
X060-X06F
Station 8
X070-X07F
Station 1
Station 2
X080-X08F
X090-X09F
X0A0-X0AF
X0B0-X0BF
X0C0-X0CF
X0D0-X0DF
Station 6
Bus
Operation
Board
System No. 2
System No.3
System No.4
Star
(HR337
DOES NOT
HAVE.)
ROTARY
INPUTS
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
3
4
5
6
7
8
XOEQ-XOEF
X0F0-X0FF
Station 1
Station 1
Station 2
Station 2
X100-X10F
X110-X11F
X120-X12F
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
X280-X28F
X290-X29F
1
2
3
4
5
6
Station 7
Station 8
X130-X13F
X2A0-X2AF
X2B0-X2BF
X2C0-X2CF
X2D0-X2DF
X2E0-X2EF
X2F0-X2FF
Y050-Y05F
Y060-Y06F
Y070-Y07F
Y080-Y08F
Y090-Y09F
Y0A0-Y0AF
Y0B0-Y0BF
Y0C0-Y0CF
Y0D0-Y0DF
Y0E0-Y0EF
Y0F0-Y0FF
SW
USAGE
HR337 / HR353
HR337 / HR353
HR337 / HR371
HR337 / HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
HR371
HR371
HR371
Y100-Y10F
HR371
Y110-Y11F
Y120-Y12F
Y130-Y13F
HR371
HR371
Y280-Y28F
Y290-Y29F
Y2A0-Y2AF
Y2B0-Y2BF
Y2C0-Y2CF
Y2D0-Y2DF
Y2E0-Y2EF
Y2F0-Y2FF
HR371
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
329
330
There is the ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM LIST

on page 2 that serves as the contents in the
ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM. As an
example, look at TOOL EYE (OPTION)
enclosed by a red frame in the table below.
The figures "32000340362" indicates a drawing
number.
EL.5l:HAfft DIAGRAM LIST

SET
2 1W.CHIKE lb.
fcOT
3 CNC 7YPc
i SPIKEUS Ttips;
i_5 MILL $*\m\
LJ
!7 IWK. 1 R>W Nti

j itoc % m Ux\
B 32000340330
Enlargement
*2*0*6 REMOTE 1/0
REMOTE 1/0
*2*5
REMOTE 1/0
*2*5
REMOTE I/O
*2*5
FAN MOTOR
si 32000340340
%'J
32000340351
32000340562
32000340370
3 32000340380
9 32000340391
) 32000340401
1 3200034041 1
7 32000340420
3 1 32000340430
J
*1
*2*/
*5
*1
*2
331
'Mil
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
SLIDEWAY LUBRICAT
HEAD COOLING PUMP
TOOL EYE (OPTION)!
TOOL EYE< OPT I ON)
WORK LIGHT
MAIN SPINDLE CHUC
TAIL SLEEVE/BODY
TURRET SOLENOID/S
PCB PC I NPUT TURRl
C-AXIS SOLENOID
Approved By:
1 S&CtfSKS TVP8 8aT-flW250 m\&
32000340294
32000340303
32000340313,
32000340323
vx,
MM-
ChftcV.od By :
jSreCIRCAUCW
ITS*
__
Draw By
PP32300030 16
ifoyaittrt
43H4
*3<n
YiSgWmiPISl
ai-giooH&ni
iqggMCHOltO
u { asflmfr&a
12 aMWMWffl
- D &U0.a2Mi
&:
Hi
**
ni
H I
M *
t> (I i i
lf *
>*
Oil ll
mU.,i
HU II I k
M|!
11 *
W IP
'* 1 1
4I3UI Ll
in
rcmn *
[Ctot i*ns
wrn t&x imr i jXT
Taut
QXE 1151/0
NCSCC.U$i vrD
H CXC U?l )
a earr
i.i<vr <sr
U OXC LIST ()
H OX LrS-T IT)
JLSaSfiUJSELiJ- _
H cace LIST
M CX LIST Do)
M
IRiQITMf
W* CM
MACH?* Pgam Mj CM
nc rwuETw .mu. (0
ii irf
iu'
p'm
i *I*P
M i
M I
l\1 Ltf
*3
>;
*L'L_
<*
l
il r*
il <
JUJJALA2L
*3
+a
glKSKM&
it
ll
ti
IjESggjig
! *I !
i *< I lT
O
Tir
M4* SUPPLY 10
.53. smoimM
tt*QTE
ii axosaefti
I/O tiHW
cnoTF ia) OIHPQIN
M awtwmt PUS
JUUL &3&.30B&.
M &mtM!KW_
Dl/6'
mam
I ti*m
SiiaL
ihvtttirtHtti
.w.
I)ni
Hft IfcYtt
iW #X<lRtfr6
101
StlDctAY
<?2A5R03i1t!
-,7-vrrMfRRy
no
UJWIWWji
INC W VxTCK
yypf-iPTtEffV
jjMaaM.
1
>5
t-XL kYS<; CPI ICC)

irlfX LUStfT
&RIK SPtWLt SUCK
ir(.)gCG4C401
Hit ajEENC/POW
TiggT s<uirc.ycvs.>R
ill
111 3SCWW-1 1
.....
US 3?ftS03lC45i3
_______
PC 1 hFUT TlHYrT
m 52SSjSa45.
fcasLsgaauL,,
w WWML
ACWtCIRCUII
J.W.
r***-
332
A drawing number is written on the bottomright corner of each drawing, as shown by a

red arrow. Open a page related to the TOOL
EYE.
if
6?
-Hf
* rmarma7 i
gLa-
flJ
IU
n;
U>
iSnsftr
. . . ....... .
I
~C2
}J
:<*&*-
;o
;<.*
ifrr crm*
!3y>
I 891 (II rs <*

i rrc u:if -4ii
m.,
wm
J**-
...,
>>
.nimwa.
iif
&MT'&
LW
ITU,
VI
ii I
.0
WTH-W*'-
J4
.wo
< <'K
*~
ns
ns
......
*I.
LU
ii
rj
*!:
ns j
__
m wi -
Ik* fil 1Wft.6
-igr-
rsx na
icrim
TISSS-
;s
SISC
Enlargement
1TBT
TITLE
20
21
2?
32 CO 03 30362
arid! Fore tan Trade Law

I
LJu-J
---
- B*
}..
r
ua
*ou*
TOOL EYE (OPTION)

D RWH H o
MU
, ri&- -M8
at
i.e
ail CsA <rT t-
CiW4
>
2?
2*
J
iw.w HA +'tn i
CIKHMi
.'U
01
BCPEFGHIJKL
onvpp
JP1
23
P)MH
IC
X303
02
'
&
03
R30
21
n
1500 6<Jtf
'i
TYPE:CB120100
11
12/10 f!f 200WV
04
10
04
MACHINE SIOE
05
*4
MAIN SPINDLE
KM
CONNECTION BOX
KA5
>130*1
;
06
23
030213 0302M
r,M
us
07
0362 1 4
anoint
TYPE E221 1-444

U. P. G. ORIENTAL
(OW/O. 9A/50H2
12W0. &5A/G0HZ
mo
AHI
A,
5"''4T7
TOOL EYE MOTOR
K401
to
PLACE
030213
24
08
09
3/\
PUJC
i<
XjlOl
ft.
c<d
YELLOtf/GRECK
10
MB
NC TERM I >LAL
BOARD A3
11 [
~
12
13
XCF33
1 78
TOT. M
701
Y4
TOR. K
r1 OB
704
109
Y5
I SB
ins
1GB
IN
KA3
X2
fs
TOU.M
14
tQ1
niQ
TOOL EYE ARN HIGH

3 1 0)6101
TOOL EYE FORWARD

QlOIBICt
bl 0)630)
iflf
TOOL EYE REVERSE

010)610)
b ;I 036301
15
16
HACK! HE SIDE
POE
MAIN SPINDLE
17
18
19
NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3
1O0L EYE
SENSOR
Sff
2LX 1 54
XII
R3
On
:<2-
1092 2
>
NOT USE
22
54Q8W.
3CSKIP
1N
5,0X18
SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)
1
/ XI 3
:
21
I.OKO 1/4W
XI 2
IN
20
2L*
SKIP CANNON
R4
-O
'
23
24
333
1
ADD,
API
CONNECTION BOX
?. 36
APR' D BY CHK' D BY
KA5.KA4
'
99-3/10
II. H
\MMsk~7
liVKVKI VAZM
(Dr.Ml A) IV
URTIN 0Y
TITLE
TOOLEYE (OPTION)
DRWN No
32CD0340302
ALT PIN No. 3 2 06-6/10 H.H
This product is subject to all the applicable Japanese Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law
*rPc I
334
1)
KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay contactors
KM
and numeric characters "5 and 8M and 9

and 12 under the contactors indicate a
relay terminal number connected to a

relay.
036212
036213
KA5
036214
"036212", "036213" and "036214" show
9"-YT2
036214
KA4
036213
the area related to a function of these

relay contactors.
2)
To see "036212" of KA3, for example, the

last four digits (0362) of the drawing
number enclosed by a red frame shows
the page number that covers KA3 in its
12th line.
SOT
TITLE
TOOL EYE (OPTION)
D RWN II o
32000340362
md Fore ii gin Trade Law

M-3 sfr 5T% ag k L 5ft -t
<
- -cv
A
iV
if
S>
iv
U*
a*
W
[{I
0?
LU
U>
M-
liSrar
ils
J5
AL.
iHE2~
r~
*-
PML
'{M&rl
& 'to UUL/
:<>*
3)
The area enclosed by a blue frame that is

in the 12th line on page 0362 is the
portion related to KA3.
tf
iyVK-p
iiL
Af
;<llr:
--itI-
-*
y*
**
u
$.Las-Jg -+-~al
3W La
fts
*
n>
O-
*
iJ
TM;'f ;ry T >i

> l-t|2L;ii it 1
i.i
-MR
jnjl
XX liT BCillCX
-MI8B-
tae- 1
Stfcf t!l Sri t-
I
Silfc loiMr
&
iimn/
VHH
/?/v
e>
8fa
&
W> j-LS.yU
IH*. Jill
tf
PI
-tf-i*
>
tf
>H
-%S
t>
4|<L - i y~*i
2;
IR* in
iwrsf
j;
tf
lJ;
ftgl
iuw: live
.15
ilt
JMflL...
fjH
it
JS
J*
I SR. Sll B3C4

IKFt U2IT-MII
A))..
*->
y.
Hj
tftQjii
.1/
IT S5
'Ib-tifrr~4Pm*
i raw
KI3W*
-r~iZri$(r~HSs
C/
&
LU
Jif*
CP
-Ml
*L_
cc1,
MU
*iu
'>
_ _- .c
J*
:1
i.h
TTF
an tit >cp< OH |
pf>r H *
x1
c -m 3i
335
336
MACHi ME SIDE
4)
MAIM SPINDLE
This section shows a motor circuit of the

tool eye. MIO is a motor and BROWN,
CONNECT! OH BOX
X40 1
1
BLACK, BLUE and YELLOW/GREEN
show each color of motor wires.

4J
"X401" is a number of the connector, and

the numeric characters 1 to 4 are pin
numbers of the connector.
li
AX401
2
A3
X40I
BROWN
MIO
BLACK
BLUE
YELLOVf/GREEN
NC TERMINAL
5)
This section indicates a signal output and

Y3, Y4 and Y5 transfer confirmation
signals to the NC board.
TOF.M, TOR.M and TOU.M are names
used in the ladder.
XCF33 is a name of a connector and 17B,

16B and 15B indicate a wiring place of the
connector.
BOARD
A3
XCF33
17B
Y3
TOF. Id
Y4
TOR. M
Y5
TOU. M
16B
15B
6)
KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay coils and
1M
m to
1
numeric characters "1 and 16" indicate a
relay terminal number connected to a
TOOL EYE ARM HIGH
a I 036206
relay.
i
is
TOOL EYE FORWARD
"a/036206", "b/036206" and "a/036207"
written under the names indicate the

areas related to a function of these relays.
"a" indicates the place of "contact a" and
"b" indicates "contact b" respectively.
7)
alMS206
&IOW2Q7
16
TOOL EYE REVERSE

a\mm
o mm
TITLE
To see "a/036206" of KA3, for example,

the last four digits (0362) of the drawing
number enclosed by a red frame shows
the page number that covers KA3 in its
06th line.
TOOL EYE (OPTION)
D RWN N c
,
32000340362
arid! Faineipt Tr8ds_Law

T? "C fife W fe tfe 51? tfa L HZ. j"
r>
337
338
ti
IA
pJ
S>
J*
II
w~
Of
T-f
Ut
uv
R &W.
'iSTBW
&
i>;
The area enclosed by a blue frame that is

in the 06th line on page 0362 is the
portion related to KA3.
UT.
**
scXb ri..
! ifrfi-W*
iA-e- **-
.....
JM..
..
&
.** n
-SM
3t>:
I.Ufr l.rt
*H
>
1C
i
k>i>
T/- VH
VJ
-A'lU, j.{
14s-
W7
i,1J -x1!*
!nr
UXM
r/r r v
>*
mt
u* ('tL
i*
r16!
.
.V
hi,
il2SS
gjry
:s
in cnim
*-
U\ l
OK. tv rcurvKi
rxx
-a-
p- - -iLZ
r h\:-
.Mi
U
rnn m
$
yj
-H*
Btm
SM"
%
r
rt
lEl.
;s
;;
I IK CJill <11
wm
.laiVPin.
if
;s
1SX Ill K7VN
IBM!
iv~
rw
Iffc ai'JIK-
..
4M-T*
Cii
---
J
w* n*
C{'
:<l
Ill
~n.
VLJH.
sOJ
v*r-
TTV
aa
j *
'
ci* EBH |
pp*r>
,"-r r .
y*
NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3
9)
This section indicates a signal input and

X198 transfers a confirmation signal to
the NC board.
I . OK Q 1/4W
rv,
X198
SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)
1M
SKIP COMMON
339
340
m XL
Electrical Circuit Diagrams
P-
]
li
i
tv-
*
i i
Ft
ip
.m..
r
i
SJJ
"3"'
_
1
mrT
Yv
JjP*'

'Xf-
CTW *.VJSUP.',*
, 1 1.
! V V6*vV ail
fcT*
Mil
icrr
I ST
W1 >U*llltt-S
nm*
wnx>
tv-awa
?*-*M1**tl*
4. 'St
*>*1*#i
, Sr, to* *o
1
l is*
-A
IBI-SHS* rew'SPi 33H
**
&
'-
r--4
..r
*.-f-
WHO
Abbreviation Comparison List

lip." tir.i
fej
it*
ife.I- Kass.
Hil
V-'S
SITS'*
....
e*
ti*
liawrffA'iC-
Lfcu.
LJffiL..
V",
Yv
\ \w i
Y
ZL
4B*Jim us
International Electrical Codes
YYY
&<>
CT!Hrn MlfCX
<#11
<*til
ili
GTi<
C8
Cl
ex - I I
Di J
4<
*511
ks*u
Jtl
Ins-'ia
ir,ftr
tMT*x
u*.>
tit
Ct-#-
tu
14##
fi-
it!!
is uh :nki
] f*l*> f
j a**. j st-ki|
o-n-.'J *i
Lit* ilitt*
fI**
Uil
lilllJU
ai-u
Via
R.n
HI
V-*
A list of the I.E.C. and

abbreviations used to
write this manual can
be located in the front
section of the Electrical
Circuit Diagrams.
:;:.V

pi
te
f:-.
_
-t=j
i
<by;|'-.;;. :
TTOfirj
f.s
IJ !
Breaker Abbreviation
.
.
.
.....

*&mV VrtM*
;i
it
'.t ;
&$v
i ,)
1 !
IT
Is
j
l1
SI
ic
L-_j-
is optional
'i>t
JTI
, V
Mi
.,i*Jaoaant;
!
i;*j
!n
It|
1*
TV
J
u ;t
; j jrm
R:
L...~
&
T*
fc
t"
j V
HI
tf.
--
JS.-v
4-11 <t)W
* n
**>*'*',
mm <
-JSA,
Ti*|.
ssw.
KUtft
11
y;
31
< 'Jrl-r
war
Yamazaki Mazak Europe
will not apply to U.S.
w:
i*i Metric "Wire Size& Color
T3ff ITflM
'
JS. Vr* im. j

,
+TU. 1*1 ft
'
wi
r.\
r1
i.xfcrwt'.
- 1pJW*c
-JWSH ji
S'
w*\
lk.
v 1>~*mu
HiiJjSuwat
Vt
1
j JT3BS-+I
uacSi
i
ftt f
a ww
- - ----. . .
-L_
wi
>.'
; Irfni
11* BL
*
-i
v-<
!?<*
y,..4....Q,
>-
I /mv*f -au.
:-p ,:T>4 - -4j--
_iUKu_-i.t-.i.I
ill-;
<"'
i r.Entire area dotted

M|
--.-v--
1* i
itis
**tcr> i
rm-M,
m-c
341
342
IS 7
-Iv
m
I
ute,
i &*.
fe
53*23*
Sfe
fe-.<
V,
fel;
V
Ui **
The 253VAC upper limit is to be considered an important

factor and every effort to avoid exceeding this limit should
be made. The best continuos voltage range for machine
operation is 208~230VAC.
'
m
mi
l
The 60 Hz machines manufactured in the U.S. are

designed for 230V + 10% (thus a I'ange of 207~253VAC).
Ifcs
pr
m,
Normal acceleration & deceleration of spindles generate

3.5% ~ 7.0% regenerative line voltage.
w*
it
:i
t; J |
1
m
When using a transformer, the 210VAC secondary is the

appropriate target for machine operation, selecting a supply
voltage on the low range allows for positive variances without
adversely affecting the machine.
&#
When a problem develops on a machine, more than

likely the problem will be on the hardwired side,
Before assuming that the problem is definitely on the
machine side, trace the problem back to the PLC input
He
or output.
ll
A"
p*-
After identifying PLC address, view the state of the

address on the Diagnosis Monitor Screen.
343
344
tfe
How to locate the PLC address.
'Tii
Jr-
t m
Example: The coolant pump motor is not turning on*
Step 1* With the Elementary Diagram List search for the

drawing numbers with the (4 series) included. Once
the 4 series is located, read through the title column
for a related item and then view the drawing.
Examples:
|146|35400840220,0|AUX. MOTORS ~
|35400840550,0|POWER PANEL CONTACTORS

|222|35400841140,0|AC-PCBPC OUTPUT RELAY
167
| Electrical Circuit Diagrams

-*
W SJ~
-r
*m<w* *am
s*
4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page
,H
seen
y-
Xvjm,
A:
]* I
...
tff
mm !
ST
i'yH
..
"j
L,<
j**
=-
ssraw
i
i
ij
n-
c
p
y
*h
......
.....
r
!:*''*fc;S:.:E532lB3iiii5S5B?a3
- %
- -.-
This drawing
has the coolant
pumps 3 phase
motor.
l
if
!v:
'
,.
s.**
w "
'jmgml j-
Now for step 2

locate the coil
that will engage
the contactor.
345
346
1
M&'m
8
*'
IS
fife: |
H 5.%-.
mm#!*.
V;
t.
Thermal Relay
1-
USS*
# *
",j - w&m
i:
PM#
f1
l*U|
\~T
.....
.....
V1.W~-
I It
P 2*
!**
FU
i>*
Contactor Pin #
i.
&
i*k
[:r:::aTtA
4-
IS+m
*15
--V-
,c
15
3-
cosLmt PUMP Hero?
5hvf
R* ! 2 3
f
s;
MIS
?**
711 ivFTTT
VgLLCW:/tiHfEM
l\
!/; ;
La-
rt!*PMH
iQDl
SSO
<4.tL..
,
ijE!l
Wire#
gtisg
sura
OBUi
Tutu
**
UIS
MmaiwasBit
26
I'I
/r
?**
rn ..
221
i ,W,|A!
jrtj
2$
4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page
-au.
ii
ESH333jB
ft
mrnm *m i* 3.9ms1
ki
Itazasd
&2&JLLJJ
13ISSE ISSEsri.
SM;
T7v
B
y
| Electrical Circuit Diagrams

*
'.'

'1
211
t*lj
Li
'
l?
it
i*
r.marm
'drt)\ntri~
2si
'
-.
v-
-~-'v
This drawing
has the coolant
MYIJRRJ.IC
| pumps motor
m m**" starter coil.
....
ry*e
>4
'
wjrw
_
I
M -II W
4
COCLANT P'X K)TC
-S
for step 3
locate the relay
l M coil that will
hftM
engage the relay
Hi
contact.
m\\
I Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0
347
348
r""""
Ip
i

&
,Imm
Wil
Tn7v
TJTIFT# i
!i
11
rt
TTTTK
FI
>*
10
mi
tt m
(CIM/Ml
IS
_
K
Wii e#
j H
IT W HDTOR
ri - *
IA I--* t
%
*:
Cross Reference
To Coil Location
'OR
wrtjRxa.li
11
FI 3
X5J1
.
*46
WCH
ll
AJMBWT*!
Pin#
feV;
iTn 1
J
I
CHIP CCW
H
Connector#
jTTT
ft
17
H
]*
f;|
.
*1
n*
TOW
ITEISIffla?
Cross Reference To
Normally Closed Contacts
i
tor"
lb:i
TM
Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0
SVi
SB
K'.
j' lyv*'
m
i
m:
it
?0
ftP
aum, ""w
hr@ Cf-
31
22
2!
2*
25
26
27
'a
n
dOJSu
sHILH
C3U J 1 1
734
a-
-
-*
m
1
1V
--
H<5
MW>
Vifcn
H<5-
K.SKJ
5!
YCfe
L
:WAI
)V.
S?
rx*o?
vtfe
H4
<f
-4
i/lPD*
KQJJW
2V-@
35
.;
734
moi
W57
?o
NexM
50**1
"'*
cw
Jl
Shown S :
TJ:
Jfc-0 -L2
<fii
cojj-.i
tt*ui
umx%
V*E*
*|'
M-a
This drawing
has the coolant
pumps PLC
output address.
CHXX CPEH
}W
CHUCX ac*
1I*XI
fi
fSKM"!9%*)
&JMr
Now for step 4
tan SLHre
locate the PLC

tail SLCEvt ftvt*S
C COLON T
tacu/ii
'
w':
' '
'*.'
address on the
Diagnosis Monitor
Screen.
'.vi i'.S,**iv
Senes, Page 114, Additional Page 0
349
350
IP
<6?
---v-
......
-v
MB
l*
/M.
2D
51
gTlniix-
DUO. (Pf*
rr
LLJ ye
CMJCK aosf
>i*
2T
Y?T
CH-K
35
Cross Reference To
FTW.I
*w
CCU $1 I
741
c-
L 3U*lt W-WO
fvMl i.JTTBTS
XCH44 L
7*i
Normally Open Contacts H

*XW
*i
pm
COOLANT
YOi
rawsi i
FuT
HB Wire #
/
|L *
4} i DU
25
|l|
*mxx
ITTSril
55
Ml
PPCN
CIMMUI
*%
jcj
$1Vi mull
rJ
mrsi
a!
|%
Ml
rnmmmm
mmmmimmwm
EmTTmi
>-A ;
'$ V v
<
. > , i#
Li
HIM
ft
Mg
4.l:Ai Vi. L
[y
sJlllMMK
Strips, Page 114, Additional Page 0
351
352
This is a newer example of the Electric Circuit Diagrams

I
h.
LIfC
(40040/23)
6 Li SL2 6L3
A
KMLG
FRIO
L1
3
4
6.0A
Vli
61.3
Vli
7/'
<40300/12)
\
PC
V3V
HYDRAULIC RUHR
MOTOR 2.2KV
200V 50Hz 7.6A
60Hz 6.8A
Z10
HZ5
XT2
35
+
zL
C DOLING FAN
ft PI
100 V 60Hz 0,15 A
c
4PC T JJ
c/0 UNTT
POWER PANEL
1M 15
li
Hrn.H
MOTOR
YQ1
oc
i
/
12
>110
LLLL
Q?
10
B19y
2300 7 A
VEl
300
X1030
S42
\ \
FRiO
KM10
M3
<403CG/12>
13
AinA2
fee
HYDRAULIC PUMP
MOTOR STARTER
40300/03
4-0 300/12
I!
16
14
X1030
15
S \
16
E
16
17
19
2L+
REF
* (4D330/11)
FRIO
19
20
98
JH.
1349
9?
REF
* (40370/05)
21
NACHM
mz
ppi
cc
BASE I/O LIMIT
TJJ
SPI
23
*
1500
;<526
x'98
//A 9
\\
I26
25
X55
A19y.:
?/
2L+
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
XII
HYDPS
DOWN
2b
27
8
9
30
31
32
33
TITLE should say

Hydraulic System
34
35
A
A
A
A
&
CHK-'L BY
V
CfWilD OVERLOAD HEATER SCTTCHG FHCM 9*70 60A 2/32/99 J &
CHAM5ED rm KCTCP FROM 2SOVAC TU JQOVftC 1/23/99 JS
YNV&m MAZAK
/7
10' 27-98
CORPQPfflOH
M.HDTTA
DRWN BY
TITLE
10-27' 9B HEAD LUBE PUMP
MET DR
J, BRYANT
DRVH
M3 557K01403002
353
This product is subject to all applicable export control laws and regulations by Japanese Governnent
354
355
356
Its important to understand the

difference between how Electrical
Ladder and PLC Ladder function.
Electrical Ladder it based on
physical closing and opening of
contacts. PLC Ladder is based on
logical status of contacts. Instead of
close or open, PLC contacts are 1
or 0.
357
358
To better understand PLC Ladder

we need to review a few basic
electronic logic circuits.
Digital
signals have only two values,

Ml" and 0",
High" and Low", or
On" and Off", or
True" and False".
On
359
Off
High
Low
360
Logic:
SI
The
Switches in Series (AND)
S2
SI
S2
Lit
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
bulb will light only under certain conditions: what?
bulb will turn on only when switches SI AND S2

are closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.
The
Logic:
/
SI
Switches in Parallel (OR)
SI
S2
Lit
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
/
S2
The
bulb will light under certain conditions: what?
bulb will turn on when switches SI OR S2 are

closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.
The
361
362
Logic: Opposites! (NOT)
The
Lit
0
1
1
0
bulb will light under certain conditions: what?
bulb will turn on when switch S is OFF, and turn

off when switch S is ON.
The
This circuit is for illustration only!

If this was a real circuit, what would happen to the battery
when switch 5 was dosed?
Logic Gates}
AND
mm
mm
n>;
s;'
bacasmi
mm
:r
'
y-'
i
:
Am&rte
'
m 'msemSBm
Two-IiFrmn+
'
Aii
11
wmmmm
Q
B |
I
m
m immm
o
m NtaS
Pill
fa si
s:-<:
;r
IIRHS&I
mm|i
The output of an AND gate is 1 only when all inputs are 1.

Only
when Input A /\N0 Input B are 1. the output is 1.
363
364
Logic
W'l
......
[I
Two -Input OR Sate
Sates: OR
OR
Truth Table
A
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
The output of an OR gate is 1 when any input is 1.
When Input
A
OR Input
B is 1, the output is 1.
Logic
fm
Gates: NOT
NOT
Truth Table
r
NOT Sate
Note that NOTgates have only one input.
The output of a NOT gate is the opposite of the input.
365
When Input is 0, Athe output is 1.

When Input A is 1, the output is 0
366
Summary of
Logic
Logic gates may
AND Gate
Sates and Truth Tables

have one or more
OR Gate
inputs.
NOT Gate
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1 isi
m88H
1
1
C
Basic PL Contacts
In PLC Ladder the
NO contact is
representing the
value of 1 .
In PLC Ladder the

NC contact is
representing the
value of 0.
367
368
C
Basic PL Contacts
If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 0.
If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is highlighted
then its true and must
be a 1 .
C
Basic PL Contacts
If this NC contact
which represents a
logic 0 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 1 .
IV
mm
If this NC contact
which represents a
logic 0 is highlighted
then its true and must
be a 0.
369
370
Electrical Ladder vs PL Lodder
51
XI
(AND)
S2
II(
X2
)
yi
Lets compare a electrical circuit to an PLC circuit.
Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder
/
SI
Jli
S2
MNC))
ii(
371
yi
XI
X2
S1 physically closes and X1 highlights to show you
that the logic 1 is True. PLC contacts wont change
from NO to NC on the PLC monitor because they
are logical not physical.
372
Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder MND)
SI
II
II
XI
S2
X2
yi
Now S1 and S2 are physically closed and X1 and

X2 are both highlighted to show you that the logic 1
is True for both. Both outputs will now be 1 .
List of Commonly Used Abbreviations for Mazatrol PLC Devices

PRS
= Proximity Switch *(xxx) = *denotes active low

SS = Select Switch
RS = Reed Switch
SW
= Switch
373
PB = Push Button
.M = Machine Side
PS = Pressure Switch
LS = Limit Switch
CD = Command
INT = Interlock
.B = Button (typically on operation panel)
.N = Signal to or from the NC
,L = Lamp (indicator lamps on operation panel)
.P = Parameter related
CL = Clamped or Closed
UCL = Unclamped
OP = Open
EXT = Extend
RET = Retract S = Solenoid
ST - Start T = Timer
FIN = Finish R = Relay
374
Assume that Alarm 250: SPINDLE START MISOPERATION has occurred. The following explains a
procedure to investigate a cause of the alarm using the ladder circuit.

(The INTEGREX series is used here as an example and the trace procedure for other models is basically the
same.)
P250 Ml 209
HI
{TOR
R7000 H2000
R700o}
Ml 209
{WAND R7000
6
P251
HDFFF
R7000}
{iNC
R2130}
M200
11
F252
M200
M200
15
4
M200
Hf
{PLS
Ml 2 28}
{SET
M5003}
{RST
M5003}
Ml 2 28 XI11
HMf
21
XI11
M200
{WOR
28
M200
33
R7000= 641
XI 56
375
READ
10775 /
{MOV
HFFFF
K4
Y310 }
R2130= -14887
JW<
jHeiaory (
R7000}
R7000 HI
3Z718 Step) Mode
III
JMONITOR
II
HI >00 L
RUN/
STOP
..
END
When the MONIT OR menu key above is pressed, the following screen will be displayed
Next , Press the -< >- Menu Key

376
P 2 50
Ml 209
0
HI
[TOR
R7000 H2000
R7000}
Ml 209
{WAM) R7000
P251
R7000}
[INC
R2130}
M200
11
P 2 52
HDFFF
M200
M200
15
i
M200
[PLS
Hf
Ml 2 28}
Ml 2 28 XI11
21
[SET M5003}
HI-iHf
XI11
[RST
M5003}
M200
[TOR
28
M200
33
R7000= 641
Memory
<
1077S /
R7000 HI
XI 56
[MOV
HFFFF
R7000}
K4
Y310 }
R2130= 23891
32718 St-ep)
HI- HP HH
Mode
'
jyy
Ti
H >- >[ Y- TRIGGER RE0IST.
HEX
Enter F50 using the numeric keypad, so the F50 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
T4S
M3433 M3110
F50
1ST92
F50 is ON. F50 was turned

On by:
1.
2.
3.
4
113430 M3454
-1 \
T45
M3430
M3417
M3417 F9S
-1 \
F97
IH
There is no reason to look for the (3)

three signals. Instead , you should
focus on why M3433 is a 0 it
should be a 1. Reset will get rid
of the alarm but, it will reappear as
soon as you try to start the spindle
again. M3433 must be brought to
a 1 before you can run the spindle.
Ml 50 3 M2Q2
HI-
377
--
II
__
M3433 (ENBST) Spindle Start Enable
MIS
|j
T45
Ml?
F50
Vt HH
M3 1 10 (S-MODE) Spindle Mode
HI-
I \
32718 Step )
KEY SIGNALS
Ml 9
1077 S /
Ml 50 4
Ml 6
Jriemory (
M3111
Mode
4F j
(SJOG.T) Spindle Jog Timer
M3430 (SPST) Spindle Start

RESET PB
Nl/
X140
M3417 (SPRNM) Spindle Run Memory
M3454 (ENBRUN) Spindle Run Enable
jttOHITOR |
F50
II
-[ ]- TRIGGER REGIST.
|
HEX
Enter M3433 using the numeric keypad, so the M3433 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
378
M3501 M4053 Y4E0

16768
M5135 M5133 M3432 M3705
lil III
Hlil
M5128 M2601
M3433
<
>
M5326
Hf-Hl
M6948
HI
(Memory <
j|
I MISS
10 7 7 S /
If
__
I IS
32718 Step )
11
Mode
i
...
(HOKITGI*.
>-
M3433
HL
:
Enter M3501 using the numeric keypad, so the M3501 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
X444
X445
M3501
5725
M5375 M3498 M3498
-<
>
<
>
T80
X444 is "PC input signal from
D40
TOOL EYE forward end

confirmation sensor" and X445 is
"PC input signal from TOOL EYE
reverse end confirmation sensor".
M3501 has a "function to rotate the
spindle" that is enabled only when
the X445 is on. The alarm occurred
because X445 was not on.
If the TOOL EYE is retracted, the
TOOL EYE reverse confirmation
sensor must be malfunctioning.
ISO
20
[Memory!
379
1077S /
jfl.
32718 Step;
20
D40
rso = o
j|
i,
Mode
j-f
{ttOHITOR EC
I JSSE5
M3501
TRIGGER REGIST.
mmm
HEX
380
DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - LADDER MONITOR Display
2. Display data description
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
item
Exit
Previous
StepNo.
Dev. No.
-I !/
-< >-
- -
A t
11
Dec
Hex
Trigger
12
Regist.
13
14
15
16
17
18
Run/Stop
NC<-IC
NC->IC
NC<-HD
NO>HD
ROMCOPY
Unit
Data description
This key is used to exit the ladder display,
Th is key is used to return to the previous menu on the display,
This key is used to search by Iad5erstep numbers?"
This key is used to search nocvrestricted by device number.
This key is used to search normally' open contacts,
This key is used to search normally closed contacts.
This key is used to search for coils,
This key is used to search for instructions.
This key is used to change the displayed data to decirraL
This key is used to change the displayed data to hexadecimal
This key is used to freeze the screen when a monitored device
changes state.
This key is used to display a device status of either ON or OFF at
the bottom of the screen.
This key is used to RUN or STOP the PLC.
This key is used to transfer date from IC-Card to NC.
This key is used to transfer data from NC to IC-Card.
This key Is used to transfer data from Hard Drive to NC,
This key is used to transfer data from NC to Hard Drive
This key is used to transfer dab between FLASH ROW and
__ ___ __
_
RAM.
19
PLCLANG
_____
__
____
This key is used to transfer data between FLASH ROW and
LANGUAGE FILE
Instruction
WAND
DAND
WOR
DOR
MOV
DMOV
FMOV
BMOV
SET
RST
>,<
D>,CK
a
]
Function
AND Instruction (16 Bits)
AND* Instruction (32 Bits)
OR Instruction (16 Bits)
DOR* instruction (32 Bits)
MOVE* instruction (16 Bits)
"MOVE* Instruction (32 Bits)
FORCE MOVE1 Instruction

BIT MOVE" Instruction
"ADDRESS SET Instruction
"ADDRESS RESET Instruction
(Resets a noted address that has been set)
"COMPARE" Instruction (168Ey
"COMPARE" instruction (32 Bits)
"EQUAL TO" Instruction (16 Bits)
D=
BCD
"EQUAL TO" instruction (32 Bits)
BIN
BCD TO BINARY* Conversion

"BINARY ADDITION* Instruction
BINARY SUBTRACTION" Instruction
DIVISION instruction
"BINARY MULTIPLICATION Instruction
t
'#
"BINARY TO BCD" Conversion
PLS
PULSE ON" Instruction (Each Scan)
PLF
"PULSE OPPHnstrudion (Each Scan)

"SUB-PROGRAM CALL Instruction
"CONDITIONAL JUMP" Instruction
RETURN* To Main Sequence Proyam
"INCREMENT ADD 1 instruction
"DECREMENT Subtract 1 instruction
EXCHANGE Data Instrudion
"BIT ON* Instruction
"BIT OFF Instruction
"OR* Exclusive Instruction (16 Bis)
"SHIFT LEFT By Binary of "K" value
"SHIFT RIGHT By Binary of "K" value
"HEX" Value
"CONSTANT
CALL
CJ
RET
INC
DEC
XCH
BIT
Bll
WXOR
SFL
SFR
HK
381
382
P250
G;
H1209
TiaOR
CB
M1209
PZ51
PZS2
IS
R7000 H2000
[MAUD R7000
R700ol
HDFFF
R700o}
{iNC
R2130}
H200
t
H200
H200
M2 00
[f'LS
E;[SET
H1228 Xlll
21Hhr4f
H122GJH500-
Xlll
RST
HS003J
H200
f
H200
[MOR
WOR
WAND
3
4
SET
RST
HEX VALUE
5
6
CONSTANT
X156
R7000= 641
R7000 HI
R2 130= 22639
-[HOV
HFypy
R7000}
K4
Y3io
R7000 = DECIMAL 641,HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001

When WOR with HEX 2000
BINARY 0010 0000 0000 0000
The result will be HEX 2281
BINARY 0010 0010 1000 0001
The result of the WOR INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
R7000 = DECIMAL 641, HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
When WAND with HEX DFFF
BINARY 1101 1111 1111 1111
The result will be HEX 0281
BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
The result of the WAND INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
The contacts of M5003 will now be true.
The contacts of M50O3 will now be false.
The HEX VALUE to be used in the instruction.
If the K is to the outside of the instruction, it states a limited amount of
BITs to use.
If the K is to the inside of the instruction, it states a decimal value to use.
Constant BIT values
K3 = 12 BITS K4 = 16 BITS
K1 =4 BITS
K2 = 8 BITS
K5 = 20 BITS
K7 = 28 BITS
K6 = 24 BITS
= 32 BITS
K\
383
M200
S498
P28
K2
D24
D23
D25
D25
D29
P89
6579
D170
R2170 K10
M454
D23
3
H470
{=
KO
D29
{>
H5
D89
6621
6869
}IF
HO
3
4
>
<
-[CALL
R2170 = 2000
D89
D170
20000
D23
22
D24
D2S
BINARY MULTIPLICATION
R2170 = DECIMAL (2000) MULTIPLICED by CONSTANT 10
The result will be (20000) and stored in D 1 70.
BINARY DIVISION
D23 = DECIMAL (22) DIVIDED by CONSTANT (2)
The result will be (if) and stored in D24.
~~
EQUAL TO
If D29 EQUALS CONSTANT 0, then instruction is true.
GREATER THAN
If HEX 5 is GREATER THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is
true.
384
LESS THAN
If HEX 0 is LESS THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is true.
X230
1734
Ih
H23S
dk{HOV
H230
D617
Pll
P16
D618
[CALL
P12
[CALL
P19
D7S
R20
[CALL
2
H230
K900
R20
H200
5040
= o
MOV
+
!
>617
D618
D23
>23
K1
22
D7S
23
MOVE
Move the data from R20 to D617.
BINARY SUBTRACTION
Subtract the CONSTANT (900) from the data in R20 (0).
The result will be (0) and stored in D618.
-MNARYkDDlTlON
ADD the CONSTANT (1) to the data in D23 (22).
The result will be (23) and stored in D75.
385
H12Z8 Xlll
\hr~M-
{sBT
HEOO-
{RST
MS003}
R1937
D80
SFR
D80
K8
XCH
R1999
R1994]-
HI
D89
Xlll
t
MZOO
262
{HOV
1
H491
6853
H512
{ 1-[{BIT
R2109
K6
H480
HH
RZ109
K6
{HOV
R1937= O
SFR
D80
RZ109= 0
R1999= 3
R1994= 0
SHIFT RIGHT
The 16 BIT BINARY value in D80 will shift 8 places to the right, filling
the vacant places with 0s.
Example: If D80 = 24755 or Binary 0110 0000 1011 0011
0000 0000 0110 0000 1011
BIT INVERSE (OFF)
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 0.
Will be
BIT ON
Deleted
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 1.
BII
BIT
XCH
EXCHANGE
The value in R1999 (3) and R1994 (0) will exchange.
The result being R1999 (0) and R1994 (3).
386
H203
Clk[DHC
MZ7S
1513
M2014 M540
\br*r
3769
D4
R199?}
H201S
I H
3774
{=
K13
XI 50
8404
R1997J
{HOV
X109
KO
R1997J-
Ih-H
PLF
M744
[PLS
H378
M5003 nsoo3
J-HH
8424
D4
DEC
INC
PLF
PLS
{BIT
=3
R7005
K6
R1997= 1
R7 0 0 5 = 640
DECREMENT (SUBTRACT 1)
Subtract (1) from the data in D4 (3).
The result will be D4 = (2).
INCREMENT (ADD 1)
Add (1) to the data in R1997 (1).
The result will be R 1997 = (2).
PULSE OFF
Address M744 will be OFF for one scan of the PLC.
PULSE ON
Address M378 will be ON for one scan of the PLC
387
MZOO
XI 56
K4
JHOV
33
G\[BCD
X23C
II
3433
{/
R44
HFFFF
Y310
R44
D93
K5
D94
H594
KO
D95
<
}
2
H1199
4887
>
-[FMOV KO
R1S8
K4
[FHOV KO
DS4
K20
[BHOU R2782
D1006
K14
H229
if
H378
8481
R44
BCD
FMOV
BMOV
388
D93
D94
D9S
R1S8
BINARY TO BCD
The BINARY DATA in R44 will be changed to BINARY CODED
DECIMAL and moved to D93.
Example: If R44 = 1 3 5 or BINARY 0000 0000 1000 0111
The BCD stored in D93 would = 0000 0001 0011 0101
FORCED MOVE
BATCH TRANSFER OF MULTIPLE 16 BIT DATA BLOCKS.
A (0) will be moved into R158 ~ R161.
BIT MOVE
16 BIT DATA BLOCK TRANSFER
The first 14 BITS beginning with BIT 0 from R2782 will be moved to
D1006.
220{BIT
R414
K1S
J|
[CALL
PI
iPLS
M852
RET
P10
D100
H200
PI
XI 5B
4939
-\\
2
4957
H200
5340
PXO
t
H200
5523
{DHOV HI
5653
R414
CALL
RET
22672
D100
SUB -PROGRAM CALL,

Call SUB-PROGRAM PI
REtURU TO MAIO-PROGRTM
RETURN back to the LdcRr sequence where sub-program was called
389
390
Matrix Ladder Troubleshooting

Introduction
Troubleshooting with the Matrix Ladder software takes a bit more effort
than using the previous controls ladder tools. However the advantage of
having comments displayed while viewing ladder symbols will make up for
the added keystrokes.
First, you must load the ladder into the on-board area. Follow the
instructions, Matrix Ladder Monitor - Appendix A
Simple troubleshooting.
Once the ladder monitor is displayed along with comments, the next step
is to do a search for the contact or coil that is causing the problem. In most
cases it is to search for the alarm generated on the screen. See the ladders
element or comment list for the most complete listing of alarms.
An example is alarm 217.
Alarms 200 to 399 which are generated by the machine itself, simply
subtract 200 and do a search. In this example, this would be FI 7.
Now, the Matrix deviates from the M640/Mpro.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 are searched by subtracting 1000.
Example:Alarm 1208 is searched by F208.
Alarms 200 to 399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will add 200.
Example: Alarm 250 on Head 2 will be searched by F450.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will
Su 6 7 ftcT
Example: Alarm/301 will be alann searched by F701 .
Alarms 200 to 399 on Robot of multiplex will need addffifrfl. LJO0
Example: Alarm 202 on the GL will be searched by F602.
Assuming that you now have the ladder displayed with comments, press
the left menu key till you see the menu key Monitor
Pressing Monitor, you will see contacts highlighted in blue when on.
If there isnt anything highlighted, ensure that the top display doesnt say
monitor stop. If it does, select the Start/Stop to toggle it on.
Monitor
Another display at the top to pay attention to is the ladder file that it being
viewed. When searching for a contact or coil, the current ladder will be
searched. At the end of the ladder, it will state:
391
PLC Onboard
The find target could
not be: found. Find another
program.
NO
Enter yes, and will to another ladder file within the M01 area. Remember
there are multiple ladder files.
Pic Run
Or Stopped
Which Ladder file

Being viewed
Til
X
**
?1*
XMC
l*t
Monitor Mode
Or
Monitor Stop
-a***?*
1385
??*;
*1/08
mt S3
urn
mi
if!
LnJ
r
:E I s
II?
CI-iSCE
MDNlTm
iDto:
Searching for a contact or coil.

1 ) If yourf screen looks similar to the one above, press the left menu key
FIND
till you see
REPLACE
2) After selecting this menu key will allow you to select

FIND
CONTACT
OR COIL
392
IF!
3) Enter in FI 7 for alarm 217. and it will stop at the first contact or coil
of FI 7 it finds.
4) Pressing the TARGET menu key will toggle between contact and coil.
H3h-
-Th
28775
k F17
-tf-
OM.T
irf
X7
N971B
M9720
-1 hINTE
F17
H8010
ih:;M
RE
RIP
HV
28787
Itl
TARGET PROGRAM
N6011
M
s'
TARGET
|CONTACT
FIND
J<9718
JT432
)MAIN374
W.
F18
D
| M01
$10
TARGET
DEVICE
FIND
TARGET
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
CHANGE
Example above shows the search for F17 and the target selected for coil.
When you are finished searching, then keep pressing the left menu key until
display shows the copyright screen. Select END and will exit.
You will probably see the following menu display. Ignore its warning and
say YES to exit.
__
EH
Aili
'
.,
Mi V'
COPYRIGHT 2004
There is date not preserved efter it edits

d in the onboard edit area. The content o
the edit is lost when ending as it Is.
NO
I L RIGHTS RESERVED
1
YES
| MO!
NO
393
Appendix-A Matrix Ladder Monitor

1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select
NC
FILE
5) Press OPEN.
A) Display will say "Reading from Pic"
7) Press OK.
8) Press <LEFT MENU< key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values.
10) If still not showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
11) If No comments then may be that the comments aren't
TOOLS
B) Select COMMENT
DISPLAY
C)Make
Still No comment?

A) Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
screen .
B) Select ENVIRON .
SETTING
C) Select NC FILE
D)
SETTING

NC
E)
FILE
I)
Repeat steps 5 through 11 to see the ladder with
comments .
394
Matrix Ladder Save Procedure.

Ensure both ladder and comments are saved.
1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and enter 1131 and
press Input.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select
NC
FILE
5 ) Press OPEN .
A)Display will say Reading from Pic

7 ) Press OK.
8) Press CLEFT MENUC key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values .
10) If still not showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
11) If No comments then may be that the comments aren't
_
TOOLS
B) Select COMMENT
DISPLAY
C)Make
Still No comment?
A) Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
screen .
B)
Select ENVIRON .
SETTING
C)
D)
Select NC FILE
SETTING

NC
E)
FILE
Repeat steps 5 through 10 to see the ladder with comments.
395
ladder and comments are shown, go to next step to

save ladder and comment file.
12) If
13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the Copyright screen, the
LADDER must be shown as solid black.

14)
Press
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
Press OPEN
Press OPEN again.
Select OK.
Press CLEFT MENUC key till see Copyright screen again.
Select I EXTERNAL
FILE
20)
Press
21)
Press EXTERNAL
NC
FILE
SAVE
PROJECT
SAVE
22)
If a USB jumpdrive is inserted, then make sure that

the Drive/Path is set correctly to the drive.
23)
Select PROJECT
NAME
24)
Enter in an appropriate filename, normally ladder

version .
25)
Press SAVE.
26)
Select OK.
The ladder is now saved to the USB Jumpdrive.
Note: The LPC file is not saved with the ladder. It must be
copied from the c:\m6y ymw\mplc or tplc folder.
Save the * . lpc and *.alm and *.bmp files from the
c:\m6y_ymw\mplc or tplc folders using Windows Explorer.
27)
Note: Note: When the project ladder is saved , it will be a

folder that includes sub-folders containing the ladder and
comments . The lathe, e-machine, and mill's file structure
are different.
Following example shows for Integrex Mark IV.
396
S~3 373MX11B
j
HM
B-Q Resource
! l__J
!
&>*!
LJ
SV'fe
Others
373MX11B
JC*U~
B-y Pou
l_J Body
Select an item to view its description.
Name >
U Resource
__
I
File Folder
&)Gppw.gpj
_!
Size | Type
1 KB
3 KB
1 KB
78 KB
Project.inf
ProjectDB.mdb
GX Developer Project
GX Developer Project
Setup Information
Microsoft Access Da. .
The Gppw . * , Pro ject . inf , and ProjectDB.mdb are structure

files for pic. Do not change/remove any of these from the
project's ladder filename.
Under Resource folder is additional folders, Others, Pou,

and the file param.wpa. Do not change/al ter/remove any.
I JOII1C
[_] Others
,*7.7*
L-JPOU
11 param.wpa
Resource
Size j Type
Name
LT:N--- j
wwanwifllt
if] 373MX1 lB.wcd
317 KB
WCD File
fe-
Others
The Others folder contains the comments for the ladder
which is used for ladder display.
Under the Pou folder is a folder called Body which contains

the actual ladder file .
Li
LIWIWIJ
Name
!*] 373MX1A8. wpg
bize
207 KB
Type
WPG File
Body
As stated earlier, E-machine and Mills file/folder

structure may be different for the pic ladder.
397
398
Matrix Pic Ladder Update Procedure R4 .

Added saving of ladder to hard drive c:\ladder(step 1 and 13 revised(R4))
1)
Backup the existing ladder if not done already and copy

in the new ladder from portable device, probably USB
drive to C : \Ladder (R4 ) . This ensures that the ladder
will be backed up properly in future using the backup
softwares .
Note: Power off and on between backup of ladder so that

the Ladder Onboard Sram doesn't have existing ladder in
it .
First part will be to load into the Ladder-F (M01 area) ,

part is to load into Ladder-B (M02 area) . The M01 area
controls actual machine and M02 controls simulation. These
ladders are identical so only need backup M01 area.
2nd
2) Press DIAGNOS.
3) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and
and press Input.
4 ) Press
enter 1131
LADDER
MONITOR
5)
Select
6)
Select
7)
Select YES to stop the pic. Status before yes is RUN.

Question box will disappear. Note that doesn't say
PLC STOP like M640.
8)
Press DELETE .
9)
Press SEL. ALL
NC
FILE
PLC
Run/ Stop
Then DELETE
again and select
YES
/CANCEL
10)
Press OK. In red, you'll see WRITE LADDER TO ROM.
11)
Press left menu key twice Select EXTERNAL

FILE
399
12) Select
OPEN
PROJECT
Highlight the file folder containing new pic. This

should be directed to new file that was copied to c:\ladder
folder is step 1. (R4)
13)
14)
Press the SELECT button.
15) Select OPEN

16)
Press OK.
17)
Press CLEFT MENUC till see copyright screen.
18 ) Select
NC
FILE
19) Press SAVE.

20) Press SAVE
again(2nd
If it asks if
time).
you wish to overwrite, say ALL YES.
21)
Press OK.
22)
Press CLEFT MENUC key.
23)
Press
ROM
WRITE
This will clear out the ladder from SRAM area.

24)
Select YES.
25)
Select YES again (2nd time) when it asks you if you

really want to execute.
If the pic is somehow running, the following will be

as ked .
A) Select YES again (3rd time) It will ask you again, PLC is
in Run state, Is a ROM write performed, after stop PLC?
400
Translation: Pic is now running, the pic will

automatically stop and do a ROM write. Is this okay?
(4th
B) Select YES
STOP STATE.
26)
Press OK.
27)
Select
time) when message will say PLC is in a

Is PLC changed into a RUN state?
PLC
Run/ Stop
Select YES if the status window says: STATUS: STOP.
If says STATUS: Start, then proceed to step 29 to update
the second ladder Ladder-B (M02)
28)
29)
Press CLEFT MENUC key till see menu
30)
Select CONNECT
ENVIRON
SETTING
NC
SETTING
31) Press the Down Arrow key or click on drop down menu so
that is displays M02 in box.
32)
Press
SET
and M02 will be displayed in Orange M02
color at the lower right hand side of display.

At this point repeat steps 5 through 28 to load in the
pic to the Ladder-B side (M02)
33)
34) Before exiting go back to ENVIRON. SETTING, CONNECT NC

SETTING, and press Down Arrow key to reselect M01 .
35) If the lpc file is to be updated, delete or rename the
current lpc file in the c:\M6y_ymw\M_plc or T_plc folder.
The copy the new file into that directory.
Power off and on and update is complete. Verify by

looking at the version screen.
36)
401
402
1 Outline
This document describes the maintenance of the thermal displacement compensation software
(MazakTdc).
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation
considering that the thermal deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using
this method, the thermal displacement could be compensated with high accuracy in the steady state.
However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not be compensated properly because
the time constants for the temperature change are significantly different between the thermal
displacement and the measured temperature.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the
thermal deformation of the machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. It monitors the
spindle speed and compensates the thermal displacement according to the speed. Therefore, it can
compensate it properly even in the transient state.
2 Installation of the MazakTdc software

2.1
Function setting on Matrix
The software has been pre-installed in the hardware on Matrix.

To validate the software function, set the parameter as follows:
Step 1 Set the parameter 042 bit4 to 1. That will allow MazakTdc.exe to be started when the
power is turned on.
2.2 Individual installation

The following describes the procedure for the individual installation of the "MazakTdc software.
Step 1 Create a new folder named "C:Mazaktdc.

Step 2 Copy the MazakTdc.exe" file from a media such as a USB memory or a floppy disk to the
created folder C:Mazaktdc."
If you already have a parameters file, copy it to the same folder as the EXE file.
f-lnlxl
flWESiTB ' Mazaktdc

?yJWQ Sim
- M 7-f X/tV9i
3 3.5 CA FD
<C )
8
At :
/;!;
(A.)
77Tiioiir
MazakTdc.exe
fij] Parameler.txt
60KB
4KB 747#
_) Act obat Reader

_J Cpcu
J Custom Display
JSctbus
J Ladder
Ladder3
L_J Ladder 4
:_J LADDERWTNB
I m6y_vmvv
It Cj mtyboot
;+ i
1 Mainte
JIDSB
_J MC.Backup
_J MC'.Dir.ct
iL
_J
MC. Machine
P'2j
(ZSmim
ZJ
:;a=i
403
3 Version upgrade of the MazakTdc software

3.1 Version upgrade on MATRIX
The version upgrade of MazakTdc.exe will be automatically performed when upgrading the version
of the NC software.
The operations described in 3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software might be
required due to a modification to MazakTdc.exe. In that case, that will be informed in the NC
software release notice.
3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software

When upgrading the version of the MazakTdc software after its data structure is changed, the
parameters used in the previous version might possibly be applied after the version upgrade is
completed, resulting in a malfunction. Therefore, perform the following procedure to prevent the
previous parameters from being applied after the version upgrade:
Step 1 Before starting the NC version upgrade, open the MazakTdc window and save the
current parameters in the folder C:Mazaktdc.
As for how to open the MazakTdc window, refer to 5 Opening the window.
As for how to save a parameters file, refer to 8 Controlling the parameters.
If no change was made to the parameters on a customers machine, it is not needed to
save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder C:Mazaktdc.
Step 2 Clicking on the Sr button will open the |Coefficient2 Setting.

X
dialog of ''Coefficient2 Setting..," shown on
Cl | o'oOOOOE+00
the right.
0.000Q0E+Q0
| . nnr-nn
c2 | 0.00000E+00
cii; j
o.oooooE+00
92
There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to e4,

for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the dialog
Set all the values of these parameters to

0.
d2
j 0 OOOOOE+OO
0.00
Then, click the OK button after changing

the parameters to close the dialog.
......
*J
Z
c2
j 9.88000E-01
| 790oioOE-03
d1 | 8.823S3E-01
d1
j O.OOOOOE+00
d2
3.2941 0E-02
c)2
ei
0.00
el
J 0.00
e2
0.00
e4
0.00
e2
0.00
e2
0.00
e3
0.00
e3
0.00
e4
0.00
e4
0.00
cl
O.OOOOOE+OO
CANCEL
Step 3 Exit the running MazakTdc software.

Refer to 4.2 Exiting the software.
Step 4 Perform the NC version upgrade
Step 5 Restart the NC unit.

Confirm that the MazakTdc software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 6 Stop the thermal displacement compensation.
Click the
button to stop the compensation.
404
Step 7 Import the parameters file.

Open the window, referring to 5 Opening the window.
Import the new parameters file, referring 8 Controlling the parameters.
Step 8 Check the parameters.
Confirm that the parameters set to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1.
Step 9 Restart
Exit the MazakTdc software and restart the NC unit.
3.3 Individual version upgrade of the MazakTdc software

The following describes the procedure for the individual version upgrade of the MazakTdc" software,
which is not involved in the version upgrade of the NC software.
Step 1 Open the "MazakTdc window and save the current parameters as a file in the folder
C:Mazaktdc.
As for how to open the MazakTdc window, refer to 5 Opening the window.
As for how to save the parameters file, refer to 8 Controlling Parameter.
If no change was made to the parameters for a customers machine, it is not needed to
save a parameters file because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder C:Mazaktdc.
Step 2 Clicking on the & button will open the

dialog of Coefficient2 Setting.., shown on
the right.
There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to

e4, for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the
dialog
Coefficient Setting;.
X
j OOOOOOE+OO
e2 j 0.00000E+00
C1
d1
02
Set all the values of these parameters to

0.
j O.OOOOOE+OO
j O.OOOOOE+OO
0.00
|O.OOOOOE+OO
c2| O.OirULE-IO
C1
dl
02
81
mz
i::
v
j 8.82353E 01
| 3 2941 OE-02
0.00
'] 9.88000E 01
c2 j 7.90CObTT
C1
d1
j 0.00000E+00
d2
|O.OOOOOE+OO
ei
o.oo
e2
0 00
e4
0.00
e3 j 0.00
64
Then, click the OK button after changing

the parameters to close the dialog.
0.00
64
0.00
lr~:g<
CANCEL
Step 3 Exit the running "MazakTdc software

Refer to 4.2 Exiting the software.
Step 4 Open the folder C:Mazaktdc through the Explorer and change the name of the
MazakTdc.exe" file by adding the version number that is currently installed in order to
prevent the file from being overwritten. (For example, the name of the old version file was
changed to MazakTdc62.exe in the figure on the next page.)
405
Step 5 Copy the MazakTdc.exe |lj Itl-7

file from a media such as
a USB memory or a floppy 03 MazakTdc
disk to the folder.
i
d)
HSBj
CMazakTdo
U7XfcP
5 El ritd jtMg
Ml 1X03*1*8
Hsf
XK MazakTdc.exe
53' 0D lan_card_driver_pcislot_c||i
3 d) m6y_ymw
m6yboot
E3 Lfl
mainte
\B
*>| y|g| ,|
"]
]- 10] J2ctbus
i Q Kev
0-0] Ladder
lil-dl
. ..
-----------,...._
MazakTdc62.exe
Parameter txt |
Para meter05051 7# 1 .txt
360KB 7V.
360KB 77*!
3KB 74;
3KB 74;:
03 MazakTdc
03 MC_Backup
) i.,1 MC_Direct Mode
Prograr||l
i "d) MC_Machine Programs |||

h d) MC_Machine Programs! '0
SI
\i mcofiVift
il
s'1- /t
[725KB
!.3tGB)
Step 6 Double click on MazakTdc.exe.

Confirm that the MazakTdc software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 7 Check the version of the MazakTdc software.

As for the check procedure, refer to 4 Basic function operations.
Step 8 Import a parameters file.
Open the window, referring to 4 Basic function operations.
Read a new parameters file in, referring to 8 Controlling the parameters.
Step 9 Check the parameters.
Check that the parameter value changed to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1 .
Check the value of each parameter, referring to 7 Functions in the window.
Step 10 Restart
Exit the MazakTdc software and restart the NC unit.
406
4 Basic function operations

4.1
Manual start of the software
Step 1 To manually start the software, double click on MazakTdc.exe.

The icon will appear in the task tray.
:1 ?
The thermal displacement compensation will begin just after the software is started.
4.2 Exiting the software

Step 1 Move the mouse pointer over the icon in the task tray.
jMazakTdc|
,a49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.

The Exit menu will appear.
-*
About MasakTcb...
Exit
j ?;58
Step 3 Left click on the Exit menu.

- The software will be exited.
When the software is exited, the thermal displacement compensation will stop.
4.3 How to check the software version

[l 19:49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.
> The About MazakTdc... menu will appear.
About MazakTdc...
Exit
|P'~! II
S 20:00
Step 3 Left click on the About MazakTdc... menu.

The dialog with the version information will appear.
About Ma2akTDC
MazakTdc Version Beta 6.6
OK
Copyright (C) 2005 Yamazaki Mazak Corp.
407
5 Opening the window

Opening the window will allow you to set, change, save and import the parameters.
To open the window, it is required to enter the password.
5.1
Entering the password
fMazakTdcl
19:49
Step 2 Double click on the icon.

-* The Password dialog will appear.
Password
rr~i
CANCEL
Step 3 Enter the password 1131 and then press the OK button
[3
Password
II
r
Oh
CANCEL
The Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation window will appear.

-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation
File Edit Compensation: Setting.. View Help
jjH : JJfe m ffi foj
Ready
408
ab Cd
; f j
HE
issiti
I!
r;
[HUM j
6 Contents shown in the window

The window provides the software processing information, the measured temperatures, the spindle
speed, the spindle load and the offset amounts.
The following shows the state of the window just after the compensation begins.
File
Edit
ab
ced # fj
;Loading DataCom OK.

.NCTable is attached correctly!
;Data Initialize OK.
;Fin>t Temperature : 20.80
;Start thermal deformation compensation !
;ye a r/d ate/time
T1
T3
T2
20.75
05/06/27 19:46:09; 20.85
21.98
Iv
V
...4.
-in|xi
Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation

Setting. View Help
Compensation
Compensation time
Year/Month/Day
Hours:Minutes:Seconds
Processing information
T4
20.52
T5
0.00
mSp
0
mLd
4
cmp.X
6.000
cmp.Z
16.000
V.
V.
"V"
Measured
temperature
ch1, 2, 3, 4 & 5
cmp.Y
-6.000
Spindle Info.
Speed & load |
r-r
Offset amount
X, Y & Z
J
NUM
-- 1
jf||
After the compensation begins, only the compensation information is displayed in the windows as the
time passes.
The measured temperatures will be shown in the order of ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 and ch5 immediately
after the time column.
- ~|xj

File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help
iH|
&
m[mm
05/06/27 19:48:03:
05/06/27 19:43:13;
05/06/27 19:48:23 ;
05/06/27 19:43:33;
05/06/27 19:43:43;
05/06/27 19:43:53;
05/06/27 19:4903;
20.95
20.95
20.95
20.95
20.98
20.95
20 95
20.75]
20.70
20.75
20.75
20.75
20.75
| 20.75 |
ab
TToil '20.47 Food

22.07 | j 20 52 1 I 0.00
20.47 | I 0.00
20.47 | | 0.00
22.03
22.12
22.03
22.03
21.98
20.47
20.47
20.47
I I
0.00
| 0.00
I I
0.00
7'
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
-6.500
-6.500
-6.500
-6.500
-6.500
....
-6.500
-6.500
Ready
ch1
ch2
ch3
ch4
ch5
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
JNUM
t.
409
7 Functions in the window

7.1
Functions
File
Menu Bar Title

Save
Icon
The description of the function

Overwrite save the text in the window to the specified file in
the Text format.
Save the text in the window as a new file in the Text format.
Import the parameters file (extension: *.txt). However, it
cannot be imported while performing the thermal
displacement compensation. If you try to import the file
during the compensation, the alarm Please Stop
Compensating!" will appear.
Export and save the parameters to a file (extension: *.txt)
Exit the software.
Undo the previous editing operation.
Cut the selected text in the window.
Save As..
Import Parameter
Edit
Export Parameter
Exit
Undo
Cut
Copy
Compensation
Setting..
Copy the selected text in the window.
fli
Paste
Paste the copied or cut text to the window.
Select All
Start
Select all the texts in the window.

Start the thermal displacement compensation.
ffi
Stop
Stop the thermal displacement compensation.
Inter Face
Open the Inter Face parameters setting dialog.
Coefficient!
View
&
Open the Coefficient! parameters setting dialog.
ab
Coefficient2
Open the Coefficient2 parameters setting dialog.
Toolbar
Show or hide the tool bar.

Show or hide the status bar.
Hide the Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation
window. (To show the window again, double click the icon in
the task tray.) _
Show the version dialog.
Status Bar
Hide Window
Help
About Mazak Tdc..
7.2 Setting the interface parameters.

Clicking the
button on the tool bar will open the Inter Face Setting dialog. The following table
provides the description of each parameter.
|Inter Face Setting..

j NC Type
| C M640T,MT,TE,MT-5X,T Nexus
; C M64DM, M-5X, M Nexus
C M640M Pro
r M640MT Pro
f? MATRIX
Temp filter
Load filter
Compensation
Temperature
(2500
|2234
RT2|2230
RZ 2226
RT3 ] 2232
RY
Rsts j 0
410
Round Unit
10
20
)001 mm
RT1
RT4
fo
[
RT5 0
Unit
Follow up (hour)
Time Constant
Rregister IJF
RX 2501
Interval (sec)
jo.uOOQI mm |
r Restore Log File

iLlgilJl
CANCEL
Parameter
NO Type
Default
Select
N/A
Set Range
I/O Object*
Description
Select the type of the NC unit for the machine.

If no NC type is selected (which is the default
state), the compensation will not begin._
Interval (sec)
0 to 3599
10
The interval that the thermal displacement
O
compensation is performed. If the set value is
0, the compensation will be automatically
performed at the interval of 10 seconds, which
is default.
Follow up (hour)
3
Oto 24
Follow-up time. If the set value is 0, the
O
follow-up will not be performed._
Time Constant
Oto 30
0
Width of the dead zone
O
Temp filter
0
Oto 30
Number of the moving average filters to be
O
input for the temperature data
Load filter
0
0 to 30
Number of the moving average filters to be
O
input for the load data
Round Unit
0.0005mm
Rounding unit. Basically apply the same unit as
O
that of the NC interpolation. _
RX
0 to 20000
0
R Register No. which the X-axis thermal
O
displacement offset amount is written to. If the
set value is 0, the offset amount will not be
written.
RY
0
0 to 20000
R Register No. which the Y-axis thermal
O
written.
RZ
0 to 20000
0
R Register No. which the Z-axis thermal
O
written.
Rsts
Read the state of the machine in.
RT1
0
0 to 20000
R Register No. from which the NC value of the
O
temperature sensor 1 is read in. If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT2
0
0 to 20000
O
temperature sensor 2 is read in If the set value
RT3
0 to 20000
0
O
RT4
0 to 20000
0
O
RT5
0
0 to 20000
Number of R register from which the NC value
O
of the temperature sensor 5 is read in. If the
set value is 0, the NC value of the temperature
sensor will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)
Unit
0.0001 mm
Unit of offset amount
O
Check
Restore Log File
X
Checking this check box will automatically save
N/A
the thermal displacement compensation history
to the C:MazakTdcLog.txt file. This function
is valid at debugging. However, if debugging
with this parameter checked, the file size will
gradually increase, running out free space on
the hard drive. Therefore, this parameter is not
checked every time when starting the software
as default.
NOTE: The mark O indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark x" indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
_
_
411
7.3 Setting the parameters (coefficients a & b).

Clicking the
button on the tool bar will open the following Coefficientl setting.. dialog. The
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.
ill
Coefficientl Sett ing..

b
a1 -1 .23
a1 -5 98
a2 j 2 24
o2 179
a2
a3[~278
a5| 0 00
a6|-291
a6 -23 .16
04 3.05
'
a4
as j
1.73
0.00
a6 -27.70
b6 -7 79079E-04
b7 -2 58678E-04
j bsl
Wm
BBSs
Parameter Default
0 OODOOE+OO
b9 0.000C0E+00
V I b10 j -2 S000UE+01
ay
Set Range
I/O
Object*
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
j O.OOOOOE+OO
b2| UOOOOOE+OO
b2| -1 09026E-05
b3 mSSFEg'"' b3| 0 OOOOOE+00
i t*r 9 2UnB(ir-14 b4| 0 ODOOOE+OO
j b5 }* 1 12160E 07
b5 I 0 00000E+00
9 76
: M(19.9S552E-01
a1 -7.33
a3| 6 91
o4|-1 .56
as j o no
a3 -3.92
b1
b1
j 9 96222E 01
b2 -8.54373E-06
b3
jTo6663E-10
b4 j -4 07307E-1 3
b5 -1 68425E-06
| 0 OODOOE+OO
b6 j -1 892S2E-03
|
| O.OOOOoifoO
b9 j O.OOOOOE+OO
b10j 0.00000E+00
b7 j 5.91 733E-03
b6
b7 0 00C0CIE+00
b8
j 0 OOCOOE+OO
b9 j 0 00C00E+G0
b10 j -5.00000E+01
b8
IkS3
CANCEL
Description
Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure

thermal displacement compensation
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
a2
O
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
a3
0
O
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
a4
O
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
a5
O
a6
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Constant of the structure thermal displacement
O
compensation
b1
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Coefficient of the displacement term for the spindle
O
response surface
b2
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Coefficient of the speed term for the spindle response
O
surface
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
b3
0
Coefficient of the speed squared term for the spindle
O
response surface _
b4
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e3r
Coefficient
of the speed cubic term for the spindle
O
response surface
b5
0
-3.0e38 to +3.06
Coefficient of the (speed x displacement) term for the
O
spindle response surface
b6
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
Speed ON/OFF for the spindle response surface
O
b7
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Speed UP/DOWN for the spindle response surface
O
b8
-3.0e38 to +3.0e35'
0
Squared nominal load coefficient for the spindle
O
response surface
b9
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Not used
O
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
b10
Determine the limit (the range of the offset
O
displacement). The offset amount by the spindle
response surface is limited to the range of b10 to 0 if
b10 < 0; and 0 to b10 if b10 > 0. (If b10 = 0, no limit.)
NOTE: The mark O indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark x indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
a1
412
7.4 Setting the parameters (coefficients c, d & e).

button on the tool bar will open the following Coefficientl setting.. dialog. The
Clicking the
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.
*J
11
X
c1 | 0.00000E+00
C2
f n OOOOOE+OO
d1
| 0.00000E+00
d2
faoooooF+00
df 0 00000E+00
c2
c2
] 852353F-01
d2[ 3.2941 0E-02
e1
1.00
e1
1 00
82
e3
e3
0 oc
eft
e2
e4
j O.OOOOOE+00
1 1.00
1 0.00
2
9 88000E-01
7.90000E-03
O.OOOOOE+OO
di
d2
e2
0 OOOOOE+OO
1 00
( 0 00
e3
100
e4
0 00
e4T
1 00
iniMzm
Parameter Default
c1
0
Set Range
I/O Object*
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
c2
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
d1
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
d2
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
e1
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
e2
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
e3
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
e4
-3.0e38~+3.0e38
1 00
CANCEL
Description
Displacement compensation coefficient 1 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop._
Displacement compensation coefficient 2 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop.
Distortion compensation coefficient 1 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop.
Distortion compensation coefficient 2 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop. _
Structure thermal displacement compensation is
valid
Spindle thermal displacement compensation with
the spindle response surface is valid _
Displacement compensation in natural cooling at
_
_
_
_
the spindle stop is valid

Distortion compensation in natural cooling at the
spindle stop is valid
413
8 Controlling the parameters

8.1 Saving the parameters to a file
Save the current setting to a parameters file (*.txt).
Step 1 Click File and then Export Parameter.
The following dialog will appear.
Coirc-n. jturv
Save
Save
Import Parameter
Export Parameter
&it
Step 2 Set the file name and click the Save button.
Save In: |.jj t,ta.wio
Parartveter.txt
8.2
Filename:
IBBHH-
Save astute
fiTI FilesOMxO
1
Save
Cancel
Importing the parameters from the file
Import the parameters file (*.txt). It is required to save the parameters file in the Mazaktdc folder.
(However, the parameters cannot be imported during the thermal displacement compensation.)
Step 1 Click File and then Import Parameter.
The following dialog will appear.
Edit .Compensation
. CtrKS
Save
Save As.
:
Export Parameter
Exit;
Step 2 Select the parameters file to be used from the Mazaktdc folder and then click the Open
button.
Save;|n:
Mazaktdc
H aJdjl=Tj
ll) Farameter.txt
Filename:
..
Save as type:
414
Save
jT*:< t
Files ( txO
Cancel
Step 3 Exit the Mazaktdc software once and restart it.

(As for how to exit or start the software, refer to 3 Basic function operations.)
By performing the above steps, the parameter will be saved in the registry.
8.3 Name of the parameters file

Define and identify the name of the parameters file as follows:
Machine standard parameter
tdcOOOAAAAA.txt
Identifies that it is the thermal displacement parameters file.
Machine code
A A A A A : Identifies the added number, the machine specification or the parameter version.
Determine the string and the digit number for every machine
tdc
OOO
EX) tdc 372A0000.txt (in case of INT100)

tdc OOODHBAA.txt
Machine code
O:
Version identification
Special-ordered
A:
A:
Revision to the special-ordered one
9 Work involved in the hard-disk replacement

When replacing the hard disk, perform the following procedure to the "MazakTdc software.
Item necessary to be prepared:
Media such as a USB memory
Step 1 Save (export) the parameters.

Save the parameters in the "Mazaktdc folder, referring to 8. Controlling the parameters."
Note: If no change was made to the parameters on a customers machine, it is not needed
to save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder "C:Mazaktdc.
Step 2 Save the *.txt" files under the C:Mazaktdc folder to the media.
Step 3 Replace the hard disk.
Step 4 Turn on the power and copy the "*.txt file in the media to the C:Mazaktdc folder.
Step 5 Import the parameters, referring to 4 Basic function operations, 5 Opening the window"
and 8 Controlling the parameters.
Step 6 Turn off and then turn on the power to check that the "MazakTdc software is started up.
415
10 Recovering the wire breaking on a thermistor

The alarm THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ERROR will arise when the wire breaking occurs
on a thermistor.
The CH temperature value will change for a thermistor with the wire breaking and the offset amount
will considerably change in the Mazaktdc window, as shown in the figure below.
- a)x|

File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help
H v 3V
ffi
05/06/27 19:48:03;
05/06/27 19:48:13;
05/06/27 19:48:23;
05/06/27 19:48:33;
05/06/27 19:43:43;
05/08/27 19:43:53;
05/06/27 19.49:03;
ab
20.95
20.75
20.95
20.95
20.95
20.98
20.95
20.70
20.75
20.75
20 95
%<l : c!
21.98
22.07
22.03
22.12
22.03
22.03
21.93
20.75
20.75
20 75
X
3000
3000
0.00
20.521
20.47
20.47
20.47
20.47
0.4/
0.00
0.00
3000
0.00
3000
0.00
3000
0.00
3000
0.00
3000
7
7
7
7
7
7
goo
6.500
6.500
6.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.500
6.500
4.500
6.500
6.500
joo
File
Edit
H ' *> BV
ffi
tefr
05/08/27 19:58:03; 20.95

05/06/27 19:53:13; 20.95
05/08/27 19:58:23; 20.95
05/06/27 19:58:33; 20.95
05/06/27 19:58:43; 20.98
05/06/27 19:58:53; 20.95
05/06/27 19:59:03; 20.95
20.75
20.70
Ready
View
ab Cfl
21.98
22.07
20.75
20.75
22.03
20.75
22.03
20.75
22.03
20.75
21.98
22.12
12.500
12.500
12.500
Considerably
change
in|x|
) ffjfe
44.1a
-44.16\
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
-44.16 1 0.00
-44.16 j 0.00
3000
I
1
0.00
0.00
-44.16
-44.16
\-44.1i
0.00
3000
3000
3000
3000
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
#7?) .500
76.500
82.500
88.500
98.500
100.000
'WO .000
il
-49.500
-53.500
-36.500*
-41.000
-57.500
-45.500
-61.500
-65.500
-69.500
-73.500
-50.000
ui ffi
05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95

05/06/27 20:03:13; 20 .95
05/O6/27 20:03:23; 20.95
05/06/27 20:03:33; 20.95
05/06/27 20:03:43; 20.98
05/06/27 20:03:53; 20 95
05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95
.3
-54.500
20.75
20.70
20.75
21.98
22.07
22.03
20.75
22.12
20.75
20.75
22.03
20.75
21.98
22.03
@ ?
-44 16
-44 16
0.00
,IOjxj
Recovered
V
i
~j Will not recover "Il

soon after action
a 8#0
-80.500
85 000
89.500
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
3000
'SfoO.OOO
20.47 ! 0.00
-100.000 -77 500
-85.000
20.47/ 0.00
3000
-100.000 -73.500
-S0[5G0
0.00
[RUM f
0.00
20.47\
State at the
wire breaking
-J
-59.000
.b
-63.500
12.500,
Help
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformatioij Compent

File Edit Compensate Setting.. View
Normal state
Jll:
Deformatio|i Cotwarn
Setting.
Compensation
ill
12.500
rm r 4
Ready
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal
12.50l>
12.500
Ready
-1Q|
.500
-81.500
yv000
State that the

wire breaking
was recovered
-89.5(315%
;NUM
d
A
After finding the wire breaking on a thermistor, recover it according to the procedure below.
Step 1 Open the "MazakTdc window and check the temperature values and the offset amounts
of the thermistor channels (CH 1 to 5) for wire breaking.
Step 2 Press the Emergency button on the machine.
Step 3 Recover the wire breaking of a thermistor.
Step 4 Confirm that the temperature value of a channel with the wire breaking was recovered on
the MazakTdc window.
(It will take a longer time for the offset amount to return to the normal state due to the
filders.)
Step 5 Restart the MazakTdc software. (As for how to exit and start the MazakTdc software
refer to 4 Basic function operations.
Step 6 Confirm that the temperature value and the offset amount were recovered.
416
11 Handling procedure after turning the production machine ON

It is required to import the parameters after turning the production machine ON. The following
provides the procedure.
Step 1 Copy the specified parameters file *.txt to the C:Mazaktdc folder.
[ W.tj'grl Mazaktdc
-!n|x|
:. SrSW :
PS.-OTP
S rx)frr
71 3>t>S
M S)
MW*
X*!j| I iNi MasakTde.exe
35<>f FD (A;)
! jgj Parameter trt
B- <Ci
d AcrobatReader
Cl C">~
60KB TfWWj
4KB 747K#
(_J Custom Display

J2ctbus
O Ladder
gj Ladders
Cj Ladder4
j LADDERWTNB
DmSv.ymw
m6yboot
SI
g) Mamte
dEHHSS
& d MC.Backee
Cj MC.Direct Mode
1 MC_Machme
10*?%'*.:
P n[
Pfogrl JLL
di
Step 2 Start MazakTdc.exe manually. Refer to 4 Basic function operations.

Step 3 Open the window. Refer to 5 Opening the window.
Step 4 Import the parameters. Refer to 8 Controlling the parameters.
Step 5 Click the
button to close the window.
Step 6 Exit MazakTdc.exe. Refer to 4.2 Exiting the software.

Step 7 Set the parameter for the software functions on Matrix so that the MazakTdc software
can be started from Matrix. Refer to 2.1 Function setting on Matrix.
417
418

Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

MAZATROL

Digital MJTUf@PMtOg Solutions

MATRIX Sale points

muJ1 lg0'3Spic5Sgv';; .;S313i

3000/ 4000 r.p.m

Ergonomically Designed Control Pane

3, Acrylic key top

for easy click

7. Same design for all

8. Tactile feel switches K

jPC Card Standard ATA compliant memory card only

Rear side of part surrounded

Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit

[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]

Good morning. Today is <dayofweek> <rnonth> <day>"

I r~m mmmmmmmmmmm mmmm

1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting

Simultaneous cutting at unrelated work pieces

** * X KWiMMKin< 1*01 ISM

<88 ttfjunftMfc *<*

ItWMB ***. .#***

** SUI&U, tH&ttl,* ttmwr

SUSIMS. wsmtt;* CJM*ur

. Running Management Display

Use status of spindles (speed and load)

&*** s s'M? ammwm f***

3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display

5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display

The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.

LADDER- B 10 0 1W568-A0 0 IB:

7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays

8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu

Standard Installation of Print Screen Software on NC

A file can be saved in either of the TNG" and BMP" formats.

Active Print Screen & SAVE

10, Operation Log & Operation Player Softwares (M740Eye.exe

MI-P12-M2 : Board PC unit

:PLC engine card

-.Axis extension I/F

Back Side of Matrix

Right Side of Back

Two Leds Display

2 Usb 1.1 Plugs

Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup

".T.- 'C !_. '

M1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB

i&.wiiiiiiiiiMm iriii:i Ti 1 1':

PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB

HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus

I ftisiSfi Sif ssl

HN163 or HN154: NC main PCB

Pic Engine Card. Where the plc(s)

This is where the Sram data is stored,

HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM

This contains Main-A, Control Serial Number,

HN531 : PCMCIA slots (2) and 2nd servo interface (OPT2)

HN251 : Front slot PC card and USB interfaces

HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB

*ri 5fs, <-;#

NC covers: Top and middle

CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15 LCD

NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire for overheat detection

xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ

PD27 Power Supply

<88 ttfjunftMfc <

ItWMB . .#

&* s s'M? ammwm f*